JP6537657B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state relatively advantageous to a player.

  In the gaming machine, if a game medium such as a game ball is won (passed) in a predetermined passing area provided in the game board, is it made to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state etc.) relatively advantageous for the player? If it is determined that the determination result is to shift to the specific gaming state, the identification information is variably displayed on the display device, and the stop display is performed in a specific manner, based on the stop display mode of the identification information There is one that shifts to a specific gaming state.

  For this type of gaming machine, it is possible to execute a specific effect that increases the expectation for the transition of the specific gaming state, for example to increase the probability of selecting for such a specific effect during a special gaming state (time-saving gaming state etc) In some cases, there is one configured to prevent as much as possible the end without a sense of expectation being enhanced during the special game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-35698, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, attention to a specific effect is easily diluted, and there is a drawback that it is difficult to enhance the effect on the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to a specific effect and effectively exhibiting the effect on the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passage area through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area;
Identification information display means capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means;
Gaming state control means for performing control to shift to the specific gaming state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the identification information display means;
When the variable display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area while the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, the specific aspect of the identification information Hold information storage means capable of storing hold information including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Specific effect determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a specific effect based on passage of gaming media through the passage area;
And an effect executing unit capable of executing the specific effect when the specific effect determining unit determines execution of the specific effect.
The specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect,
The first specific effect is to display a predetermined initial number of specific images,
The effect executing means is
Later the specific image of the predetermined number of initial is displayed, in the first period to the identification information based on the specific effect pending information execution is determined in starts displaying variation, the first specific effect as the predetermined number of initial decreases being capable of performing display of the specific image as the predetermined remaining number,
In the second period following the first period until the identification information based on the hold information for which the execution of the specific effect is determined stops the variable display after the specific image of the predetermined remaining number is displayed , as the second specific effect, in accordance with the predetermined remaining number, to change the presentation mode of the second specific effect,
When the first specific effect is performed such that the predetermined remaining number of the specific image is zero, the second specific effect is not performed .

A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passage area through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area;
Variation display pattern determination means capable of determining the variation display pattern of the identification information based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means;
Identification information display means for performing variation display of identification information based on the variation display pattern determined by the variation display pattern determination means;
Effect pattern determination means for determining an effect pattern based on the fluctuation display pattern determined by the fluctuation display pattern determination means;
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect according to the fluctuation display of the identification information in the identification information display means based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means;
Gaming state control means for performing control to shift to the specific gaming state when identification information is stop-displayed in a specific mode based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means;
And a special game state control unit capable of controlling a special game state relatively more advantageous than a non-special game state until the number of times of variation display of identification information reaches a predetermined number of times after termination of the specific game state.
The effect pattern determination means can determine an effect pattern of either a specific effect pattern or a special effect pattern different from the specific pattern in the same variation display pattern,
The fluctuation display pattern determination means, when the fluctuation display count of the identification information from the end of the specific gaming state reaches the specific number, as a fluctuation display pattern when performing fluctuation display of the identification information, a specific fluctuation display pattern Can be determined,
In the case where the specific variation display pattern is determined by the variation display pattern determination means, the effect pattern determination means may
If the specific effect pattern is not determined in the special gaming state, the specific effect pattern can be determined,
If the specific effect pattern is determined in the special gaming state, the special effect pattern can be determined,
The effect executing means is
When the specific effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination means, a specific effect is executed as the effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the identification information,
When the special effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination means, the special effect is executed as the effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the identification information.

  According to such a configuration, in the special gaming state, when the specific variation display pattern is determined as the variation display pattern when the number of times of variation display of the identification information reaches the specific number, if a specific effect pattern is not determined While a specific effect pattern is determined in the specific number of times, if a specific effect pattern is determined, a special effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern in the specific number of times is determined. That is, in the special gaming state, while the specific effect based on the specific effect pattern is executed up to the specific number of times, the number of execution times can be reduced as much as possible, thereby enhancing the degree of attention to the specific effect and its usefulness. At the same time, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the specific effect.

The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
In the case where the specific effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the identification information display means than in the case where the special effect pattern is determined. It is characterized by a high probability.

  According to such a configuration, the identification information is more specific in the case where the specific effect is executed based on the specific effect pattern than in the case where the special effect is executed based on the special effect pattern. Since the probability of stopping display is high, that is, the expectation for the specific gaming state is enhanced, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the specific effect in the special gaming state, and effectively prevent the deterioration of interest in the special gaming state Can.

Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The specified number of times includes a first specified number of times and a second specified number of times different from the first specified number of times,
The particular aspect includes a first particular aspect and a second particular aspect different from the first particular aspect.
The variation display pattern determination means
As a variation display pattern when the number of times of variation display of identification information reaches the first specific number of times after the end of the specific gaming state shifted based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the first specific mode, The specific variation display pattern can be determined,
As a variation display pattern when the number of times of variation display of identification information reaches the second specific number of times after the end of the specific gaming state shifted based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the second specific mode, The specific variation display pattern can be determined.

  According to such a configuration, the specific number of times the specific variation display pattern is determined in the special gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is determined to shift to the specific gaming state before shifting to the special gaming state The stop display mode of the identification information will differ depending on whether it is the first specific mode or the second specific mode. That is, in the special gaming state, when there is a case where the specific effect is executed when the variation display number of the identification information reaches the first specific number, the specific effect is executed when the second specific number is reached In some cases, the specific effect can be performed irregularly, so it is difficult to catch the execution timing of such specific effect, and it can be felt as if the specific effect was performed by accident.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of attention to a specific effect and effectively exhibiting the effect on the effect.

It is an appearance perspective view of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an enlarged perspective view of an essential part of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the specifications of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a view showing a one round opening and closing pattern of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the superimposition pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth switch check processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol determination processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows waiting time management processing before big opening mouth reopening of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing under big winning opening opening of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit production pattern determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement timing relevant to the big winning opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows 1 round opening-and-closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the additional pattern selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional pattern table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional character selection table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows waiting time management processing before big opening mouth reopening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing under big winning opening opening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a hit end interval management process of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit production pattern determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine additional bonus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows 1 round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval between rounds of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for bonus bonus pattern selection for the game machine top which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st modification of a big winning opening shutter. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement of the special winning opening shutter which concerns on a 1st modification. It is a front view which shows the game board and the 2nd modification of a variable winning a prize apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the 3rd modification of a variable winning prize apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification from another direction. It is a top view which shows the internal structure of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a right view which shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a left side view showing a variable winning prize device concerning the 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is sectional drawing which shows the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a perspective view which shows the drive unit of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a part of drive unit of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a front view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus concerning the other example of the 4th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a top view which shows the main parts of the variable winning prize apparatus which concerns on the other example of a 5th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the opening and closing operation of the variable winning prize apparatus concerning the other example of the 5th modification. It is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the direction change apparatus provided in the game board in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a starting opening unit provided in a game board in a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of a starting opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the crane apparatus contained in a starting opening unit. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of the presentation mode of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the display screen of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation timing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd special symbol variation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd special symbol variation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 1st presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 1st presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 1st presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 1st presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 1st presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd presentation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pending | holding information storage area of work RAM of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the jewelry reserve information storage area of work RAM of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for jewel reserve display pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pending | holding information display pattern temporary determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for advance notice execution determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for advance notice classification determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for prefetch information prediction object pending | holding information determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for a display information display combination thing final display color pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pending | holding display change pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pending | holding display change pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pending | holding display change pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for holding information display combination thing movable pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for fireworks display final display number determination of the game machines which concern on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for the pyrotechnicians initial display number of persons determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pyrotechnics color arrangement pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for pyrotechnics reduction pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for determination of the fireworks driver decreasing gasse pattern of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for promotion timing number determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for promotion executability determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for promotion pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for promotion pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination processing of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd starting opening switch check processing of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the demonstration display control processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st pending | holding information update process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows advance notice processing of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a prefetch notice pattern decision processing of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information display role thing pre-reading advance notice pattern decision processing of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pyrotechnician pre-reading notice pattern determination processing of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation pattern determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal mode performance pattern determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pyrotechnic player promotion pattern determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special mode performance pattern determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows ST mode performance pattern determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd suspension information update process of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice end processing of a gaming machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol stop processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode transfer processing of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the demonstration display (2) of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the demonstration display (3) of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the demonstration display (4) of the game machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pseudo run of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pyrotechnician pre-reading notice of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the pyrotechnician pre-reading notice of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating a reservation information display role thing pre-reading notice of a game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the reservation information number change prefetch notice of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 35 is a view showing a first special symbol variation pattern determination table for a game machine according to a modification of the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a view showing a first special symbol variation pattern determination table for a game machine according to a modification of the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd special symbol variation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd special symbol variation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd special symbol variation pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd effect pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 2nd effect pattern determination of the game machine which concerns on the modification of 5th Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described using FIGS. 1 to 5.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a main frame base on which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which game balls can roll and flow down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main frame 2 provided with a board 2a (also referred to as a main frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) capable of visually recognizing the game board 1 And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (the player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Comprises a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably mounted, and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 at the rear (the counter player side) of the main body frame 2 Have.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. In addition, while the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 in FIG. 1, the state which the main body frame 2 was closed with respect to the outer frame 6 is shown, and in this state, a back frame is Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided on the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame component members include the protective glass 7, the dish unit 8, the operation unit 9, the speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (the top decoration 14, the right decorative member 15, the left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a front frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the front frame 3 are contained. Further, in the pan unit 8, respective cover members (upper pan top cover 8a, lower pan cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3 h (window portion) provided on the front frame base plate 3 a provided on the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3 a When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 2, the front frame 3 faces the front (front) side of the game board 1 and covers the front (front) side. At the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h for producing effects by sound.

  Moreover, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decoration member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a playing card later described is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and light emitting display modes are provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. The right decorative member 15 (for example, the upper right lens 15a, the right middle lens 15b, the right panel cover 15c, etc.) and the left decorative member 16 (for example, the left outer lens 16a) that can be changed are provided.

  Inside the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27 etc.) controlled by a sub control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later are provided (see FIG. 6) . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 and is detected from the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 as an aesthetically pleasing light or diffused light, for example. Thereby, since it is possible to change the display mode by the light, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, a dish unit 8 is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3 h of the front frame base plate 3 a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing lending balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 provided on the lower side of the upper tray 17 and capable of storing, for example, gaming balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing gaming balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper tray 17 includes an upper tray main body 17p capable of storing gaming balls, and an upper tray upper cover 8a removably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper tray main body 17p. An upper plate decoration member is provided to improve the appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper dish decoration member, the upper dish main body 17p is provided with an upper dish left decoration 17a, an upper dish front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper dish upper cover 8a. In the upper plate upper cover 8a, it is bent from the left side to the lower side through the front side and from the middle toward the right side to the lower plate 18.

  A payout opening 20 for paying out gaming balls to the upper plate 17 and a discharge opening for discharging gaming balls stored in the upper tray 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a (not shown) And a supply port 21 for supplying the lower plate 18 with gaming balls discharged from the discharge port. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage cover (shown in FIG. 6) is configured to communicate the ball passage of the game ball dispensed from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6) and the discharge port and the supply port 21. ) Is provided. When the gaming ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the gaming ball is sent to the upper tray 17 through the payout opening 20, but the upper portion of the gaming sphere is retained near the payout opening 20 although the gaming ball is paid out. Is full, or when the ball release button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged through the ball passage and the lower plate via the supply port 21. Sent to 18

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used to decorate the front of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used to decorate the front portion 17c of the upper tray 17. By using the plating member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the player's interest.

  In addition to a return button 24 for returning a card from the card lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a card unit 84 for lending a gaming ball not shown (see FIG. 6), etc. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game of. Although the arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, the pressing operation button 9A is vertically projected from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the drawing as an example, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 is shown in which the jog dial 9B is arranged.

  As for the front frame 3, among the front surface (front surface), a portion on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side, for example, an illegal piano wire or the like It is possible to assume that a fraudulent action by the fraudulent member is performed on various components built on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion by infiltrating the member.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an illegal act, a cover member (not shown) with a wire holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at the portion where the intruding act by the illegal member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding a wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) formed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function that has the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, so it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. Can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 includes a main body frame base plate 2 a and various main body frame components provided to the main body frame base plate 2 a. The main body frame constituent members include the launcher 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main frame 2, a main frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3 h is provided at a predetermined position of the main frame base plate 2 a facing the above front frame opening 3 h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, on the lower right side of the main body frame opening portion, a launch device 26 for launching game balls is provided.

  The launcher 26 includes a panel 26a for disposing the launcher 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the body frame base plate 2a, a launch handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel 26a, and a panel 26a. It is disposed on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a opposite to the rear surface side of the main frame 2 and comprises a launch drive device (not shown) for launching game balls.

  In the lower right side of the front frame 3, a notch 3p for exposing the launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) to the player side is provided. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launcher 26 (panel body 26 a, the launch handle 26 b) is exposed through the notch 3 p of the front frame 3 and adjacent to the above-described tray unit 8. Be positioned. Such a launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) and the tray unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were integrated with one another in series.

  The launch handle 26b is rotatably mounted on a support portion (not shown) and the support portion, and is provided in a handle grip 26d which can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, and provided in the support portion. Stop control switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the shutter, a release stop button 26e (also referred to as an operating member) for turning the release stop switch ON / OFF, and a handle arranged to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d And a cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the discharge handle 26b is rotated clockwise, the drive force of the discharge drive is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotational angle), and the drive force at that time stores in the upper tray 17. The game ball being shot is launched at a predetermined timing toward the game area 1 p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. For example, in the present embodiment, it is possible to fire 90.9 game balls per minute by the firing drive device, and one game ball can be fired approximately every 0.66 seconds. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, a spring member (not shown) is provided for resiliently urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times, and the player can adjust the spring member to the elasticity. By rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction, the game ball is fired.

  Also, when the player interrupts the game and releases his hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time point position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the firing stop button 26e is pressed by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d, whereby the firing of the gaming ball is stopped.

  As a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the gaming ball in the launching device 26, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, By changing the power supplied to the launch solenoid (not shown), the launch intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased, but as another launch device, it is linked to the turning operation of the handle grip of the launch handle. It may be provided with a firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism for rolling up (tightening) the firing spring. In such a launcher, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip of the launch handle, thereby strengthening or weakening the degree of winding (tightening) of the launch spring. Can increase or decrease the launch intensity of the

  The speaker 10 c is provided at the lower center of the main body frame 2 so as to perform effects by sound. A sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through a speaker cover 10k provided at a portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, a portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game balls can roll down. doing. In addition, although the game board 1 is formed by the material (for example, polycarbonate etc.) which has translucency, you may be formed by the material which does not have translucency like a plywood etc., for example.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 opens and closes the first guide rail 30, the second guide rail 30 ′, the stage 31, the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, and the second start opening 33. Wing member 34, passing gate 35, big winning opening 37, large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the big winning opening 37, plural general winning openings 40, out opening 41, upper movable effect member 42A, lower movable effect member 42B , The cover member 43, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, the passing gate 35, the special winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40 form a passing area through which game balls can pass. . The special winning opening shutter 37A is a displacing member that can be displaced between the first mode in which the game ball can easily pass through the passing area (big winning hole 37) and the second mode in which the game ball is in the hard closing state. Equivalent to. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed. The special winning opening 37, the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the cover member 43 are provided as parts or parts constituting the variable winning device.

  The first guide rail 30 is disposed to extend generally from the left to the upper center toward the game board 1, and is constituted by an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper portion of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is disposed on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The second guide rail 30 'is disposed so as to extend generally from the upper right to the lower right toward the gaming board 1, and is constituted by an outer rail 30C and an inner rail 30D. The outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are for guiding the game balls from the upper right side of the game board 1 to the big winning opening 37 disposed at the lower right side. On the surface where the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are opposed to each other, a plurality of convex portions 30E capable of coming into contact with the game balls flowing down through between the outer rail 30C and the inner rail 30D are provided at predetermined intervals. There is. As a result, the game balls flowing down through the second guide rail 30 'are repeatedly abutted against the convex portions 30E while being released from the lower end of the second guide rail 30', and thus the progress is suppressed. By reaching the mouth 37, the progressing speed of the gaming ball is effectively decelerated. The lower end of the second guide rail 30 'is located near the upper right portion of the cover member 43 (see FIG. 4). Thereby, the game balls discharged from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 'abut against the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 described later, and then roll along the upper surface 43a toward the large winning opening 37 It moves with. In addition, although the form arrange | positioned at equal intervals along the direction which guides a game ball, the convex part 30E of the outer rail 30C and the convex part 30E of inner rail 30D mutually oppose in FIG. 3 is shown, These convex portions may be arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions mutually offset along the direction of guiding the gaming balls.

  The stage 31 is for distributing the flow-through area of the game balls in the game area 1 p and is disposed along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball fired by the launch device 26 flows downward toward the lower part of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or the stage 31 or the like which is driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning in any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the large winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40. When passing through the gate 35 and not winning thereafter, it is recovered by being discharged from the out port 41.

  In addition, winning means that the game ball passes through the passing area or entering into the passing area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the passage area or enters the passage area to give an advantageous situation (for example, opening of the second start opening 33, symbol lottery, prize ball, etc.) to the player. Means In this case, passage of the passing area by the gaming ball means simple passing, and entering of the passing region by the gaming ball means collecting the gaming ball separately from the out port 41, but in any case, it will be described later. Since winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passage and entering are substantially equivalent. Therefore, since both passage of the game ball to the passage area and entry of the ball lead to winning, in the following description, it is unified by "winning" unless otherwise noted.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26 b is relatively small, the gaming balls flow down mainly on the left side of the stage 31 because the striking power given to the gaming balls is generally small. In addition, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the game ball flows down the right side of the stage 31 or flows along the second guide rail 30 'because the launch force given to the game balls is generally large. . In general, how to strike the game ball on the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-hand strike", and how to strike the game ball on the right side of the stage 31 and along the second guide rail 30 ' It is called right-handed.

  The first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 trigger a lottery under the condition that the game ball is winning (passing), and the result of the lottery is displayed on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4 Give an opportunity to

  The first starting opening 32 is provided generally at the lower position at the center of the game board 1. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided immediately below the first start port 32. When a game ball is won in the second starting opening 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. In the second starting opening 33, the difficulty of winning is determined by the blade member 34 as a normal motorized part. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The wing members 34 open and close in the forward and backward directions of the game board 1 in the forward and backward directions, and an open state enabling the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33, and the second It is a so-called ordinary electric winning combination that switches between the closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball in the starting opening 33. The wing member 34 is driven by a wing member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  It should be noted that the ordinary motor winning combination is not limited to one operating the wing member 34 so as to open and close in the front and rear direction, for example, a so-called electric tulip type in which the starting opening is expanded by rotating in the left and right direction of the game board 1 It may be a tongue-like member that opens and closes the starting opening by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of the game ball on the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball is won on the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The big winning opening 37 is opened in a hit gaming state (such as a big hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 37 is located on the lower right side of the game area 1 p, and is provided generally to the right of the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33. The position where the special winning opening 37 is disposed is not limited to the above-described position, and can be appropriately changed according to the specification of the gaming machine.

  The special winning opening 37 is an opening having a relatively large dimension in the left-right direction so that a plurality of gaming balls can be simultaneously winning. The special winning opening 37 is formed by the special winning opening shutter 37A and the cover member 43. The special winning opening 37 is formed as an opening between the front of the game board 1 and the cover member 43 when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in the open state, and is closed when the special winning opening shutter 37A is in the closing state. It becomes.

  The special winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the special winning opening 37. The dimension in the short direction of the special winning opening shutter 37A is about the diameter of the gaming ball. The special winning opening shutter 37A is provided to be able to protrude and retract in the front-rear direction of the gaming board 1. The state in which the special winning opening shutter 37A protrudes to the front of the game board 1 is a closing state in which the large winning opening 37 is closed, and the state in which the game board 1 is retracted backward is an opening state in which the special winning opening 37 is open . The upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A has a relatively gentle downward slope to the left in the closed state. The special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to be opened and closed by a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the cover member 43 is arranged to face the large winning opening shutter 37A. The cover member 43 has an upper surface 43a connected to the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, a front end guide 43b, and an opening 43c corresponding to the big winning opening 37. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the upper surface 43a extends from the lower end of the second guide rail 30 'to the right end of the big winning opening 37 (opening 43c) Make a slope of the trend. The upper surface 43a is arranged to support a plurality of gaming balls discharged from the second guide rail 30 'and to guide it to the big winning opening 37 (opening 43c) located at the left end. The front end guide portion 43b is a standing wall and is formed to extend from the right end of the upper surface 43a to the left end of the large winning opening 37 (opening 43c). On the inner surface of the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 43d that can contact the gaming ball are provided at predetermined intervals. Also, on the front appropriate portion of the game board 1 facing the front end guide portion 43b, a plurality of convex portions 1d that can be in contact with the game balls are provided at predetermined intervals. The convex portions 1 d of the game board 1 and the convex portions 43 d of the cover member 43 are arranged in a staggered arrangement at positions mutually offset along the traveling direction of the game ball. Thus, the game balls rolling along the upper surface 43a and the front end guide portion 43b repeatedly contact alternately with the convex portions 1d and 43d while moving to the left end of the large winning opening 37 (large winning opening shutter 37A). At this time, the progress of the game ball is effectively decelerated before passing the big winning opening 37 (big winning opening shutter 37A). The upper surface 43a, the large winning opening shutter 37A, and the front end guide portion 43b form a passage through which gaming balls can flow when the large winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, and suppress the progress of the flowing gaming balls. The suppression portion 430 is formed. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the opening 43 c is disposed at a position corresponding to the large winning opening shutter 37 A, and forms the large winning opening 37. At a portion of the game board 1 located inside such a cover member 43, a ball passage (not shown) for collecting game balls and a special winning opening count switch 370 are provided. The game ball dropped from the open special winning opening 37 is guided to the large winning opening count switch 370 through the ball passage, and is detected as a winning by the large winning opening count switch 370. In addition, the detailed configuration and operation of the special winning opening 37 will be described later.

  One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 40, although a lottery is not performed, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball on the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 to be described later, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery and the non-probability change / non-time-short game state and the special symbol lottery There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming status) that is higher than the non-time saving gaming status, and a short gaming state when the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non probability variation / non-time gaming status, special symbols in the normal gaming status When the lottery is won, it shifts to the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state).

  In the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a high probability state, and therefore the winning of the second starting opening 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade members 34 as the normal electric throws. This state is a state called so-called "power support", and it becomes easy to store the holding balls of the special symbol game described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game balls by winning in the second starting opening 33. Specifically, the time saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time saving gaming state 1), the state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time saving gaming state 2 ), The opening time of the wing member 34 as a motorized part normally means at least one of the relatively long states (time saving gaming state 3). For example, the time saving game state also includes a state in which the time saving game state 1, the time saving game state 2, and the time short game state 3 simultaneously progress with any combination. In such a time saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

  In the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, transition to a definite change / short time gaming state (a normal change gaming state which is a positive change gaming state and a short time gaming state) without fail, a non probability change / non short time gaming state (non probability change gaming state And it does not shift to the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state). On the other hand, when the number of symbol variations (number of games) of the special symbol game reaches a predetermined number without shifting to the big hit gaming state in the probability variation / time saving gaming state, the normal gaming which is the non-probability variation gaming state and the non time shortening gaming state It is supposed to move to the state.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, triggered by the fact that 10 special symbol lottery (10 times of the special symbol variation display or stop display) was performed in the probability variation / time reduction gaming state , Transition to non-probability · non-time saving gaming state. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, until it shifts to the next big hit gaming state, it may be made to maintain the probability variation / time saving gaming state. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state ending by performing the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times as in this embodiment will also be described as ST (Specia 1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 at the time of non-operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing specific effects. Is located in The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs rotation operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

  The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each gaming state and the lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2) A special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59 are provided. Although not illustrated, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) disposed on the game board 1 etc. includes the one corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state is normally determined It lights up (or blinks) when a superimposed character described later appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in a part of the special symbol in the gaming state or in the big hit gaming state.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not the second starting port 33 is opened by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric role when the gaming ball has won the passage gate 35 as a trigger. It displays the lottery result for the game. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 is capable of, for example, red lighting and blue lighting, and lights in red when winning in the normal symbol game, and lights in blue when losing in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a lighting mode of red, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 33 is permitted. In addition, as a lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, other lighting modes may be used, for example, it becomes a lighting state or blink state in the case of winning, while it becomes the extinguishing state in the case of losing You may

  In the normal symbol holding display unit 52, a new gaming ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. In the case of having performed, the number of executable times of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol held to perform the fluctuation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 after the next time is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 are normally located on the left side of the symbol display unit 51, and are arranged in a row along with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524, for example, when the number of holds is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 turn on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 turn off. When the number of reservations is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522 and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 light.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 32 and The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 32 is stopped and displayed as the stopping symbol according to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 33, The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 33 is displayed as a stop symbol relating to the second special symbol.

  The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like by repeating lighting and extinguishing each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (pattern) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol are different from each other. The first special symbol is a symbol serving as a transition trigger to the big hit gaming state, and there is a big hit symbol such as “provisional change 1” indicating transition to the probability changing gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. (See Figure 7). As a hit symbol of the second special symbol, it is a symbol that becomes a transition trigger to the big hit gaming state, and shows that it shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, such as "probability 1"-"prone variation 6" There is a big hit symbol of and a small hit symbol such as "small hit" which becomes a transition opportunity to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 7). That is, there is no small hit symbol that triggers transition to the small hit gaming state in the first special symbol, and the small hit that triggers transition to the small hit gaming state in the second special symbol hit symbol. There is a pattern. In addition, the 1st special symbol display part 53 and the 2nd special symbol display part 54 are not limited to 7 segment LED etc. For example, it may be based on combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554. Or, for the first special symbol variation display for the next and subsequent special symbol games when the new game ball is won in the first starting opening 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is the variation display of the symbols for the special symbol game The number of executable times (number of holdings) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended for the variation display of symbols for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the second starting opening 33 during the variation display of symbols for the special symbol game. The number of executable times (number of reservations) of the variable display of the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is arranged side by side vertically, and is located above the normal symbol hold display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holdings in the first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holdings by the normal symbol holding display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are connected to the first starting opening 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying variable. The game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the communicating ball passage or the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting hole 33 If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 which has been suspended is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the first start opening 32 The number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 33 is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held for four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 during variation is the main RAM 63 (see FIG. Information of the first special symbol game for 4 times stored as starting memory (starting memory information) in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) of 6) is held as the first special symbol starting memory area ( 1) to 1st special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as start storage. Similarly, with respect to the second special symbol game, when held for four times, information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in motion is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 ( Information on the second special symbol game stored for four times in the 0) as a start memory and held as a start memory in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) It is memorized. Therefore, the number of prize holdings for both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, is a maximum of eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 Alternatively, the suspension of the winning on the first starting opening 32 and the suspension of the winning on the second starting opening 33 may be displayed.

  The round display unit 59 is lighted while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number related to a round game (round game) described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, and 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off the LED lamps 591, 592, and 593. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is basically defined as 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "16R"). In this case, the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592, 593 are turned off. Do. The number of rounds (number of rounds) may mean the whole number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or an ordinal number indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. The number of rounds is, for example, "16 rounds" or "16R" when the former is meant, and "16th round" or "the 16th R", for example, when the latter is meant. In the following description, "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

  The liquid crystal display device 4 is disposed behind the gaming board 1 as shown in FIG. 3, and the display area 4A is disposed substantially at the center of the display panel 4 so that the player can visually recognize it. Other than the result of the hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting opening 33, various images related to the game, for example identification symbol for effect, effect image in normal game state, effect in big hit game state An image, an effect image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is configured to perform the fluctuation display of the identification information on condition that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c and the lamp / LED 27 constitute notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 which is a read only memory, a main RAM 63 which is a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. Is equipped. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processing in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 62.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start opening switch 320 disposed behind the first start opening 32. When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start opening switch 320 and the second start opening switch 330 are determined to have won when the game ball has entered the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, and thus the predetermined detection signal is set. It supplies the main control circuit 60.

  A pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won in the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display section 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51, an effect image is displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to make the player know that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning. You may

  The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 noting that winning is achieved when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the passage gate 35. Thus, the passing gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning opening left switch 400A and a general winning opening right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, the payout device 83 performs a predetermined number of winning balls.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a large winning opening count switch 370 disposed below the large winning opening 37. The special winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 37. When the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of gaming balls as a winning ball, and lowers the upper tray 17 or lower via the payout opening 20 or the supply port 21. Pay out on the plate 18. The special winning opening count switch 370 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 when the gaming ball passes through the special winning opening 37.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving the special winning opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the special winning opening 37. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37A is driven to change to an open state in which the game ball can win the winning hole 37 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. The opening drive of the special winning opening 37 by such a special winning opening shutter 37A, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54, and in the big hit gaming state It takes place when it is migrated.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. Thereby, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined light emission mode in the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the gaming ball is put in the second starting opening 33 It will be easier.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state which is not the short time gaming state (in the present embodiment "non-probability change / non-short time gaming state") is 0/257. Will not be released. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving gaming state) is, for example, 257/257, and when it is won, the wing member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times. Further, the number of normal symbols to be hit symbols in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number to be an upper limit when the second starting opening 33 is open is 10 (10).

  When the first starting opening switch 320 detects a game ball when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the first special symbol hold display unit 55 variably, the first special symbol hold display unit 55 1) The first special symbol based on winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is held, that is, the number of held according to the first special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the first special symbol is started.

  The second special symbol hold display unit 56 is a second special start symbol switch unit 330 when the game ball is detected while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is fluctuatingly displayed. 1 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variably displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is stopped and displayed, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is put on hold, that is, the held number relating to the second special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set such that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. . The corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning according to the winning order for the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33.

  In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of reservations for which the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is held, as described above, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 controls the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 The number of pending displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, up to 4 each. (Ie, the number of times of detection is 4), and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of reservations. Under the present circumstances, when the number of reservations reduces by completion | finish of the fluctuation display of a special symbol, the number of reservations is again added by making four pieces into an upper limit.

  When the number of pending first special symbol games in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 in change is the first of the main RAM 63 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63 It is sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of pending second special symbol games is held, for example, up to four, the second corresponding to the second special symbol display unit 54 being changed 2 Special symbol game information is stored as starting storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for the number of pending four is the second of the main RAM 63 2 Special symbols start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

  Therefore, the maximum number of pending game balls pertaining to the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol hold display portion 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending display by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the large winning opening 37 by the large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the large winning opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (one winning number in this embodiment) It is maintained until any one of the conditions is met, such as passing a defined later release time. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the big winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the big winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the big winning opening 37.

  In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit gaming state, a game in which the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed several times based on a big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later is referred to as "round game (round game)". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. For the state from when the big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game until the big winning opening 37 is opened as the next round game, “inter-round game” or “inter-round interval” or It is also called simply "interval". In the present embodiment, the big winning opening 37 is opened and closed only once in one round, but in the other example, the big winning opening 37 is opened multiple times in one round. And may be closed. When a plurality of big winning openings are provided, it is also possible to exclusively control the open / close state of the plurality of big winning openings in one round. That is, in one round, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning openings are continuously closed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called small hit gaming state is provided as a gaming state having a property different from the big hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit gaming state of this embodiment, the large winning opening 37 is defined to be opened only once. . Of course, in the small hit gaming state, control may be performed so that an arbitrary or specific large winning opening is repeatedly opened several times. The small hit gaming state is a gaming state in which the game is shifted in response to the winning of the small hit by the special symbol lottery. Before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state, basically the gaming state does not change. For example, when a small hit is won in the non probability variation gaming state and the small hitting gaming status is shifted to, the gaming status after the end of the small hitting gaming status remains the non probability variation gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming status It does not shift to the probability variation gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probability variation gaming state and the small hitting gaming status is entered, the gaming status after the termination of the small hitting gaming status is the small hitting gaming status as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability variation gaming state before transitioning to, and does not shift to the non probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of rounds) like one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with regard to the numbered “round” such as one round or the first round, for example, simply “R” as in 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. If the special winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times in one round game, the specified winning number per round is reached before the opening state is reached. The big winning opening is closed, and the round game is ended without the big winning opening being opened for the remaining number of times of opening.

  In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display region 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made of numerals except in a specific case. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  In addition, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is a specific stop display mode, the player is made to grasp that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, a special symbol is displayed on one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" that can be obtained by many balls. When the stop display is performed, the combination of the decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows The display image for the big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4).

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 described above will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable and writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by supplying power to the main RAM 63 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a wing member solenoid 340, and an external terminal board 80.

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of big hits, or a hall computer 100 managing a plurality of pachinko machines installed in the hall. Is for data communication.

  Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start opening switch 320, a second start opening switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a special winning opening count switch 370, a general winning opening left switch 400A, and a general winning opening A right switch 400B and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / firing control circuit 82 described later at the time of power interruption or the like according to the operation of the hole manager.

  Further, the main control circuit 60 is connected with the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / firing control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / emission control circuit 82. The dispensing and firing control circuit 82 mainly controls the launching device 26 and the dispensing device 83, and the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / firing control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving unit.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of gaming balls in accordance with the operation of a player, and can transmit and receive signals with the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and as the number of winning balls per one general winning opening 40. 10 game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of winning balls per winning to the large winning opening 37.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the player handles the firing handle 26b of the launching device 26 and rotates the device in the clockwise direction. Power is supplied to the game area 1p, and control is made to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main processing and executes timer interrupt processing as interrupt processing even during execution of main processing described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured to be supplied with a command from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and the sub CPU 71, program ROM 72, work RAM 73, command input port 74, backup capacitor 75, display control A circuit 76, an audio control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect apparatus control circuit 79 are included. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. The voice control circuit 77 is connected to the speakers 10 a, 10 b and 10 c. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor, a mechanism, and the like for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the push operation button switch 90A provided to the push operation button 9A and to the jog dial switch 90B provided to the jog dial 9B. The pressing operation button switch 90A is for detecting the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B is for identifying the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A, and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60.

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 described above will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for controlling the various effects mainly by the sub CPU 71 and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flag, counter, timer, value of variable, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60, and transmits the various commands to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by supplying power to the work RAM 73 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and, for example, an image data processor (VDP) and various image data are generated. It comprises an image data ROM in which data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores, in the frame buffer, image data to be displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative symbol image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 also supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The voice control circuit 77 is for performing control relating to voice and the like generated from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, for example, a sound source IC for performing control relating to voice and the like, voice data ROM for storing various voice data, voice signal Includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM according to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC also reads out the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the amplifier. In addition, this amplifier amplifies an audio | voice signal and generates audio | voice from speaker 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, and a decoration data ROM etc. in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored. It consists of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit game state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by the operation of the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9 Etc.) to control the rendering operation.

[Specs of gaming machines]
Next, specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability of the special symbol to be in the big hit gaming state is 1 / 99.75 (657/65536) in the low probability time (non-probability changing gaming state), high probability It is 1 / 113.05 (5020/65536) at the time (probable variation gaming state). The small hit probability of the special symbol to be a small hit gaming state is 1 / 29.92 (2190/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in order of priority given to the lottery with the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming status in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 10 times as the number of games (number of times of variation of the special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the hit pattern 1, and the number of rounds of round game is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds easy to win for the big winning opening 7R) is awarded, and the bonus name indicating the effect mode in the big hit gaming state is "normal bonus", and the bonus content is "7R bonus". In this "normal bonus", with respect to the winnings in the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of 1st to 7th eyes is one and the estimated number of winnings of 8th to 16th eyes is 0. As a result, in the "normal bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 105. The probability (rush rate) to be "certainly 1" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100. In the present embodiment, "bonus" means a notification effect related to the number of winning balls.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" is hit pattern 2 and is given the number of rounds 16R (effectively the number of rounds 16R), the bonus name is "large bonus bonus", the bonus content is "large bonus addition" It is a bonus. In the "large-accumulation bonus", with respect to the winnings at the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of 1st to 7th eyes is one and the estimated number of winnings of 8th to 16th eyes is four. As a result, in the "super-addition bonus", the planned number of prize balls is 645. The probability (rush rate) to be “certainly variable 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 2" is hit pattern 3 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "middle-on bonus 1", the bonus content is "middle It is an extra bonus 1 ". In the "middle additional bonus 1", with respect to the winnings at the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of 1st to 7th eyes is one and the estimated number of winnings of 8th to 16th eyes is three. As a result, the "premium bonus 1" has 510 planned balls. The probability (rush rate) of becoming “probable variation 2” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 20/100.

  The second special symbol big hit symbol "probable variation 3", the hit pattern 4 will be given the number of rounds 16R (also the number of rounds 16R) is given as the bonus name "intermediate bonus 2", as the bonus content "inside It is an additional bonus 2 ". In the "middle additional bonus 2", the estimated number of winnings for 1st to 7th eyes is 1, the estimated number of winnings for 8th and 9th eyes is 2, and the estimated number of 10th and 11th eyes for winning in the special winning opening 37 The number of prizes is three, the number of estimated prizes for the 12th R is one, and the number of prizes for the thirteenth to sixteenth eyes is four. As a result, in the "middle additional bonus 2", the number of planned prize balls is 510. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 3" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "4" is hit pattern 5 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus 1", the bonus content is "small It is an extra bonus 1 ". The "small advance bonus 1" has an estimated number of 1st to 7th winnings of 1 and an estimated number of 8th to 16th winnings of 2 for winning on the special winning opening 37. As a result, in the "small advance bonus 1", the number of planned prize balls is 375. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 4" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 15/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "5" is the hit pattern 6 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus 2", the effect content is "small It is an additional bonus 2 ". The "small advance bonus 2" has an estimated number of 1st to 13th winnings of 1 for the winnings on the special winning opening 37 and an estimated number of winnings of 14th to 16th r is four. As a result, in the "small advance bonus 2", the number of planned prize balls is 375. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 5" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "6" is hit pattern 7 and is given the number of rounds 16R (actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "no additional bonus", the content of bonus is "no additional It is a bonus. The "no additional bonus" has an estimated number of winnings of 1R to 16R for the winning on the special winning opening 37 as one. As a result, the planned prize ball number is 240 in the "no-addition bonus". The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 6" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the small hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit pattern 8 is made, and the bonus name and the bonus contents are "small hit". The rush rate of the small hit design is set to 100/100. In the small hit gaming state, unlike the big hit gaming state, there is no concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  The special winning opening count corresponds to the specified winning number which is one opportunity when the large winning opening 37 is changed from the open state to the closed state in one round, and in the present embodiment, the special winning opening count (predetermined winning number) Is set to "1". That is, when one winning combination for the big winning opening 37 is counted in one round, the big winning opening 37 is closed from the open state. Note that the special winning opening count number (prescribed number of winnings) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. That is, even if, for example, a prize that exceeds the special winning opening count number is detected in one round, the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is paid out. As a result, an over winning that exceeds the special winning opening count is possible. This point will be described later.

  As the time saving performance (specification of the time saving gaming state), the time saving gaming state is set to be continued during the high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state). The number of winning balls is three per winning combination for the starting opening (the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33), and is ten per winning combination for the general winning opening 40, to the special winning opening 37. It is set to be 15 pieces per prize. The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to 0/257 at low probability and 257/257 at high probability. The number of symbols per hit is set to one. The winning count number when the second starting opening 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as the upper limit.

  The specification may be as follows. For example, with regard to the special symbol, the big hit probability at the low probability time and the high probability is not limited to the one described above. That is, the big hit probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win a big hit at high probability than at low probability. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the probability of winning in the other special symbol is higher than that of one special symbol. With regard to the order of digesting the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be in the winning order without setting the priority, or the first special symbol may be prioritized. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Also, the probability change gaming state may be continued until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to that described above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, the types of jackpot symbols of the first special symbol may be increased. In addition, even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the extra bonus. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (prescribed winning number) is set to “1”, but is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening count may be set to 2 or more. In such a case, it is desirable to provide a special winning opening shutter or the like that allows the game balls larger than the special winning opening count number to pass simultaneously. The time saving performance may be more than the ST number (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST number including, for example, 0 times. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls relating to the special winning opening is set to a value different from that described above, the planned number of winning balls is calculated using that value and the estimated number of winnings, and notification of the additional number described later is performed. You can do so. With regard to the ordinary symbol, the low probability time and the high probability time hitting probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the hit probability of the normal symbol may be a probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability, for example, it may be winning at a low probability. The number of hit symbols of the normal symbols is not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the open patterns of the blade members be associated differently. The winning count number of the second starting opening may have a value other than that described above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the open / close pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, three types of opening and closing patterns A to C are defined as the opening and closing pattern (one round opening and closing pattern) of one round for the special winning opening 37. The opening and closing patterns A to C are opening and closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening and closing pattern C among them is an opening and closing pattern also corresponding to the small hit gaming state. Note that the opening / closing pattern C in the small hitting gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown as an opening / closing pattern for one round for convenience. The opening and closing patterns A to C shown in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the number of types and the specific time for defining the opening and closing patterns may be other than illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 10 s. The open / close pattern A is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. Similarly, in the other opening and closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening to the final closing. In a section where the open state is 10s, the open state of the special winning opening 37 is relatively long open. That is, in the opening and closing pattern A, the long opening is generated once, and the opening time of the opening and closing pattern A is 10 s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 5 s. The opening and closing pattern B is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. In the section where the open state is 5s, the open state of the special winning opening 37 is middle open shorter than the long open. That is, in the opening and closing pattern B, the middle opening occurs once, and the opening time of the opening and closing pattern B is 5 seconds.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern that only causes the open state to be 0.1 s. In the section where the open state is 0.1 s, the short open is considerably shorter than the middle open. That is, the open / close pattern C is such that short circuit opening occurs only once, and the open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.1 s.

  The substantial round game in the jackpot gaming state is a round game when opening and closing is controlled based on opening and closing patterns A and B including long opening or middle opening where winning of a game ball is possible among the opening and closing patterns A to C described above. Applicable The round game when the opening and closing control is performed based on the opening and closing pattern C is a non-substantially round game that does not correspond to a substantially round game.

  In addition, as an opening and closing pattern of one round, the following contents may be sufficient. The open pattern is not limited to the above three types, and may be two or less or four or more. The opening and closing pattern A may not be 10 seconds, but may be, for example, less than 10 seconds or more than 10 seconds, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round. As for the opening / closing pattern B, the opening time may not be 5 seconds, but may be less than 5 seconds or more than 5 seconds, for example, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round. Furthermore, the opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern B may be the same opening time, or the opening and closing pattern B may be longer than the opening and closing pattern A. For the opening and closing pattern C, the opening time may not be 0.1 s, for example, may be less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, the big hit opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 8 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The hit pattern 1 occurs during the normal bonus, and the number of rounds defined for the open rounds (hereinafter referred to as the “prescribed round number”) and the long open or middle where winning in the big winning opening 37 is possible The actual number of rounds defined only for the rounds including at least opening is the hit pattern defined as 7R. In addition, the interval between rounds starts immediately after the game ball of the specified winning number (1) is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 in one round, and the big winning until it is first opened in the next round It corresponds to the section where the mouth 37 is in the closed state. The inter-round interval may be started immediately after the big winning opening 37 is completely closed in one round. As shown in the figure, as a pattern of the inter-round interval, an interval pattern a in which the time (closing time) to be in the closed state is 0.3 s, an interval pattern b to be 1.65 s, and an interval pattern in 2.3 1 s c, an interval pattern d of 2.97 s is defined. The hit pattern 1 has an interval pattern a between all round intervals, and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, and the large winning opening 37 in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. The opening and closing pattern C is defined. That is, the hit pattern 1 specifies that the substantial round is the 7th round of the 1Rth to 7Rth, and the remaining 9th round of the 8Rth to 16Rth is executed as the non-substantially round.

  The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs upon a bonus game bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 2, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 7Rs is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of the 7R to the start of the 16Rs is the interval pattern d, and the 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. In the large extra bonus that is executed as an effect with hit pattern 2, the number of winning balls based on only the large winning opening count number (prescribed number of winnings: 1) will be 240, and including the over winning will be the planned winning ball number. Since it becomes 645, the number (405) corresponding to these differences is notified as an additional number in the first half round (the 1st to 7th rounds).

  The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 1, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 3, the interval between rounds from the end of 1R to the start of 7R is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of 7R to the start of 16R is the interval pattern c, and 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. The middle bonus bonus 1, which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 3, is 240 in the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes, and the planned number of prize balls will be 510 if over winning is included. The number (270) to be played is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 2, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 4, the interval between rounds from the end of 1R to the start of 7R is the interval pattern a, and the interval between round from the end of 7R to the start of 9R is the interval pattern b, from the end of 9R to the start of 11R The interval between rounds is interval pattern c, the interval between rounds between 11R and 12R is interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of 12R to the start of 16R is interval pattern d, and 1R to 16R The big winning opening 37 is defined to be the opening and closing pattern B in all the rounds of. In the middle additional bonus 2 which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 4, the number (270) corresponding to the difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of balls (510) is the second half round (round 8R and subsequent rounds) It is informed as an additional number.

  The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern which is generated when the small bonus is added 1 and the number of defined rounds and the number of substantially rounds are defined as 16R. In hit pattern 5, the interval between rounds from the end of 1R to the start of 7R is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of 7R to the start of 16R is the interval pattern b, and 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. The small bonus bonus 1, which is executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 5, is 240 in the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes, and the planned number of balls will be 375 if over winning is included. The number to be performed (135) is reported as an additional number in the first half round.

  The hit pattern 6 is a hit pattern which is generated when the small bonus is added 2 and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In hit pattern 6, the interval between rounds from the end of the 1Rth to the start of the 13Rs is the interval pattern a, and the interval between rounds from the end of the 13Rs to the start of the 16R is the interval pattern d, and the 1R to 16R It is specified that the big winning opening 37 has the opening and closing pattern B in all rounds. In small additional bonus 2 which is executed as an effect together with hit pattern 6, a number (135) corresponding to the difference between the number of winning balls (240) and the scheduled number of balls (375) is notified as an additional number until the second half round .

  The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern which is generated when the bonus is not added and the number of defined rounds and the number of substantially rounds are defined as 16R. Hit pattern 7 specifies that all inter-round intervals from the end of the 1st R to the start of the 16th R are the interval pattern a, and the big winning opening 37 has the open / close pattern B in all the 1st to 16th R rounds. It is done. In the no-addition bonus executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 7, there is no difference between the number of prize balls (240) and the planned number of prize balls (240) since it is difficult for over winning to occur, and notification of the number of additions is performed. Absent.

  The hit pattern 8 is generated in the small hit gaming state, and the large winning opening 37 is defined to be the open / close pattern C only once. That is, the hit pattern 8 is executed as a hit pattern in which the possibility of winning the gaming ball with respect to the large winning opening 37 is extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as described later, the interval time between rounds is defined as the above-mentioned interval patterns a to d on the assumption that the gaming balls are continuously fired, but the gaming balls are as described above. The interval time between rounds may be defined on the basis of the launch operation start point of. For example, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of gaming balls are fired successively by the launch operation start, for example, the second game sphere can reach the big winning opening shutter 37A from the launch operation start time. The expected maximum arrival time for the second wax is 3.99 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s). Similarly, the third estimated maximum arrival time is 4.65 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), the fourth estimated maximum arrival time is 5.31 s (3.33 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s), 5 The second estimated maximum reach time is 5.97 s (3.33 s + 0.66 + 0.66 s + 0.66 s + 0.66 s). Thus, as the interval pattern b, a time corresponding to such a second estimated maximum arrival time may be defined. That is, although the interval patterns a to d may be other than the above-mentioned time, it is preferable that the interval pattern a is a time less than the second assumed maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern b is the third assumed maximum The time is preferably less than the arrival time, the interval pattern c is preferably less than the fourth expected maximum arrival time, and the interval pattern d is less than the fifth expected maximum arrival time. It is preferable that In the present embodiment, the interval pattern d which is the maximum time of the inter-round interval is defined as a time in which four winnings per round (three over winnings) can be realized, but five or more per round are specified. It may be a time when winning is possible. However, when enabling five or more winnings, it is preferable to set the size in the longitudinal direction of the large winning opening shutter 37A to a length that allows at least five gaming balls to pass simultaneously. Also, the hit pattern 1 may be one in which the same open / close pattern is assigned to all the rounds, or alternatively, the open / close pattern may be different only in some of the rounds. Furthermore, the hit pattern 1 may have a different interval pattern only for a part of the intervals between rounds. In the hit patterns 2 to 7, the opening and closing patterns may be different in some or all of the rounds. In addition, the hit patterns 2 to 7 may have different interval patterns only at some intervals between rounds.

[Specifications of the big winning opening shutter]
Next, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (big winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as being different from FIG. 3 or the like for the sake of convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 (not shown) (the direction indicated by the white arrow in the drawing). For example, when the diameter d of the gaming ball is 11 mm, the large winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of about d × 8 + a (6 mm) = 94 mm. As a result, up to eight gaming balls can simultaneously pass through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state. However, in the present embodiment, a firing interval until one game ball is fired after one game ball is fired according to the firing operation start, or one game ball is fired As shown in FIG. 10B by considering the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A (the upper area of the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state). On the assumption, up to four game balls can pass simultaneously. The time until the gaming ball that has reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 (the time until the interval between rounds starts) is about 0.1 s. In addition, the time required to move from one of the positions to the other position of the positions where the special winning opening shutter 37A places the large winning opening 37 in the closed state and the opening position is about 0.01 s. It is.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the launcher 26 has a number of shots per minute of 90.90 / min and a firing interval of 0.66 seconds. In addition, the gaming ball takes approximately 3.00 to 3 as a time from the shooting preparation position (not shown) to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A through the first guide rail 30 and the second guide rail 30 '. It takes 33 seconds. Thereby, in the state where the right hitting is continued, the next game ball is a big winning after approximately 0.33 to 0.99 seconds after one game ball reaches the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A. The right end of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. The large winning opening shutter 37A has a longitudinal dimension L of 94 mm, and a maximum of eight gaming balls having a diameter d of 11 mm can pass simultaneously in a row, but the upper surface has 0. Since it is an inclined surface advancing by 11 mm in 33 seconds, that is, advancing by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds, substantially up to 4 gaming balls can be passed simultaneously. Then, the interval between rounds is started from the time when the winning of one game ball is detected during the round game, and it is started immediately before the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37. In addition, immediately after the game ball reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened, and the time from when the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 It takes 0.1 second. Furthermore, it is assumed that 0.01 second is required for one opening and closing operation in which the special winning opening shutter 37A moves from the closed position to the open position or from the open position to the closed position.

  In the present embodiment, by assuming various times as described above, in the state in which the right hitting is continuously performed in the big hit gaming state, the time interval between rounds after the end of the first R is an interval In the case of 2.97 s of the pattern d, four wins are possible including three over wins per round. For a time of such an interval pattern d, for example, after the gaming ball whose winning detection is performed at the 1st R reaches the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball becomes the big winning opening after 0.99 seconds at the maximum. From the time when the right end portion of the shutter 37A is reached, the time when four game balls including this game ball will be located on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A is approximately 0.99s + 0.66s × 3 ( This is demonstrated from the fact that it becomes = 2.97s. In addition, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the 1st R is 2.31 s of the interval pattern c, 3 wins including 2 over wins per round become possible. This can be assumed as a reduction from three over wins to two over wins. Thereby, with respect to the time of the interval pattern c, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d corresponding to the above-described three over wins with respect to the time when three gaming balls will be positioned on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It is considered that one passage time is deducted from this, and it is proved from 2.97 s−0.66 s = 2.31 s. Similarly, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first R is 1.65 s of the interval pattern b, two winnings including one over winning per round are possible. This can be assumed as a reduction from two over wins to one over win. Thereby, for the time of the interval pattern b, 2.31 s of the interval pattern c corresponding to the two over winnings described above for the time when two gaming balls will be located on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A. It can be considered that the transit time of one sample is deducted from this, and it is proved from 2.31 s−0.66 s = 1.65 s. Furthermore, if the time of the interval between rounds after the end of the first R is 0.3s of the interval pattern a, there is no over winning in one round, and only one winning is possible. With respect to the time of such an interval pattern a, for example, after the gaming ball whose winning detection is performed at the 1st R reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A, the next gaming ball becomes the big winning opening after 0.33 seconds at the shortest. To reach the right end portion of the shutter 37A, it is demonstrated that the next game ball is in an open state before reaching the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A in 0.3 s shorter than such 0.33 seconds. Ru.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, although lottery value (random number value) information for determining predetermined matters based on lottery values (random number values) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range is defined in the table, these lottery Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, "random number value" may be simply referred to as "random number". 11 and 13 show the selection rate (%) corresponding to the lottery rate.

[Add pattern selection table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an addition pattern selection table. The additional pattern selection table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional pattern selection table is a table for selecting an additional pattern as a hit effect pattern to be described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 7. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 7, and defines various kinds of additional patterns to be determined and selection rates (%) when selecting the additional patterns by lottery.

  According to the added pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with hit pattern 2, large added patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as added patterns corresponding to the large added bonus. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the intermediate add patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the middle additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the inner additional patterns 5 to 8 are selected as the additional patterns corresponding to the middle additional bonus 2 at a predetermined selectivity. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as an additional pattern corresponding to the small additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 6) associated with the hit pattern 6, the small additional patterns 5 to 8 are selected as the additional patterns corresponding to the small additional bonus 2 with a predetermined selectivity. According to the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) associated with hit pattern 7, the non-added pattern 1 is selected at a predetermined selectivity (100% in the present embodiment) as the added pattern corresponding to the bonus without addition. Be done.

  Note that the selection rate for distributing the additional patterns to be determined in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. The additional pattern selection table other than the additional pattern selection table (hit pattern 7) defines four additional patterns respectively, but may define three or less or five or more additional patterns, and each additional pattern selection table The number of patterns defined for each may be different. A plurality of additional patterns may also be defined in the additional pattern selection table (pattern 7).

[Overlay pattern table]
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table to be referred to in the in-round effect processing (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The addition pattern table is a table for defining the number of additions for effect and the round for notifying the addition according to the addition pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds serving as reference items, and the number of additional servings to be determined. In addition, the number of additions is notified with the appearance of the addition characters described later.

  According to the additional pattern table (large additional bonus) corresponding to the large additional bonus, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the large overlay pattern 1, “30” is notified as the number of additions in the 2nd R, “105” is notified as the number of additions in the 4th R, and “270” is notified as the number of additions in the 7th. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "405".

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 1) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the additional number notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 1, "30" is notified as the number of additions in the second R, "105" is notified as the number of additions in the fourth R, and "135" is notified as the number of additions in the seventh R. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is “270”.

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 2) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 5 to 8 as an additional addition pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 5, "135" is notified as the number of additions in the eighth R, and "135" is notified as the number of additions in the 9th R. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is “270”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 1) corresponding to the small additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each small additional pattern 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small overlay pattern 1, “30” is notified as the number of additions in the second R, and “105” is notified as the number of additions in the fourth R. The total number of additions of these is “135”.

  According to the additional pattern table (small additional bonus 2) corresponding to the small additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each small additional pattern 5 to 8 as the additional pattern. For example, in the small overlay pattern 5, “135” is notified as the number of additions only at the 8th R.

  The number-of-rounds according to the no-addition pattern 1 as the addition pattern and the number of notified additions are defined according to the addition pattern table (no-addition bonus) corresponding to the no-addition bonus. For example, in the no-addition pattern 1, the number of additions is not notified in any round.

  In addition, the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12, and the additional number (405, 270, 135) obtained from the difference between the number of prize balls and the planned number of balls may be suitably distributed You should do it. In addition, after notifying the numerical value exceeding the above-mentioned total addition number as the addition number, by setting the numerical value notified to be subtracted, it may be made to finally become a predetermined total addition number. . In addition, for example, “210” may be defined as the initial value, and notification of the number of additions may be generated in any round.

[Superimposed character lottery table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting the additional characters to appear at the start of the additional bonus or at the notification of the additional number according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns serving as reference items, additional characters serving as determination items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an additional character by lottery. As the additional characters, "animal", "female", and "pyrotechnician" are defined.

  For example, in the large addition patterns 1 to 4, in general, the selectivity of the "female" added character is higher than that of the "animal" added character, and the selection of the "Fireworks teacher" added character is higher than that of the "female" added character. Is defined to be high. In the middle additional patterns 1 to 8, it is generally defined that the selection rate of the “female” and “pyrophorician” added characters is higher than that of the “animal” added characters. The small addition patterns 1 to 8 are generally defined such that the selection rate of the “animal” added character is higher than that of the “female” and “pyrocratic” added characters. In the non-superimposed pattern 1, it is defined that the selectivity of the “animal” superimposed character is the highest. According to the added character appearing based on such added character lottery table, the kind of bonus will be suggested, and the degree of expectation to the winning ball is also raised from the added number notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  The selection rate for distributing the additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various types of additional characters, an additional pattern that can not be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the "animal" superimposed character can not be selected only in the large superimposing pattern, the "female" superimposing character can not be selected only in the non-superimposing pattern, and the "pyrophorist" superimposing character The selectivity may be defined such that it can be selected only in the middle-superimposed pattern or the large-superimposed pattern.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
14 and 15 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 14, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs disable setting processing of the watchdog timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  At S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  At S12, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the power failure is detected. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is detected, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the processing is performed at S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs sub control reception acceptance wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  At S14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  At S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it transfers the process to S30 (see FIG. 15), and when it is determined that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the process proceeds to S16. Transfer the process.

  At S16, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the power failure detection flag is present, the process proceeds to S17, and when it is determined that the power failure detection flag is not present, the process proceeds to S30 (see FIG. 15). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs damage check of the work area and performs processing of calculating a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, it transfers the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, it transfers the process to S30. .

  At S19, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set 7FFEH to the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  At S21, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting and displaying a probability change state display notification at power recovery. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU 61 causes a display to be displayed to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is the high probability state. When this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the display to be notified may be configured to end at the first start of fluctuation after power-on or at the end of fluctuation.

  At S22, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits to the sub control circuit 70 a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S24, and returns to the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 8000H in the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs processing for acquiring an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  At S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, the main CPU 61 performs an initialization process of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 61 performs processing to transmit a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 executes initialization based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  At S37, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt disable processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of inhibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  At S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  At S39, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt permission processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs processing for updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  At S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process proceeds to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 If not, the process moves to S37.

  In S42, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  At S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and measures the opening time of the big winning opening 37 opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. A special winning opening opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that there is a fraudulent act Execute processing to update various timers. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  At S44, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol control processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol control processing. Main CPU 61 extracts a random number for collision determination and a random number for symbol determination in accordance with detection signals from first start winning opening switch 320 and second starting winning opening switch 330, and is stored in main ROM 62. Whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit and small hit lottery) is won is determined with reference to the big hit determination table (not shown), and processing of storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 63 is performed. In addition, about the special symbol control processing of S44, it mentions later using FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  At S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, main CPU 61 extracts the random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for ordinary symbol determination in accordance with the detection signal from pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted random number for ordinary symbol determination and main ROM 62 Whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won is determined based on the selected normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determination random value and the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the hit symbol is to be used, and processing of storing the result of the determination is performed. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and when the non-winning is selected, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the hit symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, three times in 1.3 seconds, or opens four times in 1.4 seconds, or opens six times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing members 34 are opened, and when the wing members 34 are in the open state, the game ball easily wins the second starting opening 33. When this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  At S46, the main CPU 61 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 in accordance with the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the ordinary symbol control process. Perform processing to memorize. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 changes and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  At S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the table computer or the hall computer 100, and stores the data in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  At S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol holding number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks the special symbol related switch check process and the normal symbol related switch check process (S71 and S72 in FIG. 17) in the timer interrupt process described later (S71, S72 in FIG. 17). First based on the detection signal from the start opening switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  At S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting control signals stored in the main RAM 63 in the above-described steps from each port. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and outputs an LED power (common signal) for lighting the LED, opening and closing of the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the blade member 34. Supply solenoid power for solenoid drive to open and close. When this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  At S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning opening related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the game processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main processing, the main processing may be interrupted to execute timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is a process performed in response to a clock pulse generated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes an interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  At S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. Although the details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing predetermined processing (special symbol control processing, etc.) on condition that activation of timer interruption processing is performed a predetermined number of times (three times). When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  At S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data, and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  At S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates a random number such as a random number counter for hit determination, a random number counter for hit symbol determination, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, and a random number counter for presentation condition determination. In addition, since the random number counter for hit determination and the random number counter for hit symbol determination loses fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indeterminate, the timing determined every 2 ms in order to secure this. To make updates on When this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  At S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each passage area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets the bit corresponding to the passing area determined to have a winning to “1 (ON)”. The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  At S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not the game ball has won in the special winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40, and if there is a winning, Is sent to the payout / firing control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out from the payout device 83 a prize ball corresponding to the passage area in which the bit is "1 (ON)" along with the winning of the game ball, and the set command Is sent to the payout / emission control circuit 82. Also, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the passing area triggered by the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  At S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  At S67, the main CPU 61 performs register recovery processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, this timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S70, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, etc. If this process ends, the process moves to S71. In addition, when it is in the state which one of the above-mentioned sensors detected, error notification may be performed, and even if, for example, the big winning opening count switch detects the winning of the gaming ball, the winning is invalidated. You may do it.

  At S71, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol related switch check processing. The special symbol related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  At S72, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passage gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and when it is determined that there is an input, the number of reservations is an upper limit (for example, If it is determined that the upper limit is set, the process ends. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, a random number value for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit determination of the normal symbol game, and a random value for hit symbol determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit symbol determination. Perform processing to store in the symbol storage area. If this process ends, the process moves to S73.

  At S73, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first start winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. If it is determined that there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter, and the first start winning opening switch 320 or second When it is determined that there is an input of the start winning opening switch 330, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the starting opening winning counter corresponding to each. When this process ends, the switch input processing routine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S80, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  At S81, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol related switch check processing routine ends.

[First start port switch check process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process performed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 19, in S90, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 32 has been detected based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S91, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  At S91, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S92.

  At S92, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of holdings of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the first starting opening 32 during fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  At S94, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set first special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S95.

  At S95, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S96, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a hit determination random number and information indicating a hit symbol determination random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has been won or the result of the hit lottery result. It will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the holding ball on which the effect is displayed, when it is determined that the winning effect is performed in the process of S95. This enables so-called "pre-reading effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the change execution. When this process ends, the first start port switch check process routine ends.

[Second start port switch check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process performed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 20, in S100, the main CPU 61 determines the processing based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 to determine whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 33 has been detected. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S101, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the number of start memories of the second special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of starting and storing of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of pending of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  At S104, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting second special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting second special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S106.

  In S106, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the second start port switch check process routine ends.

[Big winning opening switch check processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 21, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 37 has been detected based on the detection signal from the special winning opening count switch 370. . In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 37 has been detected, it shifts the process to S 111 and determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 37 is not detected. In this case, the special winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs processing for adding one to the value of the special winning opening winning counter. The special winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the number of winning game balls detected in one round has reached a prescribed number of winnings. When this process ends, the process moves to S112.

  In S112, the main CPU 61 sets a special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70 so that the auxiliary control circuit 70 recognizes the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 37. Become. Under the condition that such a special winning opening winning command is received, the sub control circuit 70 adds, for example, the number of additions displayed during the additional bonus to a scheduled prize ball number described later. When this process ends, the special winning opening switch check processing routine ends.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol control process is executed in the following steps. In FIG. 22, numerical values shown on the side of S121 to S128 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value according to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game is advanced.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the first S120, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads a control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In addition, in S121 to S128 described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S121 to S128 to be performed. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer set for each step. Note that before the predetermined timing is reached, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  At S121, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage check processing. The details of S121 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  At S122, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management when the control status flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. Set and set waiting time (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after confirmation has elapsed, the process of S123 is set to be executed. The details of this S122 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  At S123, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol display time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the control status flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management, and if the wait time after confirmation has passed, whether it is a big hit or a small hit. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the process of S124 is set to be performed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S128. The details of this S123 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 executes hit start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the control status flag indicating the hit start interval management value (03H), and the special winning opening shutter read from the main ROM 62 when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. Data for releasing 37 A is stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 in FIG. 15, the main CPU 61 reads out the data for opening the big winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63, and sends a signal indicating that the big winning opening shutter 37A is opened. The special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A is supplied. Thereby, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 37. In other words, the game state is executed by repeatedly performing a predetermined advantageous game (a round game in which the big winning opening 37 changes to an open state where it is easy to accept the game ball and an unacceptably closed state after an interval period) Become. In this case, a small hit gaming state may be executed in which the big winning opening 37 is open only once.

  Furthermore, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening time limit (for example, 10s of the opening / closing pattern A per round) to the special winning opening opening time timer. set. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S126. The details of this S124 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  At S125, the main CPU 61 executes waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before big winning opening reopening, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a to d) has elapsed, The special winning opening open frequency counter is updated and stored so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the open upper limit time (for example, 10 seconds of the open / close pattern A per round) to the special winning opening open time timer. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S126. The details of this S125 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening open process. In this process, when the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has passed the open upper limit time under the condition that the big winning opening winning counter is "1" or more ((04H) It is determined whether any of the conditions of the special winning opening open time timer is “0” is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 in order to close the large winning opening 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is equal to or greater than the maximum value (which is the final round). The main CPU 61 sets the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the final round, while the value (05H) indicates the waiting time management before the big winning opening reopening while it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. The details of this S126 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S127.

  At S127, the main CPU 61 executes hit end interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to the flag. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S128. The details of this S127 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S128.

  At S128, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check, when the control status flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S121. The details of this S128 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is ended, the special symbol control processing routine is ended.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 controls the control status flags (00H), (01 H), (02 H) when the result of the hit determination is loss. By sequentially setting () and (07H), the processing of S121, S122, S123, and S128 shown in FIG. 22 is performed at a predetermined timing. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 controls the control state flag (00H), (01 H), (02 H) when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. By setting in order and, processing of S121, S122 and S123 which are shown in Figure 22 is executed with specified timing, control to big hit game state or small hit game state will be executed. Furthermore, when control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to (03H), (04H), (05H) in order, as shown in FIG. The processing of S124, S126, and S125 shown is executed at a predetermined timing to execute a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. When the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ending condition is established, the processing of S125, S127 to S128 shown in FIG. 21 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), (07H) in order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol storage check process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S131. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, it ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the presence or absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start memory If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S132. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is start storage, the process proceeds to S133.

  At S132, the main CPU 61 performs a demonstration display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state where the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area where the random value for hitting determination is stored) becomes "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30s) If maintained, set a value to allow execution of the demo display as a demo display permission value. Then, when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demonstration display command. Thus, the demonstration display is performed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is ended, the special symbol memory check processing routine is ended.

  In S133, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is larger than "0". In this process, main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data of second special symbol start storage area (0) to second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start storage corresponding to second special symbol is "0". If it is determined that more data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S134. The starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not more than "0", that is, it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) If it is, the process proceeds to S135.

  In S134, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S135, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuated as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S136, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  At S137, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 executes the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. Execute processing to shift (store) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area Execute processing to shift (store) each of the data from (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) Do. When this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  At S138, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects one big hit from a plurality of big hit determination tables (not shown) having different numbers of big hit determination values (big hit determination values) depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probable variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and the gaming status flag is not a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with less is referred to. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probable variation gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probable variation gaming state as a special gaming state which is easily shifted to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), The probability of transition is improved as compared to the non-probable variation gaming state as a non-special gaming state which is less likely to shift to the specific gaming state than the probability variation gaming state as the special gaming state.

  In addition, the special game state is a definite change / time short game state, and the non special game state is basically a non-probability change / non-short time game state, but the special game state is at least one of a probability change gaming state and a time reduction game state It may be one game state. The non-special gaming state may include the non-probability changing gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted when winning of the game ball, and it is for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected big hit judgment table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Thus, in the process of S138, either the big hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S139, when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination processing of S138, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a small hit determination value (small hit determination value) regardless of the game state flag.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted when winning a game ball, and is a random number value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0) And the selected small hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit if the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match.

  In addition, since small hits can occur in any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the collision judgment disturbances stored in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) or the second special symbol starting memory area Although the small hit determination processing is performed based on the numerical value, the small hit determination processing may be performed based only on the hit determination random number value stored in any one of the special symbol start storage areas.

  As described above, in the process of S139, either a small hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is not selected when both of the big hit determination process of S138 and the small hit determination process of S139 are not won. A loss will be determined as the determination result of the game. When this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  At S140, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol if the result of the big hit determination is the big hit, and determines the small hit symbol if the result of the small hit determination is the small hit, for either the big hit or the small hit In the case of loss too, processing to determine the lost design is performed. The details of this S140 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S141.

  At S141, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S140, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S138 and S139, and the value of the probability variation counter. The variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, in the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state, different variation pattern determination tables are provided. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. Note that this process is the same during the ST gaming state.

  Data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  At S142, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the present variation display. When this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  Then, in S143, the main CPU 61 executes processing to clear the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display of this time. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check processing routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit, it shifts the process to S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S156.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S150 is a value (01H) indicating that it is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 when the fluctuation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is a fluctuation. On the other hand, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 has a value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol In the case, the process moves to S154.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the first special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process is performed to determine whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to the definite variation 1. When this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the big hit symbol of the determined first special symbol and a command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  At S154, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine a jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the second special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process is performed to determine which of the definite variations 1 to 6 corresponds to the symbol). If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the jackpot symbol of the determined second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S139 in FIG. 23) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S157 if it is a small hit. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S161 if it is not a small hit.

  At S157, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hitting symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the random number for determining the winning symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter and the small hitting determination table (see FIG.・ We perform processing to determine whether it is the symbol of the small hit shown in the second special symbol small hit design distribution. If this process ends, the process moves to S158.

  In S158, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the small hit symbols of the determined first special symbol or the second special symbol and the command set of the small hit symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbol and displays the special symbol in a stop manner based on the data of the big hit symbol. Further, main CPU 61 sets a small hit symbol command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a predetermined area of main RAM 63, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from main CPU 61 to sub CPU 71 of sub control circuit 70. . By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S159.

  In S159, the main CPU 61 performs hit start interval display time data set processing corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S160.

  In S160, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening open frequency related data setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the number of times of opening of the special winning opening 37 related data related to the number of opening of the special winning opening 37, ie, the definite variation 1 due to the first special symbol or the definite variation 1 due to the second special symbol 1 or 6 or the small hit symbol The corresponding data is set in the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines in S150 that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit in S156 in S150, that is, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in a mode based on the data of the lost symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designating command. Under the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the stop-of-loss display mode. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol variation time management (a value set in the special symbol storage check process: 01H). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the processing is shifted to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer set in the special symbol storage check process is “0”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S172. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the processing to S173. At this time, the main CPU 61 recognizes symbol stop in the symbol display device control processing, and derives the display result by the symbol determined in the special symbol determination processing.

  At S173, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S174, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. In the present embodiment, if the symbol to be stopped is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, for example, 1002 ms is set as a wait time after confirmation, and if it is a lost symbol, for example, 540 ms is set as a wait time after confirmation . In either case of the hit symbol and the lost symbol, the same post-confirmation waiting time may be used, or the lost symbol may be longer than the hit symbol in the waiting time. When this process is ended, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol display time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S181. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the special symbol display time management process routine is ended.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S182. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S183. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S184.

  In S183, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S190.

  At S184, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the probability variation gaming state. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S189 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S185.

  In S185, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the probability variation number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S186.

  In S186, the main CPU 61 determines again whether the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S187 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S189.

  At S187, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a definite variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) in the main RAM 63 a definite variation end command indicating the end of the probable variation gaming state. Then, the definite variation end command is supplied as a command indicating the gaming state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the subsidiary CPU 71 of the subsidiary control circuit 70, so that the subsidiary control circuit 70 recognizes the termination of the probable variation gaming state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S188.

  In S188, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the processing to S190. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the processing to S194.

  In S190, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S191. In the present embodiment, the hit start interval time corresponding to the case where the second special symbol is a big hit symbol of “probability 1” to “probability 6” is the right end of the big winning opening shutter 37A after the game ball is fired. For example, 2500 ms is shorter than 3000 ms which is the shortest time to reach a part.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or starts the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit playing state, and data indicating a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern such as an additional pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state by the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (07H) indicating the end processing of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

[Perform start interval management process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, it ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S201, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit start interval management processing routine is ended.

  In S202, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203. On the other hand, if it is determined that the main CP is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S205.

  In S203, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) the special winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the processing to S204.

  In S204, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding “1” to the special winning opening open frequency counter, and shifts the processing to S205.

  In S205, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern according to the type of big hit symbol or small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the hit pattern (big winning opening opening / closing pattern) shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the big hit symbol or small hit symbol determined in S205. If this process ends, the process moves to S206.

  In S206, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In S207, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S208.

  In S208, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S209.

  In S209, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 10 s, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is “probable variation 1”, for a time according to the value (round number) of the special winning opening open frequency counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S210.

  In S210, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the special winning opening 37. The variable stored as described above drives the large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the large winning opening 37. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In the present embodiment, data corresponding to one of the opening and closing patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening before reopening waiting time management process, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main winning opening pre-opening question management process routine ends.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S222. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  At S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S223.

  In S223, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S225.

  In S225, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S227.

  In S227, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is ended, the waiting time question management process routine before the big winning opening reopening is ended. Also in this process, data corresponding to any one of the opening and closing patterns A to C is set as the special winning opening open data.

[A big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening open processing executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening open processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S230, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating a process for opening a special winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the processing is shifted to S231. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the main winning opening opening processing routine is ended.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the special winning opening winning counter is "1" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is “1” or more, the process proceeds to S234. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is not “1” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening / closing process according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of the big hit and the current round, and shifts the process to S233. In S232, a special winning opening opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time is “0”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening open processing routine.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this way is for closing the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  At S235, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the processing to S240. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the processing to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency (round number). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening opening frequency (round number), and the value of the special winning opening frequency counter It is determined whether or not the upper limit value of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is equal to or more. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is 16 (16R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S240. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not less than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. The inter-round interval display time is set to a time corresponding to the interval patterns a to d. If this process ends, the process moves to S238.

  In S238, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before a special winning opening reopening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S239.

  In S239, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S241.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (06H) indicating the end-of-hit interval management processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S250, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process proceeds to S251. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, it ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  At S251, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S252. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit end interval management processing routine is ended.

  At S252, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S253.

  In S253, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the type of hit gaming state ended is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S254. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S256.

  At S254, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set "01H" to the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63. "01H" of the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state. Note that "00H" of the gaming state flag indicates the non-probability changing gaming state and the non-time-short playing state. If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  At S255, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “10” as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the hit end interval management process routine is ended.

  In S256, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command, and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type (big hit, small hit) of the finished gaming state in addition to information indicating the gaming state to be controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Such a game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special symbol game end processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol game end processing routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processing such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S270, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for initialization in response to power on. When this process ends, the process moves to S271.

  In S271, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S272.

  In S272, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although the details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S273. The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S273, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for performing display in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor), based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71, various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S274.

  In S274, the sub CPU 71 performs sound control processing for controlling the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In S275, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling the light emission (lighting / flickering) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S 276, the sub CPU 71 performs movable effect device control processing via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process of controlling the movable effect device 42 which drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process ends, the process moves to S271, and thereafter, the processes of S271 to S276 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even when the sub CPU 71 is executing the main processing, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main processing and execute the command reception interrupt processing or the timer interrupt processing. The command reception interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 33, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S280, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a program under execution stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed in the command analysis process of FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S282, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S280 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S290, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S291.

  In S291, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S292.

  In S292, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation button 9A. Although this processing is actually determination processing, it is described as one routine here because it is interrupt processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S290 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt processing routine ends.

Command analysis processing
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in S300, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

  In S301, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. The sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S302 when the reading of the data of the received command is completed.

  In S302, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S303. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S304.

  In S303, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. If the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S304, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to S306.

  In S305, the sub CPU 71 performs stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the stop decoration symbol is determined. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, the numbers "1" to "7", and a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits) of these decorative symbols (numbers) are displayed. When)) is aligned with the same decorative symbol (number), it basically shifts to the jackpot gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is "probability variation 1", with a predetermined probability (for example, the probability of 1/10 of them when the second special symbol is "probability variation 1"), The decorative symbol is a match of numbers "3" or "7". In addition, the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" of the first special symbol is a match of the numbers "1", "2", "4" to "6", and the big hit symbol "2nd special symbol" The decorative symbol corresponding to the definite variation 1 "to the definite variation 6 is a match of the numerals" 1 "," 2 ", and" 4 "to" 6 ". Further, the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol is, for example, a specific appearance with the numeral "135" as a combination of the specific symbols, and the decorative design corresponding to the lost is a loose eye other than the specific appearance. In addition, about correspondence between the big hit symbol and the decorative symbol, as a uniquely determined relationship, for example, the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol “probable variation 1” is set as the alignment of “3” or “7”, and the big hit symbol “probable variation” The decorative symbols corresponding to 2 "to" provisional variation 6 "may be set to be a match of" 1 "," 2 ", and" 4 "to" 6 ". Also, for example, in the case of the "large additional bonus", the decorative symbol is made to be a match of "3" or "7", and in the case of the "middle additional bonus", the decorative symbol is "1" or "5". In the case of "small addition bonus" and "no additional bonus", the decoration pattern is set to "2", "4" or "6", and the stop pattern of the decoration pattern for each type of jackpot May be uniquely determined.

  In S306, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to S308.

  In S307, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S308, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command has been received as the command read in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S309. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In S309, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S310, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command has been received as the command read in S301. If it is determined that the special winning opening open display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S311. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening open display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S312.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during a round. The in-round presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a hit end display command has been received as the command read out in S301. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S313. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S314.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit / end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

[Perform production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional pattern or the like as the effect pattern in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S320, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets one of “01H” to “08H” in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. As for the hit effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to the normal bonus, and each of “02H” to “07H” is a large addition bonus, a middle addition bonus 1 and 2, a small addition bonus 1 and 2, a no addition bonus Correspondingly, "08H" corresponds to a small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start of the additional bonus or the non-additional bonus is based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S322. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "07H", the processing is shifted to S328.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to select the additional pattern selection table in accordance with the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S323.

  In S323, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected additional pattern selection table and performs processing for selecting any of the additional patterns. At this time, for example, one of the additional patterns can be selected using the effect determination random number value. If this process ends, the process moves to S324.

  In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a value corresponding to the selected additional pattern in the additional pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 21 patterns are provided as superimposition patterns, and superimposition patterns are provided for large superimposition patterns 1 to 4, middle superimposable patterns 1 to 8, small superimposable patterns 1 to 8, and no superimposition pattern 1. The flags “01H” to “15H” correspond to each other. If this process ends, the process moves to S325.

  In S325, the sub CPU 71 refers to the additional character selection table and performs processing of selecting an additional character according to the value of the additional pattern flag. At this time, for example, one of the additional characters can be selected using the effect determination random number value. As the additional characters, “Animal”, “Female”, and “Fireworks” additional characters are selected. If this process ends, the process moves to S326.

  In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval corresponding to the value of the additional pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data up to the start of the round game including the display of the added character determined based on the added character selection table and the display of the added number as an initial value. When this process ends, the process moves to S327.

  In S327, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "240" in the winning number counter. The value "240" corresponds to the number of prize balls that will be paid out at least in the 16R round game, and is displayed as an initial value of the planned number of prize balls in the hit start interval. In the case where the notification of the additional number is not performed at all, that is, in the case of the no additional bonus, the initial value "240" is continuously displayed without being added over each round. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

  In S328, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data in the hit start interval according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data up to the start of the round game corresponding to the normal bonus or the small hit. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

[In-round production process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing in-round effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The in-round presentation process is a process for determining whether to notify the number of additions in each round, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of adding one to the value of the round counter. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by one each time one round game is executed (every time the big winning opening open indication command is received), and the number of rounds currently being executed (the number of executed round games Is a counter for indicating the number of times) and is basically the same value as the large winning opening opening number of times counter used in the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not an additional bonus (including a bonus with no additional bonus) is being executed, based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag corresponds to any one of "02H" to "07H" and the additional bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S332. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of “02H” to “07H” and the additional bonus is not being executed, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to select the additional pattern table in accordance with the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S333.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected additional pattern table, and reports the additional number based on the value of the additional pattern flag (the additional pattern) and the value indicated by the round number counter (the number of rounds). Processing to determine whether or not If it is determined that the round is to notify the number of additions, the process proceeds to S334. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is not to notify the number of additions, the process proceeds to S336.

  In S334, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for notifying the number of additions based on the addition pattern table. As a result, in the display area 4A in the corresponding round, the number of additions is displayed together with the selected addition character. If this process ends, the process moves to S335.

  In S335, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding a value corresponding to the number of additions to the winning ball number counter. As a result, in the winning number counter, the additional number defined based on the additional pattern table is added from the initial value "240", and the counter value increases to the scheduled winning number for each addition. For example, in the case of super-superimposed pattern 4, “135” of the superimposing number is added in the 1st, 4th, and 7th eyes, and “645” of the scheduled prize ball number finally combined with the initial value of “240” is displayed It will be done. In addition, although the scheduled prize ball number is displayed based on the value of the prize ball number counter, the scheduled prize ball number is not necessarily displayed immediately after the addition to the prize ball number counter, and the effect according to the addition is executed It will be displayed after addition. If this process ends, the process moves to S336.

  In S336, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round number counter. For example, in the case of the superimposition bonus, the sub CPU 71 sets data for displaying different effects including the background image and the like in the 1st to 7th eyes and the 8th to 16th eyes. In the case of a normal bonus and a small hit, the same effect data is always set in any round. When this process ends, the in-round effect processing routine ends.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit / termination effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit / finish interval which is the end time of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "02H" to "07H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the bonus bonus or the bonus without bonus is made based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S341. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "07H", the process proceeds to S342.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 sets “0” to the value of the winning ball number counter and performs processing of resetting the counter value. In addition, although the scheduled prize ball number is displayed based on the value of the prize ball number counter, the scheduled prize ball number is not necessarily displayed as 0 immediately after the reset of the prize ball number counter, and effects are produced after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition to this, the display of the scheduled award ball number can be switched. In addition, when the value of the award ball number counter is reset, the planned award ball number may not be displayed as “0”, and the display itself of the planned award ball number may be hidden. If this process ends, the process moves to S342.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the hit gaming state. At this time, as the end effect data, data of effect contents different depending on any of the normal bonus, the bonus for addition (including the bonus without addition), and the small hit is set. When this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" in the hit effect pattern flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S344.

  In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the round number counter. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Example of operation when over winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, an operation example when an over winning occurs in the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  39 and 40 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when the over winning occurs. 39 and 40 schematically show the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (big winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 as being different from that of FIG. The behavior of the bonus from the start of the hit start interval to the inter-round interval after the 1R's eye and the end of the 2R's is schematically shown, but for convenience, the inter-round interval between the 1R's and 2R's is Unlike the one shown in FIG. 9 described above, the interval pattern d is applied. In addition, the gaming ball is continuously fired immediately after the start of the hit start interval, and after 3.1s uniformly, the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding large winning opening 37 in the open state) Shall be reached. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1), ... in order of firing.

  First, as shown in FIG. 39A, the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until 2.5 seconds, which is the hit start interval time, for example, has elapsed. In other words, since the hit start interval time is shorter than the shortest time 3s required for the game ball to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A after firing the game ball, immediately after the start of the hit start interval. Even if the game ball launch operation by right-handling is started, the game ball does not reach the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A that closes the big winning opening 37.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, when the hit start interval time has elapsed, the first R starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37A opens the special winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. I assume. Also at this time, the gaming ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 39C, the gaming ball (0) fired immediately after the start of the hit start interval is opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 (not shown). It rolls around to the right end.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), the game ball (0) passes downward through the large winning opening 37 in the open state, and the high winning opening count switch 370 detects a winning. . That is, by detecting a prize reaching the prescribed number of prizes “1”, the first R end is ended, and the inter-round interval before the start of the second R is started. At this time, the time from when the hit start interval starts to when the winning of the game ball (0) fired immediately after that is detected is approximately 3.2 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (E), with the start of the interval between rounds, the big winning opening shutter 37A starts the movement projecting in the direction of the white arrow to make the big winning opening 37 closed again. Do. At this time, the special winning opening shutter 37A completes the operation of projecting from the open position to the closed position in about 0.01 s. Further, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1) has reached the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 in transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (F), when the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the 2R's start, the gaming ball (1) becomes a big winning The right end of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. The time for the game ball (1) to reach such a position is approximately 3.1 s after the firing and approximately 0.56 s from the start of the interval between rounds (the point in time of FIG. 39 (D)) It will be after the passage.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 40 (G) to 40 (I), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until the time defined as the inter-round interval, for example, 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, has elapsed. It will be in the state. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (1) to (4) pass from the right to the left in a line. At this time, the gaming balls (1) to (4) reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A sequentially every approximately 0.66 seconds, and further roll at a speed advancing approximately 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. To go. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) are positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A with an interval of about one. Note that, when counting from the start time point of the inter-round interval (time point of FIG. 39 (D)), the time to reach the state of FIG. 40 (G) is approximately 1.22 s later and reaches the state of FIG. 40 (H) The time is after about 1.88 seconds, and the time to reach the state of FIG. 40I is after about 2.54 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (J), when 2.97 s of the interval pattern d elapses, the inter-round interval ends and the second R starts, and the big winning opening shutter 37A has an operation time of about 0.01 s. Then, the special winning opening 37 is opened again by retreating in the direction of the white arrow. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (1) to (4) are still passing at a relatively low speed. As a result, the four game balls (1) to (4) pass simultaneously through the large winning opening 37 in the open state and fall downward, and the large winning opening count switch 370 achieves four winnings. Is detected. That is, immediately after the start of the second round in which the inter-round interval ends, three to four over winnings in addition to one winning of the prescribed winning number are detected. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31s, 1 + 2 over wins are detected, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65s, 1 + 1 over wins are detected, and the interval pattern a 0 If it is .3s, it can be easily understood that only one winning corresponding to the specified winning number is detected but no over winning is detected.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (K), 2R is achieved by detecting the winning of the gaming ball (the gaming ball (4) outside the figure in FIG. 40) which first reaches the position of the big winning opening count switch 370. The eye ends and the inter-round interval before the 3Rs start is started. At this time, the next game ball (5) is located in the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 in transition to the closed state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (L), when the special winning opening shutter 37A completely closes the special winning opening 37 again in the interval between rounds before the 3R's start, the gaming ball (5) becomes a big winning The right end of the mouth shutter 37A is reached. By controlling such a series of operation timings based on interval patterns b to d, 1 to 3 over winnings are realized in predetermined rounds after the 2R's.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for describing various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and illustrates operation timings in the large additional bonus according to FIGS. 39 and 40. Also in FIG. 41, for the sake of convenience, an interval pattern d is applied as an interval between 1R and 2R or as an inter-round interval after the end of 2R, unlike the one shown in FIG. 9 described above. The "firing state" indicates a state in which a firing operation is not performed or a firing stop operation is performed as "non-firing", and indicates a state in which a firing operation is performed as "firing". The “playing state” indicates a round game and an interval in the jackpot playing state. The "required time" indicates the time required for the round game and the interval. The “big winning opening” indicates the closed or open state of the big winning opening 37. “The number of balls on the shutter” indicates the number of gaming balls located along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A. “Elapsed time after change in the number of balls on the shutter” indicates the elapsed time when the number of gaming balls on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A has changed. “The illustrated state” indicates the symbol at the end of FIG. 39 (A) to FIG. 40 (L). In addition, (E) and (K) shown as illustrated states additionally indicate “*” because the big winning opening 37 is not completely closed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, assuming that the big hit is decided and the firing operation is started about 0.1 seconds after the big hit is started, the time until the gaming ball is actually fired is approximately 0.66 s It takes approximately 3.1 seconds for the game ball thus fired to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A. On the other hand, when 2.5 s has passed as the hit start interval after the big hit is determined, the big winning opening 37 is in the open state. Thereby, the game ball which has reached the position corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 in approximately 0.1 s. That is, after the big hit is determined, the firing operation is started, and the time until the first game ball fired is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 is 0.1 + 0.66 + 3.1 + 0.1 = It will be 3.96s. The time 1.46 s obtained by subtracting the time 2.5 s of the hit start interval from this time is the release time 1 R.

  Thereafter, the interval between rounds after the end of the first R starts, and the big winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is in a closed state over 2.97 s of the interval pattern d. Then, in the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, the gaming ball located on the upper surface thereof increases by approximately one every 0.66 s, and the big winning opening 37 is again in the opening state by the start of the second R Four game balls are supported by the big winning opening shutter 37A. Therefore, when the second R is started and the large winning opening 37 is in the open state, winning of four game balls is detected. Among them, when the winning of one game ball is first detected after about 0.1 s, the big winning opening 37 is closed, and the interval between rounds after the end of the 2R is started, and 4 in the 3R not shown is also shown. Winnings of individual game balls will be detected. As described above, if the interval time between rounds is 2.97 s of the interval pattern d, 1 + 3 over wins can be realized. Similarly, if the interval pattern c is 2.31 s, 1 + 2 over wins can be realized, and if the interval pattern b is 1.65 s, 1 + 1 over wins can be realized.

[Example of screen display of bonus bonus]
42 to 44 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the bonus on bonus. FIG. 42 is a screen display example of an additional bonus corresponding to the large additional pattern 1, FIG. 43 is a screen display example of an additional bonus corresponding to the small additional pattern 5, and FIG. It is an example of a screen display of an additional bonus.

  First, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the large additional bonus according to the hit pattern 2 is determined as the additional bonus and the large added pattern 1 is selected as the additional pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A of, for example, a "pyrotechnician" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+240" of the scheduled award ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the 1R is started, a display field 704 showing the type of the additional character and the scheduled number of balls per addition of the additional number are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A display field 705 for adding and displaying, and a display field 706 for displaying the period of the second half round as a "winning sphere increase zone" to be described later with the period of the first half round as the "addition specialization zone" are displayed. Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the sixteenth round is completed. For example, in the display field 704, the "Fireworksman" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the sixteenth round is over. On the other hand, after the superimposition number is displayed in the center of the screen in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball count to which the superimposition number is added is additionally displayed. In the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of additions is not displayed in the first R (see FIG. 12), in the first R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display column 705. The number of additions is not displayed. In addition, basically, the “overlay specialization zone” is displayed in the first to seventh R in the display column 706, and the “winning ball increase zone” is displayed in the eighth and subsequent R. As a result, the “superimposition specialization zone” is displayed in the first R display column 706. Note that, as described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the "overlay bonus" may be displayed in place of the "winning sphere increase zone" in the display field 706 after the 8th R. The “superimposition specialization zone” displayed in the display column 706 indicates that the addition display of the scheduled prize ball number is performed with high probability. The “prize ball addition zone” displayed in the display column 706 indicates that a round game in which over winning is expected is in progress. The “addition bonus” displayed in the display column 706 indicates that the player is in a round game in which an over prize due to the addition bonus can not be expected. In addition, the image 700 of the "addition bonus" displayed on the upper part of the display area 4A indicates the start of the addition bonus.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the second R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “30” is displayed in the second R (see FIG. 12). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed in the center of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703A of "+30" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the third R is started, the planned number of prize balls “270” to which the “+30” superimposition number 703A displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. In addition, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the third R (see FIG. 12), in the third R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (E), when the fourth R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, the fourth R is specified so that the number “105” of superimposition is displayed (see FIG. 12). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed at the center of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703B of "+105" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42F, when the 5th R is started, the scheduled award ball number “375” to which the “+105” superimposition number 703 B displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the fifth R (see FIG. 12), in the fifth R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the sixth R is started, the same scheduled prize ball number “375” as the previous round is continuously displayed in the display column 705. In addition, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the sixth R (see FIG. 12), in the sixth R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42H, when the seventh R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “270” is displayed in the seventh R (see FIG. 12). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed at the center of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703C of "+270" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (I), when the 8th R is started, the scheduled award ball number "645" to which the "+270" superimposing number 703C displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 42I and FIG. 42J, in the display columns 706 of the eighth to sixteenth eyes, “a prize ball increase zone” is displayed. Furthermore, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed from the 8th to 16th eyes (see FIG. 12), in the 8th to 16th eyes, the number of superimposed characters 702A and the number of overlays are in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and the display column 705 displays that the planned prize ball number has finally become "645". Although the player can not substantially cause an over winning in the first half round due to the series display of the additional number and the planned number of prize balls, the second half round is based on the number of planned prize balls displayed additionally. It is possible to advance the game while expecting an over-winning of the game, and to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of presentation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), when small overlay bonus 2 according to hit pattern 6 is determined as the overlay bonus and small overlay pattern 5 is selected as the overlay pattern, display area 4A in the hit start interval is selected. On the screen, an image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, for example, the "animal" added character 702B selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+240" of the scheduled prize ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the first R is started, display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In the first R, in the display field 704, an "animal" corresponding to the additional character 702B is displayed. Even in the small-accumulation pattern 5, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the first R (see FIG. 12), in the first R, only the initial value “240” is displayed in the display column 705. The number of additions is not displayed at the center.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 (B) and 43 (C), the “superimposition specialization zone” is displayed in the first to seventh display columns 706. Furthermore, in the small overlay pattern 5, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed from the 1st to 7th eyes (see FIG. 12), the 1st to 7th eyes have the overlay character 702B and the number of overlays in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball number is continuously displayed without changing from the initial value "240".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), when the eighth R is started, the “addition bonus” is displayed in the display column 706. In addition, in the small overlay pattern 5, since it is specified that the additional number “135” is displayed at the 8th R (see FIG. 12), after the overlay character 702B is displayed in the center of the display area 4A. , And the added number 703D of "+135" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), when the 9th R is started, the “winning sphere increase zone” is displayed in the display column 706. Further, in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball number "375" to which the additional number 703D of "+135" displayed in the previous round is added is displayed. Furthermore, in the small overlay pattern 5, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed after the 9th R (see FIG. 12), the overlay character 702A and the number of overlays are not displayed at the center of the screen after the 9Rs. In the display column 705, it is displayed that the planned prize ball number has finally become "375". Even with such a series of display of the number of additionals and the number of scheduled prize balls, the player can not substantially generate an over winning until a part of the second half round (1st R to 13th R), but is additionally displayed. It is possible to advance the game while expecting an over winning until the final round (16R) by using the scheduled award ball number as a standard, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of presentation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the no-addition bonus according to the hit pattern 7 is determined as the addition bonus and the no-addition pattern 1 is selected as the addition pattern, the screen of the display area 4A in the hit start interval An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, an added character 702C of, for example, "female" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+240" of the scheduled award ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the first R is started, display fields 704 to 706 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In the first R, in the display field 704, "female" corresponding to the additional character 702C is displayed. In pattern 1 without overlaying, it is defined that the number of overlays is not displayed in all rounds including the 1R's eye (see FIG. 12), so in the 1R's eye, the initial value "240" is displayed in the display column 705. The number of additions is not displayed at the center of the screen.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 44B to 44D, in the 1R to 16R eyes, the additional character 702B and the number of additional characters are not displayed at the center of the screen, and the planned winning number of balls is initial on the display column 705. It is continuously displayed without changing from the value "240". Note that, as shown in FIG. 44C and FIG. 44D, the “superimposition bonus” is simply displayed in the display field 706 after the 8th R.

  The added character may be made to appear according to the operation of the effect button, and the number of added may be displayed after the appearance. Also, with regard to the additional characters appearing after the 8th R and the additional characters appearing before the 7R, for example, the same person or a liking character may be different. As a numerical value to be displayed, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, “+15” for the number of winning balls may be displayed to cumulatively display the number of payouts or the number of scheduled payouts. In addition, with regard to the scheduled prize ball number, it is possible to indirectly indicate, for example, by light or sound, instead of directly displaying an assumed numerical value. In the "addition bonus", the addition display of the planned prize ball number is performed in the next round of the round displaying the addition number, but the addition indication of the planned prize ball number and the display of the addition number are displayed in the same round And the addition display of the planned number of prize balls may be performed in the next round of the round in which the number of additions is displayed.

[Effect of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls exceeding the specified number of winnings in the next round game during the interval between rounds in which the big winning opening 37 is in the closed state is the suppressing portion 430 (big winning opening shutter It is controlled to be time to flow to the upper surface of 37A. Specifically, in the interval patterns b to d, control is performed in such a time that two or more game balls can pass through the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A simultaneously. As a result, when the special winning opening shutter 37A is opened from the closing state of the interval between rounds in response to the start of the round game, the number of gaming balls larger than the prescribed number of winnings flowing onto the special winning opening shutter 37A in the closing state. Since it is led to the big winning opening 37, over winning can be realized in a predetermined round game, and interest in the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  Also, without changing the opening time of the big winning opening shutter 37A, by appropriately controlling the interval time between rounds where the big winning opening 37 is closed between the desired round game and the round game, The number of over winnings can be adjusted appropriately. That is, specifically, for the interval between rounds, the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7 which is relatively short (interval pattern a) and the hit pattern 2 which is longer than that (interval patterns b to d) By providing six big hit gaming states, it is possible to make the number of winning balls awarded based on over winning according to the interval time between the rounds different, and for the plurality of big hit gaming states, the difference in the degree of advantage is Can be attached.

  In addition, the number of prize balls awarded each time the game ball wins in the big prize mouth 37, the number of times of execution of the round game, and the over prize which will be awarded in the big prize mouth 37 according to the interval time between rounds Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number, the number of expected prize balls in the big hit gaming state can be calculated in advance, and the number of expected prize balls can be notified as the number of additionals or initial value. As to whether or not the winning number of balls can be obtained, it is possible to give notice of novel contents with surprisingness and variety, and in turn, it is possible to enhance the interest to the jackpot gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, the over winning is realized basically by adjusting the time interval between rounds after the 7th R, for example, by making the time of the hit start interval relatively long. You may make it possible to achieve an over winning from the 1R's.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Specs of gaming machines]
First, specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 45, the big hit probability of the special symbol to be the big hit gaming state is 1 / 399.60 (164/65536) in the low probability time (non-probability changing gaming state), the high probability time (probable change gaming state ) Is 1 / 130.54 (502/65536). The small hit probability of the special symbol to be a small hit gaming state is 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in order of priority given to the lottery with the second special symbol. As the probability fluctuation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming status in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. The first special symbol big hit symbol "probable variation 1", the hit pattern 1 will be 16R as the number of rounds of the round game (of which the actual winning number is 7R for easy winning in the big prize port), the production mode of the big hit gaming state The bonus name shown is "normal bonus", and the bonus content is "7R bonus". In this "normal bonus", with respect to the winnings at the special winning opening 37, the estimated number of winnings of the first to seventh eyes is 10 and the estimated number of winnings of the eighth to sixteenth eyes is zero. As a result, in the "normal bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 1050. The probability (rush rate) to be "certainly 1" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 100/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 1" is hit pattern 2 and is given the number of rounds 16R (effectively the number of rounds 16R), the bonus name is "large bonus bonus", the bonus content is "large bonus addition" It is a bonus. In this "super-addition bonus", the estimated number of winnings of the first to seventh eyes is 10, and the estimated number of winnings of the eighth to sixteenth eyes is twelve. As a result, in the "super-addition bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 2670. The probability (rush rate) to be “certainly variable 1” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 50/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 2" is hit pattern 3 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the number of actual rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "middle-on bonus 1", the bonus content is "middle It is an extra bonus 1 ". In the "middle additional bonus 1", the estimated number of winnings of the first to seventh eyes is 10, and the estimated number of winnings of the eighth to sixteenth eyes is 11. As a result, in the "middle additional bonus 1", the number of scheduled prize balls is 2535. Probability (rush rate) to be "certain 2" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  The second special symbol big hit symbol "probable variation 3", the hit pattern 4 will be given the number of rounds 16R (also the number of rounds 16R) is given as the bonus name "intermediate bonus 2", as the bonus content "inside It is an additional bonus 2 ". The "middle additional bonus 2" has an estimated number of winnings of 10th to 11Rth eyes, 10, an estimated number of winnings of 12Rth, 11 and an estimated number of winnings of 13R to 16R is 12. As a result, in the "middle additional bonus 2", the number of scheduled prize balls is 2535. The probability (rush rate) to be “certain 3” as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

  The second special symbol of the big hit symbol "4" is hit pattern 5 and is given the number of rounds 16R (the actual number of rounds is also 16R), the bonus name is "small addition bonus", the bonus content is "small addition" It is a bonus. In the "small advance bonus 1", the estimated number of winnings of the first to sixteenth eyes is set to ten. As a result, in the "small bonus", the number of planned prize balls is 2400. The probability (rush rate) to be "certain 4" as the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 35/100.

  The small hit is the same as the small hit according to the first embodiment described above except that the hit pattern 6 corresponds.

  The special winning opening count corresponds to the specified winning number that triggers the end of one round game, and in the present embodiment, the special winning opening count (predetermined winning number) is set to “10”. That is, when ten winnings to the special winning opening 37 are counted in one round, the round is considered to be ended. Also in the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (prescribed winning number) does not define the upper limit of the number of winnings in one round. That is, even if, for example, a prize that exceeds the special winning opening count number is detected in one round, the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes is paid out. Thereby, an over winning that exceeds the special winning opening count is possible. This point will be described later.

  The time saving performance, the number of winning balls corresponding to the starting opening and each winning opening, the hitting probability of the normal symbols, the hitting number of the normal symbols, and the second starting opening winning number are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The specifications of the present embodiment may also be as follows. For example, with regard to the special symbol, the big hit probability at the low probability time and the high probability is not limited to the one described above. That is, the big hit probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win a big hit at high probability than at low probability. The small hit probability is not limited to the above. For example, the specification may be such that the probability of winning in the other special symbol is higher than that of one special symbol. With regard to the order of digesting the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be in the winning order without setting the priority, or the first special symbol may be prioritized. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Also, the probability change gaming state may be continued until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to that described above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, the types of jackpot symbols of the first special symbol may be increased. In addition, even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the extra bonus. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (prescribed winning number) is set to “10”, but is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening count may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The time saving performance may be more than the ST number (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST number including, for example, 0 times. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls relating to the special winning opening is set to a value different from that described above, the planned number of winning balls is calculated using that value and the estimated number of winnings, and notification of the additional number described later is performed. You can do so. With regard to the ordinary symbol, the low probability time and the high probability time hitting probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the hit probability of the normal symbol may be a probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability, for example, it may be winning at a low probability. The number of hit symbols of the normal symbols is not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the open patterns of the blade members be associated differently. The second starting opening winning number may be a value other than that described above.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, five types of opening and closing patterns A to E are defined as the one round opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The opening and closing patterns A to E are opening and closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening and closing pattern E among them is an opening and closing pattern also corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern E of the present embodiment are the same as the opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern C of the first embodiment, but the opening and closing patterns B to D of the present embodiment are those according to the first embodiment Differently, in one round game, it is defined to be open for a plurality of times (two times in the present embodiment).

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state first becomes 5.21 s, then the closed state becomes 2.64 s, and then the open state becomes 3.00 s and finally becomes the closed state. The opening and closing pattern B is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. The section in which the open state is 5.21 s or 3.00 s corresponds to the middle open because it is shorter than the long open of the opening / closing pattern A. The section that is closed for 2.64 s between the two middle openings is referred to as “interval during round” in the following description. That is, in the opening and closing pattern B, two middle opening operations occur at intervals of an interval in a round, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern B is 8.21 s.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is 5.21 s first, then the closed state is 1.98 s, and then the open state is finally 3.00 s. The opening and closing pattern C is also defined as a round section from when it is first opened to when it is finally closed. Such opening / closing pattern C is also generated in such a manner that the middle opening twice occurs across the interval during the round, but the time during the round interval is shorter than that of the opening / closing pattern B. The total open time of the opening and closing pattern C is 8.21 s, which is the same as that of the opening and closing pattern B.

  The open / close pattern D is an open / close pattern in which the open state is first 5.21 s, then the closed state is 1.32 s, and then the open state is finally 3.00 s. The open / close pattern D is also defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. Such opening / closing pattern D is also generated in such a manner that the middle opening twice occurs across the interval during the round, but the time during the round interval is shorter than that of the opening / closing pattern C. The total open time of the opening and closing pattern D is 8.21 s, which is the same as the opening and closing pattern B and the opening and closing pattern C.

  Among the opening and closing patterns A to E described above, the round game when the opening and closing is controlled based on the opening and closing patterns A to D including the long open or the middle open where winning of the game ball is possible Applicable The round game when the opening and closing control is performed based on the opening and closing pattern E is a non-substantially round game that does not correspond to a substantially round game.

  In addition, as an opening and closing pattern of one round, the following contents may be sufficient. The open pattern is not limited to the above five types, and may be four or less or six or more. The opening and closing pattern A may not be 10 seconds, but may be, for example, less than 10 seconds or more than 10 seconds, as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be won. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the opening and closing patterns B to D, the opening is made twice in one round, but the opening may be made three or more times. The time for opening the middle in the opening and closing patterns B to D may be any time as long as a predetermined number of gaming balls can be won. Furthermore, with regard to the opening and closing patterns B to D, the times of opening the middle may be made different from each other. The opening time of the middle opening can be appropriately set in accordance with the inter-round interval and the time of the in-round interval. For the opening and closing pattern E, the opening time may not be 0.1 s, for example, may be less than 0.1 s or more than 0.1 s. Also, it may be opened several times instead of being opened only once in one round.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the big hit opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 6 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). As an inter-round interval pattern, only an interval pattern a having a closing time of 0.3 s is defined. The hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern that occurs on a normal bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is 7R. The hit pattern 1 is defined so that the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern E in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. That is, the hit pattern 1 specifies that the substantial round is the 7th round of the 1Rth to 7Rth, and the remaining 9th round of the 8Rth to 16Rth is executed as the non-substantially round.

  The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs upon a bonus game bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. The hit pattern 2 is defined so that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern B in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. In the large-scale bonus that is executed as an effect with hit pattern 2, the prize ball number based on only the large winning opening count number (the prescribed number of prizes: 10) is 2400, and including the over prize, the planned prize ball number It will be 2670. Therefore, in the large addition bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and a number "570" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the scheduled number of winning balls is added in the first half round It is reported as a number.

  The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 1, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. The hit pattern 3 is defined so that the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern C in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. In the middle additional bonus 1 executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 3, the number of prize balls based on the prescribed number of prizes is 2,400, and the planned number of prize balls is 2,535 if over winning is included. Therefore, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is also notified as an initial value in the middle added bonus 1 and "435" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the number of expected winning balls in the first half round It is reported as an additional number.

  The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that occurs on the middle and upper bonus 2, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. In the hit pattern 4, the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds, the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern D in the eighth to eleventh rounds, and the large winning in the 12th round The opening 37 is the opening and closing pattern C, and the large winning opening 37 is defined as the opening and closing pattern B in the 13th to 16th eyes. In the middle additional bonus 2 executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 4, the number of winning balls based on the prescribed number of winnings is 2400, and the number of scheduled winning balls is 2535 including over winnings. Therefore, in the middle additional bonus 2, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "435" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the expected number of winning balls is the first half round or It is reported as an additional number in the second half round.

  The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern which is generated upon a bonus game bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 16R. The hit pattern 5 is defined such that the big winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A in the first to seventh rounds and the large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern D in the eighth to sixteenth rounds. In the small additional bonus to be executed as an effect together with the hit pattern 5, the number of winning balls based on the prescribed number of winnings is 2400, and the over winning is not detected. That is, the number of planned prize balls is also 2400. Therefore, in the small-accumulation bonus, "2100" corresponding to the number of winning balls in 14 rounds is notified as an initial value, and "300" corresponding to the difference between the initial value and the number of scheduled winning balls is added in the first half round It is reported as a number.

  The hit pattern 6 occurs in the small hit gaming state, and the large winning opening 37 is defined to be the open / close pattern E only once. That is, the hit pattern 6 is executed as a hit pattern in which the possibility of winning of the game ball with respect to the big winning opening 37 becomes extremely low.

  The hit pattern may have the following contents. In the present embodiment, as described later, on the assumption that the gaming balls are continuously fired, an interval during the round is set to the open / close patterns B to D, but the firing operation start time of the gaming balls is The interval time during the round may be defined as a reference. For example, the time during the round interval may be defined as a time corresponding to a predetermined number of estimated maximum arrival times with reference to the time of the first middle opening or the launch operation start time. In addition, when it is considered that over winning is unlikely to occur, the corresponding time during the round interval is the number of winnings in the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and It is preferable that the total time with the number of game balls assumed to exist on the winning opening shutter be equal to or less than the prescribed number of winnings, and if it is a situation where over winning is likely to occur, the corresponding interval during the round The time is the sum of the number of winnings in the round (the number of winnings detected with the first open state) and the number of gaming balls assumed to be present on the big winning opening shutter in the interval during the round It is preferable to set the time to exceed. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which over winning is easy and a situation in which it is difficult depending on the time of the interval during the round. For example, in the present embodiment, 2.64 s, which is the maximum interval time during a round, is defined as a time that can achieve 12 winnings per round (two over winnings), but 13 per round It may be a time when the above winnings are possible. However, since the time during the round interval tends to be unnaturally long as the number of over winnings is increased, it is preferable to set an appropriate time. Also, the hit pattern 1 may be one in which the same open / close pattern is assigned to all the rounds, or alternatively, the open / close pattern may be different only in some of the rounds. As a hit pattern, the interval between rounds may be different. In the hit patterns 2 to 5, the opening and closing patterns may be different in part or all of the rounds. In addition, the hit patterns 2 to 5 may have different intervals between rounds.

[Add pattern selection table]
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an addition pattern selection table. The additional pattern selection table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional pattern selection table is a table for selecting an additional pattern as a hit effect pattern to be described later according to the hit patterns 2 to 5. The additional pattern selection table is provided for each of the hit patterns 2 to 5, and defines various kinds of additional patterns to be determined and selection rates (%) when selecting the additional patterns by lottery.

  According to the added pattern selection table (hit pattern 2) associated with hit pattern 2, large added patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selection rate as added patterns corresponding to the large added bonus. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 3) associated with the hit pattern 3, the intermediate add patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the middle additional bonus 1. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 4) associated with the hit pattern 4, the inner additional patterns 5 to 9 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the middle additional bonus 2. According to the additional pattern selection table (contact pattern 5) associated with the hit pattern 5, the small additional patterns 1 to 4 are selected at a predetermined selectivity as the additional pattern corresponding to the small additional bonus.

  In addition, the selection rate for distributing the additional pattern to be a decision item in the additional pattern selection table is not limited to that shown in FIG. In the additional pattern selection table, the number of additional pattern patterns may be the same or may be different.

[Overlay pattern table]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an additional pattern table. This additional pattern table is a table to be referred to in the during-round effect process (see FIG. 37) of the sub CPU 71 described above. The addition pattern table is a table for defining the number of additions for effect and the round for notifying the addition according to the addition pattern. The additional pattern table is provided for each type of bonus, and defines the additional pattern and the number of rounds serving as reference items, and the number of additional servings to be determined. Also in the present embodiment, the additional number is notified along with the appearance of the additional character described later.

  According to the additional pattern table (large additional bonus) corresponding to the large additional bonus, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the large additional patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the large overlay pattern 1, “100” is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th eyes, and “270” is notified as the number of additions in the 7th eyes. The total number of additions of these is “570”.

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 1) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 1, the number of rounds and the additional number notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 1 to 4 as the additional pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 1, “100” is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th eyes, and “135” is notified as the number of additions in the 7th eyes. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "435".

  According to the additional pattern table (medium additional bonus 2) corresponding to the medium additional bonus 2, the number of rounds and the additional number to be notified are defined for each of the intermediate addition patterns 5 to 9 as the additional addition pattern. For example, in the middle-superimposed pattern 5, "100" is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1R, 3R, and 5R eyes, and "30" is notified as the number of additions in each of the 8Rth to 10Rth eyes. “45” is notified as the additional number. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "435".

  According to the addition pattern table (small addition bonus) corresponding to the small addition bonus, the number of rounds and the number of additions to be notified are defined for each small addition pattern 1 to 4 as the addition pattern. For example, in the small overlay pattern 1, “100” is notified as the number of additions in each of the 1st, 3rd, and 5th eyes. The number of additions obtained by totaling these is "300".

  It should be noted that the numerical value for distributing the additional number in the additional pattern table is not limited to that shown in FIG. 49, and the additional number (570, 435, 300) obtained from the difference between the scheduled ball number and the initial value may be distributed appropriately do it. In addition, after notifying the numerical value exceeding the above-mentioned total addition number as the addition number, by setting the numerical value notified to be subtracted, it may be made to finally become a predetermined total addition number. .

[Superimposed character lottery table]
FIG. 50 shows an additional character lottery table. The additional character lottery table is a table to be referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 55) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The additional character lottery table is a table for selecting the additional characters to appear at the start of the additional bonus or at the notification of the additional number according to the additional pattern by lottery. The additional character lottery table defines various additional patterns serving as reference items, additional characters serving as determination items, and a selection rate (%) when selecting an additional character by lottery. As the additional characters, "animal", "female", and "pyrotechnician" are defined.

  For example, in the large additional patterns 1 to 4, it is defined that the selection rate of the additional character of the “Fireworks” is the highest. In the middle additional patterns 1 to 9, it is defined that the selection rates of the “female” and “Fireworksman” upper characters are generally high, and the selection rates of the “animal” upper characters are generally low. In the small addition patterns 1 to 4, the selection rate of the “animal” added character is high, the selection rate of the “female” added character is next high, and the selection rate of the “Fireworks teacher” added characters is generally low. It is prescribed. According to the added character appearing based on such added character lottery table, the kind of bonus will be suggested, and the degree of expectation to the winning ball is also raised from the added number notified simultaneously with the appearance of the added character. be able to.

  The selection rate for distributing additional characters in the additional character lottery table is not limited to that shown in FIG. For various types of additional characters, an additional pattern that can not be selected may be defined. For example, it is assumed that the “animal” superimposed character can not be selected only in the large superimposable pattern, and the selective character is defined such that the “pyrophorician” superimposed character can be selected only in the middle super high pitch pattern May be

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the process similar to the thing by 1st Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, only describing drawing number, a step number, etc. suitably.

  As processing of main CPU 61 in this embodiment, main processing, timer interruption processing, switch input processing, special symbol related switch check processing, first starting opening switch checking processing, second starting opening switch checking processing, special winning opening switch Check processing, special symbol control processing, special symbol storage check processing, special symbol determination processing, special symbol variation time management processing, special symbol display time management processing, special symbol game end processing, according to the first embodiment, FIGS. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, the description thereof is omitted.

[Perform start interval management process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In the hit start interval management process, the processes of S350 to S360 are performed as the processes similar to S200 to S210 shown in FIG. 27 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, in S360, the main CPU 61 sets one corresponding to any one of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This big winning a prize opening reopening waiting time question management processing performs the processing of S370-S377 as processing similar to S220-S227 which are shown in Figure 28 with 1st execution form. In the present embodiment, in S377, the main CPU 61 sets one corresponding to any one of the open / close patterns A to E as the special winning opening open data.

[A big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the special winning opening open processing executed by the main CPU 61. In this big winning opening open processing, the processing of S380 to S392 is performed as substantially the same processing as S230 to S242 shown in FIG. 29 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S381, S382, and S387 are as follows.

  In S381, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is “10” or more, the process proceeds to S384. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is not “10” or more, the process proceeds to S382.

  In S382, the main CPU 61 executes the special winning opening / closing process according to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of the big hit and the current round. According to this process, when the opening and closing patterns B to D are set, an interval during round which is closed during the round occurs. As a result, an over winning is realized in which the actual number of winnings is larger than the prescribed number of winnings using the interval during the round. In S382, a special winning opening opening / closing process corresponding to the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit is also executed.

  In S387, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In this embodiment, the inter-round interval display time is always set to the time corresponding to the interval pattern a.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. In the hit end interval management process, the processes of S400 to S406 are performed as processes substantially similar to S250 to S256 shown in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment. However, at S405, the main CPU 61 is configured to set "180" as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63.

  As processing of the sub CPU 71 in the present embodiment, main processing, command reception interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, command analysis processing, and effect processing during rounds are shown in FIGS. 32-35 and 37 according to the first embodiment. The description is omitted because it is the same as in FIG.

[Perform production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. In the hit effect pattern determination process, the process of S410 to S418 is performed as the process substantially similar to S320 to S328 shown in FIG. 36 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S410, S411, S414, and S417 are as follows.

  In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets one of “01H” to “06H” in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. As for the hit effect pattern flag, “01H” corresponds to the normal bonus, and each of “02H” to “05H” corresponds to the large addition bonus, the middle addition bonus 1 and 2, the small addition bonus, and “06H” , Corresponding to small hit. When this process ends, the process moves to S411.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S412. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S418.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a value corresponding to the selected additional pattern in the additional pattern flag. In the present embodiment, 17 patterns are provided as the superposing patterns, and “01H” to “01H” of superposing pattern flags are provided for large superposing patterns 1 to 4, middle superposing patterns 1 to 9, and small superposing patterns 1 to 4. "11H" corresponds. When this process ends, the process moves to S415.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "2100" in the winning ball number counter. The value "2100" corresponds to the number of prize balls that will be paid out according to 14R of the 16R round game, and is displayed as an initial value of the scheduled number of prize balls in the hit start interval. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. In this hit / termination effect processing, the processing of S420 to S424 is performed as substantially the same processing as S340 to S344 shown in FIG. 38 according to the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the processes of S420 and S422 are as follows.

  In S420, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional bonus is ended based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "02H" to "05H", the process proceeds to S421. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "02H" to "05H", the processing is shifted to S422.

  In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting end effect data according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data at the end of the round game. At this time, data of effect contents different according to any of the normal bonus, the additional bonus, and the small hit is set as the end effect data. When this process ends, the process moves to S423.

[Example of operation when over winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, an operation example when an over winning occurs in the special winning opening 37 will be described.

  57 and 58 are diagrams for describing the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37A when the over winning occurs. 57 and 58 schematically show the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (big winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 as being different from that of FIG. 3 or the like for the sake of convenience. The inter-round interval immediately before the 7R in the bonus is 7R, and after the 7R ends, the behavior from the inter-round interval to the 8R is shown schematically. The game ball is continuously fired and reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A (the right end portion of the corresponding large winning opening 37 in the case of the open state) after 3.1s uniformly. . Each game ball is given an order such as (1), (2), ... or (1 '), (2'), ... in order of firing, but for convenience, once the round is switched, (1) or (1) The order is attached in order from ').

  First, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 at an interval between rounds immediately before the start of the 7R's eye. The interval time between the rounds is shorter than 0.66 s, which corresponds to approximately the firing interval at which the game ball reaches the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A first after the large winning opening shutter 37A is closed. In the embodiment, since it is 0.3 s, the gaming ball has not reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), 7R starts when the interval time between rounds elapses, and the special winning opening shutter 37A opens the special winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the white arrow. It will be in the state. Also at this time, the gaming ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), for example, the game ball (1) fired in the interval between rounds is in the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 opened along the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43 not shown. It rolls up to.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the gaming ball (1) passes downward through the large winning opening 37 which has been opened, and the winning combination is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. . That is, the first winning of the prescribed number of winnings “10” is detected. Thereafter, the gaming balls (2) to (9) (not shown) pass through the special winning opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval and fall downward, and winning is sequentially detected by the special winning opening count switch 370. The Rukoto.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the next game ball (10) also passes downward through the large winning opening 37 in the open state, and a winning is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370. It will be done. As a result, by detecting a winning corresponding to the last of the prescribed winning number “10”, the 7th R is ended, and the inter-round interval before the 8th R is started is started. At this time, approximately 9.8 s have elapsed from the start of the shooting operation of the gaming ball (1). The time 9.8 s, the time 3.1 s for the first game ball (1) to reach the part corresponding to the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37A, and the game ball (1) is a big winning opening count switch 370 And the time required to fire the ten game balls (1) to (10) is calculated from the sum of the time interval of 0.66 s × 10. Therefore, in the seventh R, which is in the open state for a maximum of 10 s, winnings of the ten gaming balls (1) to (10) can be sufficiently detected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), by the interval between rounds being started again, the big winning opening shutter 37A protrudes in the direction of the white arrow to close the big winning opening 37 again. Do. At this time, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 s, the next game ball (1 ') has reached the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 in the closed state.

  Then, when the time interval of 0.3 s between the rounds has elapsed, the 8th R starts, and as shown in FIG. 58 (G), the special winning opening shutter 37A retracts in the direction of the white arrow to make a special winning opening. Leave 37 open. At this time, since the gaming ball (1 ') has reached a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming ball (1') passes through the special winning opening 37 in an open state. Then, the game is dropped downward, and a winning prize is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58H, the gaming balls (2 ′) to (7 ′) and the gaming balls (8 ′) (not shown) pass through the big winning opening 37 every 0.66 s of the firing interval. It falls downward and the winnings are sequentially detected by the special winning opening count switch 370. When the game ball (8 ') is detected, counting from the start of the 8th R, the time when the first game ball (1') is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 is 0.26 s, 7 By setting the time required to fire each of the game balls (2 ') to (8') to a firing interval of 0.66 s × 7, approximately after 4.88 s. That is, in the eighth R, approximately eight game balls (1 ') to (8') are detected within the time (5.21 s) to be the first middle opening.

  When the time 5.21 s for the first middle opening in this 8th R has passed, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the special winning opening shutter 37A becomes the special winning opening 37 once by becoming an interval during the round. It is closed. Then, when 0.66 s has elapsed from the state of FIG. 58 (H), that is, when approximately 5.5 4 s has elapsed since the start of the 8th R, the next game ball (9 ′) is a special winning opening shutter. Reach the right end of 37A.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the special winning opening shutter 37A closes the special winning opening 37 until 2.64 s, which is the time specified as the interval during the eighth round, has passed. Meanwhile, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (9 ') to (12') pass from the right to the left in a line. At this time, the gaming balls (9 ') to (12') sequentially reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A approximately every 0.66 seconds, and further rotate at a speed advancing about 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. I will move. As a result, the four gaming balls (9 ') to (12') are positioned on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A with an interval of about one. In short, when counting from the state time point of FIG. 58 (H), the state of FIG. 58 (J) is after about 2.64 s has elapsed, and becomes about the time when about 7.52 s has elapsed since the 8Rs start time point. That is, in the interval during the 8Rth round, four game balls (9 ') to (12') can be sufficiently present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A by the end of the interval.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (K), when the interval during the eighth round of the round ends, the second middle opening is made, and the special winning opening shutter 37A is retracted in the direction of the white arrow to make the special winning opening 37 Again to the open state. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A, the gaming balls (9 ') to (12') are still passing at a relatively low speed. As a result, the four gaming balls (9 ') to (12') pass simultaneously through the large winning opening 37 in the open state and fall downward, and four large winning opening count switches 370 A winning combination of is detected. That is, in the first middle opening in one round game, winnings for eight are detected, and then, in the middle opening immediately after the interval during the round in the same round playing, winnings for four are detected. As a result, an over winning that exceeds the prescribed number of winnings by two will occur. Similarly, assuming that the interval time during the round is 1.98 s, for example, it can be easily understood that 12 + 1 over wins occur, and if 1.32 s, the over win does not occur.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram for describing various operation timings related to the special winning opening, and shows operation timings in the large additional bonus according to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. The “launched state”, “playing state”, “time required”, “big winning opening”, “number of balls on the shutter”, “elapsed time after change in number of balls on the shutter”, “state shown” It is the same as the item shown in 41.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the gaming balls are being fired continuously, the time when the first gaming ball (1) is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370 from the start point of time 7R is approximately 0. 0. 26s, the time required for the next nine game balls (2) to (10) to fire is 0.66 s × 9 = 5.94 s, and the last game ball (10) is by the large winning opening count switch 370 Since the time to be detected is approximately 0.1 s, an open time of approximately 6.3 s, which is the total of these, is obtained.

  After that, the interval between rounds after the 7th R is started, and the big winning opening 37 is closed again. At this time, the special winning opening 37 is closed for 0.3s, but the next game ball (1 ') has not yet reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37A, and the special winning opening shutter 37A There are no game balls on the top of the game.

  Then, when the 8th R is started and the first middle opening is started, the winning of approximately 8 game balls (1 ') to (8') is detected within the defined time of 5.21s. This is the time when the first game ball (1 ') is detected by the large winning opening count switch 370 from the time of the 8R start is approximately 0.26 s, and the next seven game balls (2) to ( Since the time required for the firing of 8) is 0.66 s × 7 = 4.62 s of the firing interval, it is clear also from the time to be the sum of these.

  After that, the first middle opening is finished, and the eighth Rth in-round interval starts. In the interval during this round, the big winning opening 37 is once closed for 2.64 s. At this time, the time for the next ninth game ball (9 ') to reach the right end portion of the large winning opening shutter 37A from the start of the interval during the round is approximately 0.33 s, and the next three games Since the time required for the balls (10 ') to (12') to fire is 0.66 s × 3 = 2.31 s, the total number of them is 4.64 s, which is the sum of them. 9 ') to (12') are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37A.

  After that, when the interval during the 8th round is over and the big winning opening 37 is opened by the second middle opening again, the four gaming balls (9 ') on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A-( 12 ') passes through the special winning opening 37, and four winning combinations are detected. When the winning of one game ball is detected among them, the big winning opening 37 is closed, the 8th R is finished, and the next interval between rounds is started. That is, as the opening and closing pattern of the 8th R, up to 8 winnings can be detected in the first middle opening, and up to 4 winnings can be detected in the second middle opening. The time is defined as 2.64 s, which allows 10 + 2 over winnings for the entire 8th R. Similarly, by setting the interval time during the round to 1.98 s, 10 + 1 over wins are enabled, and by setting the interval during the round to 1.32 s, the over win is not detected. There is. As described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of two over winnings are realized by appropriately setting an interval time mainly in the round, but three or more over winnings may be possible. However, when three or more over winnings are possible, the longitudinal dimension of the large winning opening shutter 37A is set to a length that allows at least four gaming balls to pass simultaneously, or the time for the first middle opening is set appropriately. Is preferred.

[Example of screen display of bonus bonus]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a screen display of an additional bonus. The figure shows a screen display example of the additional bonus corresponding to the large additional pattern 1.

  First, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), when the large additional bonus according to hit pattern 2 is determined as the additional bonus and the large added pattern 1 is selected as the additional pattern, the screen of display area 4A in the hit start interval An image 700 indicating the start of the additional bonus is displayed above, and an image 701 prompting a right is displayed. At this time, an additional character 702A of, for example, a "Fireworksman" selected by lottery appears on the screen, and then an image 703 indicating an initial value "+2100" of the planned prize ball number is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the 1R is started, a display field 704 showing the type of the additional character and the scheduled number of balls per addition of the additional number are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. And a display field 706 for displaying the second half round as the "winning sphere increase zone", with the period of the first half round as the "addition specialization zone". Such display fields 704 to 706 are displayed until the sixteenth round is completed. For example, in the display field 704, the "Fireworksman" corresponding to the additional character 702A is displayed until the sixteenth round is over. On the other hand, after the superimposition number is displayed in the center of the screen in the display column 705, the scheduled prize ball count to which the superimposition number is added is additionally displayed. In the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of overlays “100” is displayed in the first R (see FIG. 49), after the overlay character 702A is displayed in the center of the display area 4A, An additional number 703A of +100 "is displayed. In addition, basically, the “overlay specialization zone” is displayed in the first to seventh R in the display column 706, and the “winning ball increase zone” is displayed in the eighth and subsequent R. As a result, the “superimposition specialization zone” is displayed in the first R display column 706.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), when the second R is started, the scheduled award ball number “2200” is obtained by adding the “+100” superimposition number 703A displayed in the previous round in the display column 705. Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the second R (see FIG. 49), in the second R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, when the third R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “100” is displayed in the third R (see FIG. 49). After the superimposed character 702A is displayed at the center of the screen of the display area 4A, the superimposed number 703B of "+100" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60E, when the fourth R is started, the planned number of prize balls “2300” to which the “+100” superimposition number 703 B displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed in the fourth R (see FIG. 49), in the fourth R, the overlay character 702A and the number of overlays are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60F, when the fifth R is started, it is specified that the number of additions “100” is displayed in the fifth R in the large overlay pattern 1 (see FIG. 49). In the center of the display area 4A, after the superimposed character 702A is displayed, the superimposed number 703C of "+100" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60G, when the sixth R is started, the planned number of prize balls “2400” to which the “+100” superimposition number 703 C displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is defined that the number of additions is not displayed in the sixth R (see FIG. 49), in the sixth R, the additional characters 702A and the number of additions are not displayed in the center of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60H, when the seventh R is started, in the large overlay pattern 1, it is defined that the number of additions “270” is displayed in the seventh R (see FIG. 49). At the center of the display area 4A, after the superimposed character 702A is displayed, the superimposed number 703D of "+270" is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60I, when the eighth R is started, the planned number of prize balls “2670” to which the “+270” superimposition number 703 D displayed in the previous round is added in the display column 705 Is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 60I and FIG. 60J, in the display columns 706 of the eighth to sixteenth eyes, “a prize ball increase zone” is displayed. Furthermore, in the large overlay pattern 1, since it is specified that the number of overlays is not displayed from the 8th to 16th eyes (see FIG. 49), in the 8th to 16th eyes, the number of superimposed characters 702A and the number of overlays are in the center of the screen. It is not displayed, and the display column 705 displays that the planned prize ball number has finally become "2670". Although the player can not substantially cause an over winning in the first half round due to the series display of the additional number and the planned number of prize balls, the second half round is based on the number of planned prize balls displayed additionally. It is possible to advance the game while expecting an over-winning of the game, and to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect of presentation.

[Effect of game machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the predetermined round game, the first middle opening time to open the large winning opening 37 is launched with gaming balls less than the prescribed winning number (10), and the large winning opening The time required to pass the shutter 37A, specifically, the time when winning is detected for eight gaming balls, is controlled, and then the big winning opening 37 is once closed in the interval during the round The time is controlled so as to be the time for three or four game balls to be over-wined on the basis of the previous eight balls to flow into the suppression portion 430 (upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A). There is.

  Thereby, in the round game, when it becomes the second middle opening next time, a maximum of 12 game balls larger than the specified winning number are large from the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37A in combination with the previous middle opening. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Therefore, over winning can be realized in a predetermined round game, and interest in the jackpot gaming state can be enhanced.

  Also, in a predetermined round game, the winning opening 37 is opened and closed a plurality of times, and by appropriately controlling the time of the interval during the round that is temporarily closed among them, the number of over winnings is appropriately adjusted. can do.

  In addition, as a round game where over winning is possible, for example, the opening and closing pattern D of a relatively short time is included in the interval time during the round, without changing the time when the big winning opening shutter 37A is first opened to the middle. By providing the jackpot pattern 5 and the jackpot pattern 2 and 3 including the opening and closing pattern B and the opening and closing pattern C for a relatively long time, the over winning number is made according to the interval time during the round. The number of winning balls to be paid out can be made different based on the number of jackpots, and the degree of advantage can be differentiated only by appropriately setting the interval time during the round for a plurality of big hit gaming states.

  In addition, the prize winning prize 37 is awarded according to the number of prize balls awarded each time the gaming ball wins in the big prize mouth 37, the number of times of execution of the round game, and the time of middle opening and interval time during the round. Based on the estimated number of winnings including the number of over winnings, the number of expected prize balls in the big hit gaming state can be calculated in advance, and the number of expected prize balls can be notified as an additional number or initial value. With regard to how much the number of winning balls can be obtained in the state, it is possible to notify of novel contents with surprisingness and variety, and as a result, it is possible to enhance interest in the jackpot gaming state.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment mentioned above or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In addition, the specifications of the gaming machine of the third embodiment are substantially the same as those according to the first embodiment, but no small hit is provided, the number of prescribed wins is two, and the prescribed number of rounds is set to 3R. It is done.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
First, the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61, three types of opening and closing patterns A to C are defined as the one round opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 37. The opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern B of the present embodiment are the same as the opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern B of the first embodiment. The open / close pattern C of the present embodiment is similar to the open / close pattern C of the second embodiment, but the open state first becomes 0.6 s, then the closed state becomes 1.98 s, and then the open state is 3.00 s The opening and closing pattern is finally closed after the The opening and closing pattern C is also defined as a round section from the opening state first to the final closing state. Such an open / close pattern C is an open short first, and then a second open occurs as a middle open across an interval during a round. The total opening time of the opening and closing pattern C is 3.6 s. The substantial round game in the jackpot gaming state corresponds to all of the opening and closing patterns A to C described above.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 62, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 4 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). As a pattern of the inter-round interval, an interval pattern a in which the closing time is 0.3 s and an interval pattern b in which the closing time is 2.97 s are defined. The hit pattern 1 corresponds to the additional bonus A, and is a hit pattern in which the prescribed number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are 3R. The hit pattern 1 is such that all rounds of the 1st to 3rd eyes are the open / close pattern A, and the inter-round interval between the 1st and 2nd eyes and between the 2nd and 3rd eyes is the interval pattern a It is prescribed. In such a hit pattern 1 (superimposition bonus A), two wins equal to the prescribed win number are detected in the 1st to 3rd eyes. As a result, in the hit pattern 1 added bonus A, the planned number of balls becomes 90.

  The hit pattern 2 corresponds to the bonus B, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 2 is defined such that the first R is the open / close pattern A and the second R and the third R are the open / close pattern B. In addition, an inter-round interval between the first and second R's and between the second and third R's is defined to be an interval pattern b. In such a hit pattern 2 (superimposed bonus B), while two wins equal to the prescribed win number are detected at the 1Rth, the time interval between rounds before the 2Rs start and the 3Rs start is relatively long. Since the interval pattern b is selected, 2 + 2 over winnings are detected in the 2R and 3R eyes. As a result, in the hit pattern 2 added bonus B, the planned number of balls becomes 150.

  The hit pattern 3 corresponds to the additional bonus C, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined such that the first R is the open / close pattern A and the second R and the third R are the open / close pattern C. Also, an inter-round interval between the first and second R's and between the second and third R's is defined to be an interval pattern a. In such hit pattern 3 (superimposed bonus C), two wins equal to the specified number of prizes are detected in the 1Rth, while relatively long closing time (1.98) rounds in the 2Rs and 3Rs. Since a middle interval is provided, after one winning combination is detected in the first open state in each of the 2R and 3R eyes, 1 + 2 over prizes are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round Be done. As a result, in the hit pattern 3 added bonus C, the planned number of balls becomes 150.

  The hit pattern 4 corresponds to the additional bonus D, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds and the actual number of rounds are specified as 3R. The hit pattern 3 is defined such that the first R is an open / close pattern A, the second R is an open / close pattern B, and the third R is an open / close pattern C. Also, the inter-round interval between the 1Rth and 2Rth is defined as the interval pattern b, and the inter-round interval between the 2R and 3Rth is defined as the interval pattern a. In such a hit pattern 4 (superimposed bonus D), two wins equal to the prescribed win number are detected at the 1Rth, while an interval pattern b with a relatively long interval between rounds before the start of the 2Rs Therefore, 2 + 2 over wins are detected in the 2Rth eye, and an interval during the round with a relatively long closing time (1.98) is provided in the 3Rth, so that in the first open state in the 3Rth eye After one winning is detected, 1 + 2 over winnings are detected in the second open state after the end of the interval during the round. As a result, in the hit pattern 3 added bonus D, the planned number of balls becomes 150.

  In the third embodiment, as in the above-described hit pattern 4, a round (2Rth) for realizing 2 + 2 over wins by an interval between rounds and a round (3R) for achieving 1 + 3 over wins by an interval during the round Although it is characterized in that one is mixed with the eyes, the number of defined rounds of all or part of the hit patterns may be different after defining at least one hit pattern having such content. Further, as the types of the inter-round interval and the interval during the round, more types may be provided according to the specification.

[Table for selecting additional bonus effect pattern]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a table for selecting an additional bonus effect pattern. The addition bonus effect pattern selection table is a table for collectively determining an addition pattern, an addition character, and an addition number according to the type of the addition bonus as the effect contents during the round. An additional bonus effect pattern selection table is provided for each additional bonus A to D, and the number of rounds serving as reference items, the additional pattern serving as a determination item, the additional character, and the number of additional items, and various determination items by lottery. It defines the selectivity (%) for selection. At the hit start interval before the start of the first bonus bonus R, the additional character appears and "60" is displayed as the initial value of the scheduled prize ball number. Further, the addition bonus effect pattern selection table is referred to in the hit effect pattern determination process (not shown), and the addition pattern, the addition character, and the number of additions are determined in the hit effect pattern determination process.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus A) associated with the addition bonus A, the addition patterns A-1 to A-4 corresponding to the addition bonus A, "women" and "animal" addition characters And the number of additions to be notified for each round number is selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the "female" super character is selected in the super pattern A-1, the super-number "30" is reported in the first R, and the super-number is not reported in the second R and the third R. A numerical value "90" obtained by summing the additional number notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus B) associated with the addition bonus B, the addition patterns B-1 to B-4 corresponding to the addition bonus B, and the addition of the "Fireworksman" and "Woman" A character and an additional number to be notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, in the case where the “Fireworkman” superimposing character is selected in the superposing pattern B-1, the number “30” of superimposing is notified in each of the first to third eyes. A numerical value "150" obtained by adding the number of additions notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus C) associated with the addition bonus C, the addition patterns C-1 to C-6 corresponding to the addition bonus C, "Fireworksman", "Woman", " An “over” character of “animal” and the number of additions notified for each round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the “Fireworks teacher” super character is selected in the super pattern C-1, the number “30” of the number added is notified in the 1Rth, the number “10” added in the 2Rth is reported, and the number 3rd added the number The number "50" is informed. A numerical value "150" obtained by adding the number of additions notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  According to the addition bonus effect pattern selection table (addition bonus D) associated with the addition bonus D, the addition patterns D-1 to D-6 corresponding to the addition bonus D, "Fireworksman", "Woman", " An “over” character of “animal” and the number of additions notified per round number are selected at a predetermined selection rate. For example, when the "Fireworks teacher" super character is selected in the super pattern D-1, the number "30" of the number added is notified in the first R, the number "40" is reported in the second R, and the number R is added in the third R The number "20" is informed. A numerical value "150" obtained by adding the number of additions notified in this manner and the initial value "60" is the planned winning number.

  It should be noted that the selection rate for distributing the additional pattern, the number of additional items, etc., which are the determination items in the additional bonus effect pattern selection table, is not limited to that shown in FIG. The addition bonus effect pattern selection table may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. The additional number may be defined, for example, to be notified collectively in the first R. Although the initial value of the scheduled prize ball number is "60" as an example, the initial value may be set to "90", for example, so that the additional number may not be notified in the additional bonus A.

[Effect of game machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, in addition to the same effects as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment can be obtained, the following effects can also be obtained.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the over play is controlled by controlling the time of the interval pattern between rounds which can realize the over winning by controlling the time of the interval during the round as the interval pattern b. Since it is possible to provide the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 4 that includes both of the achievable open / close pattern B and the round game, it is possible to further enhance the interest for the big hit gaming state. Also, for example, as in hit pattern 3 and hit pattern 4, a big hit gaming state in which over winning can be achieved by a round game (for example, 3R eyes) which is opened twice across an interval during a round like hit pattern 2 There is a big hit gaming state in which an over winning can be achieved even in a round game (1R and 2R eyes) which is opened only once. That is, in any of the big hit gaming states of hitting patterns 2 to 4, an over winning exceeding the prescribed winning number can be realized in one round game, so that the interest to the big hitting gaming state can be further enhanced.

<First modified example of large winning opening shutter>
Next, a first modified example of the special winning opening shutter will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as or to those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

[Specifications of the large winning opening shutter according to the first modification]
First, the specifications of the special winning opening shutter 37B according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 64 as well, the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37B (big winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 is schematically shown as being different from FIG. 3 etc. for the sake of convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 64, when the diameter d of the gaming ball is 11 mm, for example, the large winning opening shutter 37B has a longitudinal dimension L1 of about d × 12 = 132 mm. As a result, up to 12 gaming balls can simultaneously pass through the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B in the closed state. However, also in this modification, a firing interval until one game ball is fired after one game ball is fired according to the firing operation start, and one game ball is fired By taking into consideration the arrival time until the game ball is positioned at the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, a maximum of six game balls can be supposed to pass simultaneously. In addition, the longest time until the game ball which has reached the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B is detected by the special winning opening count switch 370 is about 1.32s, and the shortest time of the inter-round interpal is 1 It is set to be about .32 s (may be 1.32 s or more). Thus, it is possible to reliably detect the gaming ball that has won in the previous round game until the special winning opening 37 is in the open state again. Further, in the inter-round interpal, it may be possible that gaming balls exceeding the prescribed winning number can not be present on the big winning opening shutter 37B. The time required for the large winning opening shutter 37B to move from one of the positions to the other of the opening position and the closing position of the large opening 37 is the embodiment described above. It is similar to

  When applying such a large winning opening shutter 37B, the number of shots per minute is 90.90 / min, and the firing interval is 0.66 seconds, as in the above-described embodiment, and it is possible to greatly increase the shooting preparation position. It takes approximately 3.00 to 3.33 seconds as the time to reach the right end of the winning opening shutter 37B. The upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B is an inclined surface which advances by 11 mm in 0.33 seconds, that is, advances by 22 mm every 0.66 seconds. The other points are also the same as in the above-described embodiment. As a result, up to six game balls can be substantially simultaneously passed.

[Example of operation when over winning occurs]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, an operation example when an over winning occurs when the special winning opening shutter 37B is applied will be described.

  FIGS. 65 and 66 are diagrams for describing the operation of the special winning opening shutter 37B when the over winning occurs. 65 and 66 schematically show the positional relationship between the special winning opening shutter 37A (big winning opening 37) and the special winning opening count switch 370 as being different from that of FIG. The behavior from the interval to the first to fourth R eyes is schematically shown, but the inter-round interval and the open time between the rounds are different from those according to the above-described embodiment. Each game ball is given an order such as (0), (1), ... in order of firing regardless of the update of the round. Also, the prescribed winning number is “3” as an example.

  First, as shown in FIG. 65A, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 at the hit start interval.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), when the specified time of the hit start interval has elapsed, the first R starts, and the special winning opening shutter 37B retracts the special winning opening 37 by retracting in the direction of the outlined arrow. Leave open. Also at this time, the gaming ball has not reached the right end of the special winning opening 37.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the gaming ball (1) fired after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first R roll to the vicinity of the right end of the big winning opening 37 in the open state.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the gaming ball (1) passes downward through the large winning opening 37 which has been opened, and the high winning opening count switch 370 detects a winning. . At this time, since the number of first R winnings has not reached the prescribed number of winnings "3", the large winning opening 37 continues to be open.

  Then, when approximately 1.32s have elapsed from the state of FIG. 65 (D), as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the third gaming ball (3) is a part corresponding to the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37B. To reach. As a result, the winning of the game ball (3) is detected by the big winning opening count switch 370, and the big winning opening shutter 37B closes the big winning opening 37 accordingly, and the interval between rounds before the 2Rs start starts .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), when the special winning opening shutter 37B is in the state of completely closing the special winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the start of the 2R eye, the gaming ball (4), ( 5) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, and rolls from the right to the left along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 65 (F) is approximately 1.32s after the start of the inter-round interval.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), when the second R is started, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, since the gaming balls (4) and (5) are in the passing state, the two gaming balls (4) and (5) are in the open state. The large winning opening 37 is simultaneously passed and dropped downward, and the winning opening count switch 370 detects two winnings. Furthermore, the next game ball (6) has rolled to the vicinity of the right end of the large winning opening 37 in the open state, and this game ball (6) will also soon be winning. As a result, the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the special winning opening 37 again, and the inter-round interval before the start of the third R starts. Such a state of FIG. 65 (G) is approximately 1.72s after the start of the inter-round interval, and 0.4s after the second R is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66H, when the large winning opening shutter 37B completely closes the large winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the start of the third R, the game balls (7) to (7) 12) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, and rolls from the right to the left along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (H) is approximately 3.76 s after the start of the inter-round interval, and is 4.02 s after counting from the state of FIG. 65 (G). Thus, in order to generate the state in which the six game balls (7) to (12) exist on the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37B, the interval time between rounds before the start of the third R is approximately 3 with a margin. It is set to about .96s.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), when the third R is started, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, since the gaming balls (7) to (12) are present on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, these six gaming balls (7) to (12) are in the open state. The large winning opening 37 is simultaneously passed and dropped downward, and the winning opening count switch 370 detects six winnings. That is, immediately after the start of the third R in which the inter-round interval ends, 3 + 3 over wins are detected. In the state of FIG. 66 (I), approximately 3.97 s has elapsed from the start of the inter-round interval, adding the time 0.01 s required for the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening shutter 37B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), the special winning opening shutter 37B closes the large winning opening 37 again, and the inter-round interval before the 4Rs start is started. Thereafter, the gaming ball (13) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (J) is approximately 0.06s after the start of the inter-round interval.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), when the special winning opening shutter 37B is in the state of completely closing the special winning opening 37 during the interval between rounds before the 4R-th start, the game ball (13) to (18) reaches the right end portion of the special winning opening shutter 37B, and rolls from the right to the left along the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B. Such a state of FIG. 66 (K) is approximately 3.36s after the start of the inter-round interval.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), when the fourth R starts, the special winning opening shutter 37B opens the special winning opening 37. At this time, on the upper surface of the special winning opening shutter 37B, while the gaming ball (13) does not fall into the special winning opening 37 by moving outward from the left end, the following gaming balls (14) to (18) These six game balls (14) to (19) are in the open state because there is the game ball (19) which has reached the right end portion of the big winning opening shutter 37B while being in the existing state. It passes through the mouth 37 all at once and falls downward, and the winning opening count switch 370 detects six winnings. That is, even immediately after the start of the fourth round in which the inter-round interval ends, 3 + 3 over wins are detected. The state of FIG. 66 (L) is such that the time required for the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening shutter 37B is 0.01s after the start of the fourth R and approximately 3.97s after the start of the interval between rounds. .

[Effect of game machine of the first modification]
As described above, the over winning can also be realized by appropriately setting the specified winning number and the time interval between rounds using the special winning opening shutter 37B. In addition, for example from the state of FIG. 66 (G) until a certain amount of time when the winning of the game ball (6) becomes possible elapses, the special winning opening 37 is opened, but from the state of FIG. 66 (G) The closed state is made immediately, specifically, it is closed about 0.1 s from the start of the round, and then the big prize hole 37 is temporarily closed for a predetermined time as an interval during the round, and then opened again. You may do so. At this time, for example, if the interval time during the round is about 1.32 s, two game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 2 over winnings are realized. Can. If the interval time during the round is about 1.98 seconds, three game balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 3 over winnings can be realized. If the interval time during the round is about 2.64 seconds, four gaming balls can be positioned on the upper surface of the large winning opening shutter 37B during that time, and 2 + 4 over winnings can be realized. Of course, the over winning may be realized only by adjusting the time between the round intervals without providing the interval during the round.

<Second Modification of Game Board and Variable Winning Device>
Next, a second modification of the gaming board and the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIG. The same or similar components as or to those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

[Game board]
As shown in FIG. 67, the gaming board 1 includes the second large winning opening 37 which can be over-wined in the same manner as the large winning opening of the first embodiment etc. A large winning opening 36 is provided. The first large winning opening 36 is provided at the top of the game area 1 p. The first large winning opening 36 is provided with a first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the same. The first large winning opening shutter 36A is configured to open and close the first large winning opening 36 by tilting in the front-rear direction. Such a first large winning opening shutter 36A is in a first mode in which the game ball can easily pass through the passage area (first large winning hole 36) and in a second mode in which the first big winning hole shutter 36A is in a difficult closing state. To realize a variable member that can change. Such a first big winning opening 36 is also opened in the big hit gaming state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening count switch 370, and the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A have the same functions as those according to the above-described embodiment. It is provided. Although not shown in the drawings, a first large winning opening count switch and a first large winning opening shutter solenoid are also provided in association with the first large winning opening 36 having the same function as these. That is, when the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36 is detected by the first big winning opening count switch, the payout device 83 pays out a preset number of gaming balls as a winning ball. In addition, the first big winning opening shutter solenoid for driving the first big winning opening shutter 36A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to change to an open state in which the game ball can be won to the first large winning hole 36 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. Be done. The opening drive of the first large winning opening 36 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A may be controlled exclusively with the opening driving of the second large winning opening 37 in the big hit gaming state. That is, for example, in the first R, the second large winning opening 37 can be opened based on a predetermined opening and closing pattern, and in the meantime, the first large winning opening 36 is continuously closed, and in the next 2R, Control is possible such that the first large winning opening 36 can be opened based on a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the second large winning opening 37 is continuously closed during that time.

  The second guide rail 30 'is similar to the above-described embodiment, but has the following configuration. That is, the second guide rail 30 'is not provided with a protrusion that can contact the gaming ball. Therefore, the gaming balls flowing down through the second guide rail 30 'are released from the lower end 30A' of the second guide rail 30 'without being decelerated. The lower end 30A 'of the second guide rail 30' is located in the vicinity of the upper right side of the second large winning opening 37 and is curved so as to discharge the game ball generally in the left direction. Thereby, the game ball released from the lower end 30A 'of the second guide rail 30' hits the right end portion of the second large winning opening shutter 37A when the second large winning opening shutter 37A described later is in the closed state. At the beginning of contact, they move leftward while rolling along the top surface.

  The second big winning opening shutter 37A is formed to have the same dimensions as those according to the above-described first embodiment and the like, but the upper surface thereof is a relatively gentle downward sloping inclined surface in the closed state. The upper surface 43a (not shown in FIG. 67) of the cover member 43 is connected to the left end of the second large winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state, and is inclined downward to the right like the second large winning opening shutter 37A. It has become. The upper surface 43a has an effect of decelerating the plurality of gaming balls moved along the upper surface of the second large winning opening shutter 37A. That is, on the upper surface of the second large winning opening shutter 37A and the upper surface 43a of the cover member 43, the speed of the game ball advancing in the left direction is effectively reduced by being inclined downward to the right. Initially, all game balls advancing along the left turn to the right in the middle of advancing to the left, and are led outward from the right end of the second big winning opening shutter 37A. An out port 41A is provided on the lower right side of the second large winning opening shutter 37A. Thus, the gaming balls guided outward from the right end of the second big winning opening shutter 37A are collected through the out port 41. Although not particularly shown, the cover member 43 is provided with a front end guide portion 43b and a plurality of convex portions 43d, so that the advancing speed of the gaming ball is also effectively reduced. The upper surface 43 a of the cover member 43 and the second large winning opening shutter 37 </ b> A form the suppression portion 430. Also, with regard to the second big winning opening shutter and the cover member, among the gaming balls progressing along these, some gaming balls are guided outward from the right end of the big winning opening shutter, while the remaining games The inclination angle of the upper surface may be set to an appropriate angle so that the ball is led outward from the left end of the upper surface of the cover member.

[Effect of game machine of the second modification]
According to the gaming machine of such a second modification, when the second large winning opening shutter 37A is in the closed state, the gaming balls are easily congested on the upper surface thereof, and more gaming balls can be used as the second large winning opening Since it can be made to stay on the upper surface of the shutter 37A, the degree of expectation for the over winning can be raised while making the whereabouts of the gaming ball interested.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine of the second modification, the second large winning opening 37 or the first winning state that has become open the round game with the possibility of over winning and the round game without the possibility of over winning. It can be easily recognized only by confirming the special winning opening 36. In short, for example, it is difficult to make an over winning by opening and closing only the first large winning opening 36 in the first half round of the 1R to 7R eyes, while opening and closing only the second large winning opening 37 in the second half of the 8R to 16R eyes The over winning can be made possible. In such a case, in the big hit gaming state, the first big winning opening shutter 36A is opened and the time when over winning is difficult and the second big winning opening shutter 37A is opened and the time when over winning is possible As it is possible to distinguish clearly, for example, in the first half of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to concentrate on the effect display of the extra bonus, while in the second half of the big hit gaming state to generate over winnings It can be enhanced.

<Third Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a third modification of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. The same or similar components as or to those of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. Further, in the following description, unless otherwise stated, it means the form etc. when the big winning opening is in a closed state. The variable winning prize device according to the third modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 or the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 to 79, in the third modification, the variable winning device 90 is different from those according to the above-described embodiment and the modification. The variable winning device 90 includes a cover member 91 and an opening / closing unit 92 as basic components. The opening / closing unit 92 includes a front base plate 920, a back base member 921, a main stage 922, an upper stage 923, an upper cover 924, a drive unit 925, and the like. On the front portion 922a of the main stage 922, a shutter surface 922b that is slightly inclined to the left is formed as a portion corresponding to the special winning opening shutter. The front base plate 920 and the front 922a and the shutter surface 922b of the main stage 922 are located on the front side of the game board 1, and one of the back base member 921, the other part of the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, The unit and the drive unit 925 are disposed on the back side of the game board 1.

  The cover member 91 has a front end guide portion 91b and a plurality of convex portions 91d in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a right upper surface 91a and a left upper surface 91a 'on the right and left sides of the upper portion. Between the right upper surface 91a and the left upper surface 91a ', an opening 91c serving as a large winning opening 37 is formed. Since an introduction portion 920c described later is positioned above the right upper surface 91a, the game ball B hardly contacts the upper surface 91a.

  The front base plate 920 is provided in the through portion 1 c provided on the game board 1 so as to reach the back surface from the game area 1 p. The front base plate 920 has an opening 920a at the center, and the front portion 922a of the main stage 922 is exposed through the opening 920a and the through portion 1c. In the center of the right end of the opening 920a, the game ball B guided forward along the step surface 922c of the main stage 922 described later is on the shutter surface 922b in the closed state or the big winning opening 37 in the open state. A dischargeable discharger 920 b is provided. At the upper right end of the opening 920a, an introduction part 920c for guiding the game ball B which has flowed down to a guide path 924b of the upper cover 924 described later is provided. Such a front base plate 920 doubles as an accessory of the game board 1.

  The back base member 921 is for supporting the main stage 922, the upper stage 923, and the drive unit 925 on the back side of the game board 1, as shown in FIGS. The main stage 922 is supported on the upper portion of the back base member 921 so as to be able to tilt in the front-rear direction via a first axis 921a along the left-right direction, and a second axis along the left-right direction The upper stage 923 is supported so as to be capable of tilting in the front-rear direction via 921 b. The shaft 921a is provided so as to be vertically displaceable by a predetermined distance, and the main stage 922 is displaced from the position where the large winning opening 37 is closed to the position where the shutter surface 922b is open. When tilting, the shaft 921a is displaced from the high position to the low position. At the bottom of the back base member 921, a drive unit 925 is disposed. Further, the left side portion of the back base member 921 is provided with a recovery port 921c capable of recovering the game ball B guided forward along a step surface 922c of the main stage 922 described later (see FIG. 75). ). Such a back base member 921 also serves as an accessory of the game board 1.

  The main stage 922 has a front portion 922a, a shutter surface 922b, and a step surface 922c. A plurality of upright front portions 922a are formed on the front end of the step surface 922c so as to face the cover member 91, and a plurality of shutter surfaces 922b are formed on the front portions 922a. The convex portions 922 d are provided at predetermined intervals. The step surface 922c is formed in a plurality of steps so as to have steps that become lower as it goes from the rear to the front. The step surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface having a slight downward tendency, and is also an inclined surface which descends to the right, to the left, and to the right as it goes from the upper stage to the middle stage and to the lower stage. According to such a step surface 922c, a passage is formed which leads the game ball B from the upper stage to the lower stage while meandering left and right. When the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B that has reached the lower end of the step surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b and is directly collected through the collection port 921c. A plurality of convex portions 922e that can be in contact with the game balls B are also provided at predetermined intervals in the step portion of the step surface 922c of each step. Such a main stage 922 can be tilted back and forth by a drive unit 925, as shown in FIGS. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front, the step surface 922c also has a relatively steep inclination to the front, and the front part 922a and the shutter surface 922b are in the opening 920a. Move down. Thus, the gap between the upper end of the opening 920a and the front portion 922a is enlarged, and the plurality of game balls B on the step surface 922c are led to the big winning opening 37 at the same time through the gap.

  The upper stage 923 is adjacent to the upper portion of the main stage 922, and has an upper surface 923a having a level difference higher than the uppermost step surface 922c of the main stage 922. The central portion of the upper surface 923a is an inclined portion which is lower than the both ends and is inclined downward to the front, and the gaming ball B naturally moves to the step surface 922c generally through this portion. The game ball B is guided to the upper surface 923 a of the upper stage 923 through the introduction portion 920 c and a guide path 924 b of the upper lid 924 described later. When the shutter surface 922 b is in the closed state, the front end of the upper stage 923 is provided with a plurality of convex portions 923 e that can be in contact with the game ball B at predetermined intervals. Such an upper stage 923 can be tilted in the front-rear direction in conjunction with the main stage 922 as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, when the upper stage 923 is inclined downward to the front, the upper surface 923a also has a relatively steep inclination to the front, and the plurality of gaming balls B on the upper surface 923a are all at once. It will be led to the step surface 922c. The main stage and the upper stage may be integrally formed. In addition, the main stage and the upper stage may overlap each other in the open state.

  The upper lid 924 covers the step surface 922c and the upper stage 923 of the main stage 922, and has a guiding path 924b connected to the introduction portion 920c and an inner wall 924c extending in the left-right direction. The guiding path 924 b is formed to guide the gaming ball B from the introducing portion 920 c to the upper surface 923 a of the upper stage 923. The inner wall 924 c is arranged to face each step surface with an interval through which the game ball B can pass between the inner wall 924 c and each step surface of the main stage 922. Further, on the inner wall 924c, a plurality of convex portions 924e capable of coming into contact with the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals. With the inner wall 924c, the convex portion 924e, the step surface 922c, and the convex portion 922e, the passage as the passage which suppresses the progress of the game ball B while meandering the game ball B laterally along the step surface 922c of each step Portions 930 are formed. Such an upper cover 924 also serves as an accessory of the game board 1.

  The drive unit 925 tilts the main stage 922, and mainly includes a drive motor 925a, a drive gear 925b, a pair of intermediate gears 925c and 925d, a pair of driven gears 925e and 925f, two push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and It has two rotational position sensors 925j and 925k. The driving force of the driving motor 925a is transmitted to the driven gear 925e via the driving gear 925b and the intermediate gears 925c and 925d, and further transmitted to the driven gear 925f meshed with the driven gear 925e. The drive motor 925a and the rotational position sensors 925j and 925k are connected to the main CPU 61 via a control circuit (not shown), and are controlled by the main CPU 61 or supply a predetermined signal.

  Cylindrical peripheral walls are formed on the driven gears 925e and 925f, and inward projecting pieces 9250e that abut on the semi-helical cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h formed on the push-up pipes 925g and 925h on the peripheral walls. , 9250f are provided. Further, on the peripheral wall of one driven gear 925e, two outwardly facing projecting pieces 9251e and 9252e are provided so as to be detected by the rotational position sensors 925j and 925k at a predetermined rotational position. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are inserted into the driven gears 925e and 925f in a state of being always urged upward via the springs 925m and 925n. A cam cover 925p is provided on the upper portion of the push-up pipes 925g and 925h, and the cam cover 925p is always in contact with the lower portion of the main stage 922. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 78, at the rotational position where the projecting piece 9251e is detected by the rotational position sensor 925k, the projecting pieces 9250e and 9250f abut on the uppermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h, as shown in FIG. The push-up pipes 925g and 925h are maintained in the low position against the biasing force of the springs 925m and 925n. As a result, the main stage 922 is in an inclined posture, and the special winning opening 37 is in an open state. On the other hand, when the driven gears 925e and 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, the projecting piece 9252e comes to the rotational position detected by the rotational position sensor 925j, as shown by the phantom line in the same figure. In this state, since the projecting pieces 9250e, 9250f abut on the lowermost portions of the cam surfaces 9250g, 9250h, as shown in FIG. 76, the lifting pipes 925g, 925h are maintained at the high position. As a result, the main stage 922 is in a non-inclined posture, and the big winning opening 37 is in a closed state. Furthermore, after the big winning opening 37 is closed, when it is opened again, the driven gears 925e, 925f rotate approximately 180 degrees in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 78, whereby the projecting pieces 9250e, 9250f The cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h are pressed while rotating while being in contact with the cam surfaces 9250g and 9250h. As a result, the state as shown in FIG. 77 is obtained again, and the special winning opening 37 is in the open state. That is, the main stage 922 is in the inclined attitude and the non-inclined attitude each time the driven gears 925e and 925f are rotated approximately 180 degrees in one direction, and the big winning opening 37 is brought into the open state and the closed state accordingly.

[Effect of game machine of the third modification]
According to the gaming machine of the third modification, the game ball B is guided to the suppressing portion 930 to operate its advancing speed effectively without operating the other members besides tilting the main stage 922. The plurality of gaming balls B suppressed by the suppressing portion 930 can be simultaneously led to the big winning opening 37 as the shutter surface 922 b is opened. As a result, the number of passes of the game ball B to the big winning opening 37 can be adjusted without separately providing a storage device etc., and an increase in the number of parts and cost increase can be suppressed and heat problems around the game board can be solved. can do.

  In addition, the game ball B rolling the game area 1p is made to flow into the suppressing portion 930 through the introducing portion 920c and the guiding path 924b without directly colliding with the shutter surface 922b. Since the game ball B can be smoothly guided from the rear end to the front end on the lower side without damage, the shutter surface 922b can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, also in the step surface 922c of the suppressing portion 930, the advancing speed of the game ball B can be effectively decelerated and suppressed by the meandering passage and the convex portions 922e, 923e, 924e, and the advancing can be further delayed it can.

  In addition, since the game ball B can be guided from the game area 1p on the front side of the game board 1 to the suppression unit 930 on the back side, a sufficient distance for reducing and suppressing the progression speed of the game ball B is secured. be able to.

  Further, in the suppressing portion 930, the plurality of convex portions 922e, 923e, 924e can form a passage capable of effectively suppressing the progression of the gaming ball B, and the plurality of gaming faces by the step surface 922c having a downward trend. The balls B can be simultaneously led to the big winning opening 37, and the over winning can be easily realized.

  In addition, not all of the game balls B whose progress has been suppressed in the suppression unit 930 are not led to the large winning opening 37, but a part thereof is led out of the game area 1p through the collection opening 920c. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively with respect to 37.

<Fourth Modified Example of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fourth modified example of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 3rd modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. The variable winning prize apparatus according to the fourth modification is mainly different from that according to the third modification in the main stage 922. The variable winning prize device according to the fourth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 or the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  In the main stage 922 of the fourth modified example, the shutter surface 922 b is formed on the front portion 922 a, but no convex portion is provided. Of course, a convex portion may be provided. In addition, the convex portion is not provided on the upper lid 924 and the stepped portion of the step surface 922c, which are not shown. The step surface 922c of each step is an inclined surface having a slight downward tendency, and is formed so as to have an irregular or wave-like repeating shape along the left-right direction. The upper surface 923a of the upper stage 923 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wavy shape, similarly to the step surface 922c. According to such a step surface 922c and the upper surface 923a, since it becomes easy to swing in the lateral direction when the game ball B proceeds from the upper stage to the lower stage from the upper stage to the lower stage, the time to the lower stage will be prolonged, The progressing speed of the game ball B can be decelerated more effectively.

  As shown by the solid line in FIG. 82, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B that has reached the lower end of the step surface 922c is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b not shown. At the bottom of such a main stage 922, an inclined support surface 922f is provided, and a slide plate 926 capable of reciprocating in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as shown by a phantom line in FIG. 82, when the slide plate 926 retracts to a predetermined position on the rear while in contact with the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front. Then, the step surface 922c also has a relatively steep downward inclination, and the front portion 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of gaming balls B that were on the step surface 922c are led to the big winning opening 37 at the same time. As a mechanism for tilting the main stage, a mechanism similar to the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above may be applied.

[Effect of game machine of the fourth modification]
According to the gaming machine of the fourth modification, the variable winning device capable of over winning can be configured with simpler parts and structures, and the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost can be effectively suppressed. it can.

Another Example of Fourth Modified Example
Next, a variable winning prize apparatus according to another example of the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the 4th modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 83 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ', and FIG. 85 is a view schematically illustrating the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . 83 and 84, there is shown a form in which the components (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ') of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. In practice, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain amount of clearance.

  The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 83 is integrally formed with the upper stage. The main stage 922 is also formed in a concavo-convex shape or a wavy shape along the left-right direction, and has a step surface 922c which is a slightly downward slope. A shutter surface 922 b is integrally formed at the front end (front) 922 a of the step surface 922 c. The stepped surface 922c and the shutter surface 922b are formed to have the same dimensions in the left-right direction. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 84 is similar to the above-described upper cover 924, but does not have a plate-like member facing the entire surface of the step surface 922c in the closed state. It has a guiding path 924b for guiding the gaming ball B to the upper end of the step surface 922c by turning around the end. The rear end portion 924f of the guide path 924b is disposed above the rear end of the main stage 922, and a communication space 924g communicating with the rear end of the main stage 922 is opened further to the rear of the rear end portion 924f. There is. As a result, the gaming ball B guided to the rear end portion 924f of the guiding path 924b falls onto the rear end portion of the main stage 922 through the communication space portion 924g. Between the front end 922a of the step surface 922c and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), even when the main stage 922 is not only in the open state but also in the closed state, A relatively large gap through which the ball B can pass is provided. Thereby, even if the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the gaming ball B can be smoothly guided from the step surface 922c of the suppressing portion 930 to the shutter surface 922b without any problem.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B in the suppressing portion 930 passes through the opening 920a (not shown) from the upper stage to the lower stage along the step surface 922c and finally To the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The device for tilting the main stage may be, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front, the step surface 922c is also inclined relatively sharply downward to the front, and the shutter surface 922b has an opening not shown. Move downward to 920a. As a result, the plurality of gaming balls B that were on the step surface 922c are led to the big winning opening 37 at the same time. The variable winning device provided with such a main stage 922 and the upper unit 924 'can also obtain the same effect as that of the above-described fourth modification.

<Fifth Modification of Variable Winning Device>
Next, a fifth modification of the variable winning device will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 3rd modification and 4th modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Also in the variable winning prize device according to the fifth modification, the main stage 922 is mainly different from that according to the third modification. The variable winning prize apparatus according to the fifth modification can also be applied to the game board 1 shown in FIG. 3 or the game board 1 shown in FIG.

  The main stage 922 of the fifth modification is formed up to the portion of the upper stage, and has an inclined surface 922c 'which is uniformly inclined downward. Nothing is particularly provided on the inclined surface 922c '. The upper lid 924 has a plurality of partition walls 924c 'on the surface opposite to the inclined surface 922c'. The cut wall 924c 'is bent to the left and right for moving the game ball B from the upper side to the lower side along the inclined surface 922c' when the main stage 922 is in a posture to close the big winning opening 37. Forming a passageway 930 '. On the partition wall 924c ', a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals. When moving the gaming ball B downward along the inclined surface 922c 'by the passage 930' having such a convex portion 924e, the suppression portion for decelerating and suppressing the advancing speed by meandering to the left and right Is formed. That is, the game ball B meanders to the left and right as it travels from the upper side to the lower side according to the passage 930 'bent to the left and right, so the time to the lower end of the inclined surface 922c' will be prolonged accordingly The traveling speed of B can be decelerated more effectively.

  As shown by the solid line in FIG. 87, when the shutter surface 922b is in the closed state, the gaming ball B that has reached the lower end of the inclined surface 922c 'is guided onto the shutter surface 922b through the discharge portion 920b not shown. An inclined support surface 922f is also provided at the bottom of such a main stage 922, and a slide plate 926 capable of reciprocating in the front-rear direction is in contact with the inclined support surface 922f. The bottom of the main stage 922 is supported by the slide plate 926. The slide plate 926 is moved in the front-rear direction by a drive unit 925 (not shown).

  That is, as shown by a phantom line in FIG. 87, when the slide plate 926 retracts to a predetermined position on the back while in contact with the inclined support surface 922f, the main stage 922 is inclined downward to the front. Then, the front surface 922a and the shutter surface 922b move below the opening 920a (not shown) while the inclined surface 922c 'is in a steeper posture where it descends forward. At this time, the distance between the inclined surface 922c 'and the partition wall 924c' becomes larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and the partition wall 924c 'can not inhibit the progression of the game ball B. As a result, the bent passage 930 'is eliminated, and the plurality of gaming balls B on the inclined surface 922c' are promptly led to the big winning opening 37 without any trouble.

[Effect of game machine of the fifth modification]
Even with the gaming machine of the fifth modification, the variable winning device capable of over winning can be configured with simpler parts and structures, and the increase in the number of parts and the manufacturing cost can be effectively suppressed. .

<Another example of the fifth modification>
Next, a variable winning device according to another example of the fifth modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by the 5th modification mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 88 is a plan view showing the main stage 922, FIG. 84 is a plan view showing the upper unit 924 ', and FIG. 85 is a view for schematically explaining the opening / closing operation of the main stage 922. . In FIGS. 88 and 89, the components (main stage 922, upper unit 924 ') of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 without a gap. In practice, the components of the variable winning device are provided in the through portion 1c of the game board 1 with a certain amount of clearance.

  The main stage 922 shown in FIG. 88 is a member formed in substantially the same flat shape as that of the fifth modification described above, and the upper surface thereof is disposed as a downward sloping inclined surface 922c '. The tip portion is used as the shutter surface 922 b. The upper unit 924 ′ shown in FIG. 89 also has no plate-like member facing the entire surface of the inclined surface 922c ′, and wraps around from the introduction portion 920c to the upper end of the rear end of the main stage 922, and the upper appropriate part of the inclined surface 922c ′ It has a guiding path 924 b for guiding the gaming ball B to it. In addition, the upper unit 924 'has a plurality of partition walls 924c' at a portion facing the inclined surface 922c '. The cut wall 924c 'forms a left and right bent passage 930' for meandering when the game ball B moves from the top to the bottom along the inclined surface 922c 'when the main stage 922 is in the closed state. ing. On the partition wall 924c ', a plurality of convex portions 924e that can contact the game ball B are provided at predetermined intervals. By such a passage 930 ', a suppressing portion is formed which guides the traveling speed so as to decelerate and restrain the traveling speed while meandering the gaming ball B laterally downward along the inclined surface 922c'. Between the outlet 930a 'of the passage 930' and the upper end of the opening 920a (not shown), it is guided to the front end side of the inclined surface 922c 'even when the main stage 922 is not only open but also closed. A relatively large gap through which the game ball B can pass is provided. Thus, even if the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the gaming ball B can be smoothly guided from the inclined surface 922c 'to the shutter surface 922b along the passage 930' without any problem.

  As shown in FIG. 90A, when the main stage 922 is in the closed state, the gaming ball B on the inclined surface 922c 'moves along the passage 930' so as to meander from the top to the bottom, and the final The light beam passes through an opening 920a (not shown) and is guided onto the shutter surface 922b. Such a main stage 922 is tilted by a mechanism similar to the drive unit 925 according to the third modification described above. The main stage 922 is supported at its rear end via a shaft 921a inserted into the vertically elongated hole 921d of the back base member 921 and can be tilted by rotating around the shaft 921a. The device for tilting the main stage may be, for example, another drive unit using a solenoid.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), when the central portion of the main stage 922 is lowered by the drive unit 925, it is relatively tilted by tilting around the axis 921a displaced downward along the vertically elongated holes 921d. It has a steep forward and downward inclination. That is, the inclined surface 922c 'also has a posture that becomes steeper than in the state of FIG. 90A, and the shutter surface 922b moves below the opening 920a (not shown). As a result, the plurality of gaming balls B on the inclined surface 922c 'are separated from the partition wall 924c' and the passage 930 'is eliminated, so the plurality of gaming balls B become large at once along the inclined surface 922c'. It will be led to the winning opening 37. Also with the variable winning device provided with such main stage 922 and upper unit 924 ', it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above-described fifth modification.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment etc. mentioned previously, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Diverting device]
As shown in FIG. 91, in the game board 1, between the lower end 30A 'of the second guide rail 30' and the special winning opening 37, a direction changing device 110 capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball is provided. ing. As shown in FIG. 92, the direction changing device 110 receives a plurality of gaming balls and changes their rolling direction (generally downward) in a direction rotating in a generally horizontal plane, and receives a plurality of received gaming balls. Clune 111 as a receptor capable of discharging one by one, and the posture of the Kroon 111 are changed according to the number of accepted gaming balls, and the plurality of gaming balls accepted by the Clune 111 can be released. And a seesaw mechanism 112. When the player strikes right, the gaming ball may be led to the clune 111 by a nail not shown. If the game ball is not led to the clone 111, the gaming ball falls downward and rolls on the large winning opening shutter 37A and is guided in the direction of the out port 41.

  The clune 111 is provided at the bottom of the inner center of the main portion 111A so that the game balls can be discharged one by one from the inner portion of the main portion 111A and the outer portion of the main portion 111A. And the discharge port 111B. When the Clown 111 is changed in posture by the seesaw mechanism 112, the Clune 111 is in a posture capable of releasing a plurality of gaming balls from the top opening 111C toward the large winning opening 37 so as to be released.

  The intermediate portion of the seesaw mechanism 112 is supported via a spindle 113 projecting to the game board 1 so that both end sides can swing in a generally vertical plane along the game board 1, and the clone 111 is on one end side. The arm 112A is disposed, and the balance weight 112B is provided on the other end side of the arm 112A opposite to the one end side where the clune 111 is disposed. For example, while the weight of the balance weight 112B is heavier than that of four game balls, it is lighter than that of the five game balls which is the prescribed number. The seesaw mechanism 112 supports the clone 111 on one end side of the arm 112A while keeping the clone 111 in a horizontal attitude acceptable to the gaming ball in a state where a predetermined number (for example, five) or more gaming balls are not received by the clune 111 . At this time, the gaming balls received in the interior of the clune 111 are guided along the inner circumferential wall of the clune 111 while being guided toward the bottom while the gaming balls of the specified number or more are received in the clune 111, and the final It is discharged from the discharge port 111 B below the clune 111. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 111B are guided to the big winning opening 37 when the top surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state or the big winning opening shutter 37A is open.

  On the other hand, the seesaw mechanism 112 is an arm so as to tilt the clone 111 by the balance with the balance weight 112B provided on the other end side of the arm 112A when the specified number or more gaming balls are received by the clone 111. The 112A swings. As a result, a large number of gaming balls are collectively released from the top surface opening 111C of the clone 111. A large number of game balls released in this manner are led to the big winning opening 37 when the upper surface of the big winning opening shutter 37A in the closed state or the big winning opening shutter 37A is open. As a modification of the present embodiment, the position of the clone may be arranged not on the large winning opening but on other winning openings and gates. Clunes may be provided on both ends of the arm without particularly providing a balance weight. Also, two or more clunes may be provided on one end side of the arm. The direction changing device may be disposed at any position in the game area. The clune may be flat without providing a mortar-like recess. The position of the clone when the gaming ball is not contained may be lower than the height position shown in FIG. 92 and the like, and may be any height position as long as it is inclined when a prescribed number of gaming balls are received.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment etc. mentioned previously, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Starting mouth unit]
As shown in FIG. 93, on the left side of the second large winning opening 37 in the gaming board 1, there are provided a winning opening 40A and a passing gate 35 opened and closed by the wing members 34. The winning opening 40A and the passing gate 35 are provided. The starting opening unit 200 is provided on the left side of. The starting opening unit 200 internally has a plurality of starting openings for giving an opportunity to draw lots on condition that the game balls pass. The starting opening unit 200 is basically arranged such that the game ball can enter when hitting left. It should be noted that in the case of a left-handed game ball that has been fired may pass through the conduction port 221 of the starting opening unit 200, and in the case of a right-handed game ball that has been fired difficult or impossible to pass through the conduction port 221 It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the starting opening unit 200 includes a base plate 210, a conduction opening cover 220, a distribution crank 230, a clune 240, a clone ball passage member 250, a ball passage pressing member 260, a first starting opening switch 320, A second start port switch 330 and a missing port switch 380 are provided. The Kroon device is configured by a Kroon 240, a Kroon ball passage member 250, a ball passage pressing member 260, a second start port switch 330, and a missing port switch 380. The base plate 210, the conduction opening cover 220, and the clune 240 are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the player visually recognizes the behavior of the game ball entering the inside of the starting opening unit 200 from the front of the game board 1. It is configured to be able to

  The base plate 210 is provided to close an opening (not shown) provided in the game board 1. The base plate 210 has a first starting opening 211 at the lower right as viewed from the front, and an introduction port 212 for guiding the gaming ball to the clone 240 slightly above the center. A distribution crank 230 is disposed at a position on the front side of the base plate 210 and to the right of the inlet 212 above the left of the first start port 211. A first starting opening switch 320 for detecting winning (passing) of the gaming ball relative to the first starting opening 211 is provided at a position corresponding to the first starting opening 211 on the back side of the base plate 210 There is. As a result, the gaming ball having passed through the first starting opening 211 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320.

  The conduction port cover 220 is fixed to the base plate 210 so as to cover the front surface of the base plate 210. The conduction port cover 220 has a conduction port 221 which can pass through so as to guide the gaming ball to the inside, and in the vicinity of the first start port 211, a part of the gaming ball is leaked to the front of the game board 1 which becomes the outside. The outlet 222 is provided. Although not shown in the drawings, a guide wall is provided inside the conduction port cover 220 so as to form a ball passage from the distribution crank 230 to the first start port 211 and the introduction port 212. It should be noted that the game ball may be led from the distribution crank to the first starting port without a flow outlet, and winning may be made.

  The distribution crank 230 is for distributing the gaming balls having passed through the conduction opening 221 alternately to the ball passage following the first start opening 211 and the introduction opening 212, and swings a predetermined angle left and right on the front side of the base plate 210. It is provided to move. The distributing crank 230 has a cylindrical main body portion 231, a support shaft 232 which supports the main body portion 231 in a swingable manner with respect to the base plate 210, a distributing piece 233 extending substantially upward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 231, and distributing Right wing piece 234R and left wing that extend from the outer periphery of the main body 231 while leaving a predetermined interval on the right and left sides of the piece 233, and rotate the main body 231 and the distributing piece 233 predetermined angles to the right and left by contact and impact of gaming balls It has a piece 234L.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the distributing piece 233 is in a posture inclined at a predetermined angle to the right, the gaming ball which has passed through the conduction opening 221 is guided to the introduction opening 212 after coming into contact with the left wing piece 234L. At this time, the left wing piece 234L is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle by the impact of the game ball, so that the distribution piece 233 is inclined to the left by a predetermined angle. Thereafter, when the distributing piece 233 is in a posture inclined at a predetermined angle to the left side, the gaming ball which has passed through the conduction opening 221 next abuts on the right wing piece 234R and is guided to the ball passage following the first starting opening 211. It is eaten. At this time, the right wing piece 234R is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle by the impact of the game ball, so that the distributing piece 233 is inclined to the right by the predetermined angle. That is, every time the game ball passes through the conduction opening 221, the distribution piece 233 is alternately inclined to the right and left, and the game ball is alternately distributed to the ball passage and the introduction opening 212 following the first start opening 211. Be

  The clone 240 receives the game balls moved from the introduction port 212 and discharges the game balls from any of the plurality of through holes, and is provided on the back side of the base plate 210. The clune 240 is a bottomed cylindrical clune body 240A, an introduction passage 240B for introducing game balls from the introduction port 212 into the clone body 240A, and a second starting opening as a through hole provided on the bottom of the clune body 240A. 241 and two missing ports 242. The gaming ball guided from the introduction passage 240B to the clune main body 240A is discharged downward through the second starting opening 241 or the missing opening 242.

  The Kroon ball passage member 250 is for guiding the gaming balls discharged from the second starting opening 241 and the missing opening 242 of the Kroon 240 to the second starting opening switch 330 and the missing opening switch 380, respectively. , Located below the clune 240. The Kroon ball passage member 250 brings together a winning passage 251 for guiding the game balls of the second starting opening 241 one by one to the second starting opening switch 330, and a plurality of gaming balls discharged from the two lost openings 242 at once. It has a lost passage 252 which can be received and which guides these gaming balls one by one to the lost opening switch 380.

  The ball passage pressing member 260 is for fixing the second ball opening member 330 and the second hole opening switch 330 while fixing the second ball opening passage member 250 to the lower part of the kluin 240, and is provided below the krone ball passage member 250. Be placed. The ball passage pressing member 260 holds the second start port switch 330 at a position corresponding to the winning passage 251 of the lone ball passage member 250 and holds the disconnection port switch 380 at a position corresponding to the lost passage 252. The game ball guided from the winning passage 251 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, and the game ball guided from the lost passage 252 is detected by the lost opening switch 380. That is, the game ball having passed through the second start port 241 is detected by the second start port switch 330, and the game ball having passed through the disconnection port 242 is detected by the disconnection port switch 380. In addition, the number of lost openings in the crown may be one or less or three or more. A first starting opening, a general winning opening, a gate, etc. may be arranged in the chrone. All passage areas in the chrone may be a lost opening, a starting opening, a general winning opening, a gate or the like.

[Mobile production device]
As shown in FIG. 93, the movable effect member 42A included in the movable effect device 42 is usually positioned behind the stage 31 which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and is easy for the player to visually recognize when performing a specific effect. By moving to the position, it appears in the lower front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Further, the movable effect member 42A is configured to swing slightly up and down or to the left and right or to project a blade on the outer periphery. The movable effect member 42A has a light emitting lens 42B so as to overlap with the whole of the below-mentioned three-sized ball display area 600 displayed below the display area 4A and a part of the first three-sized ball holding display area 610. The light emitting lens 42B can emit light in a plurality of colors. As a result, a three-dimensional ball described later displayed as an image in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 and the first three-dimensional ball holding display area 610 can be visually recognized as the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A emits light and overlaps. When the movable effect member 42A retracts to the lower side of the display area 4A, it becomes possible to visually recognize from the front. Even when the light emitting lens overlaps the display area, the image of the display area may be visible through the light emitting lens.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 97, the auxiliary control circuit 70 is connected with a missing port switch 380, which is different from that according to the above-described embodiment. When the passing of the game ball in the lost opening 242 is detected, the lost opening switch 380 supplies a detection signal indicating that to the sub CPU 71. The first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330 are connected to the main control circuit 60 in the same manner as in the embodiment described above, and the game in the first starting opening 211 and the second starting opening 241 When a winning (pass) of a ball is detected, a detection signal indicating that is supplied to the main CPU 61. Further, the movable effect device 42 including the movable effect member 42A is connected to the sub CPU 71 via the movable effect device control circuit 79, and the sub CPU 71 performs the moving operation of the movable effect member 42A, the light emitting operation of the light emitting lens 42B, etc. Control.

[Specs of gaming machines]
As shown in FIG. 98, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment are substantially the same as those according to the second embodiment described above, but differ in the following points. That is, the special symbol serving as a small hit is only the first special symbol corresponding to the first starting opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not in the order in which the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol, but the game ball for the first starting opening 211 and the second starting opening 241 Is in the order of prize winning. In addition, as the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the probability variation gaming state is defined to be continued up to 184 times.

  The specifications of the present embodiment may also be as follows. For example, the special symbol serving as a small hit may be only the second special symbol corresponding to the second starting opening, or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. With regard to the special symbol, the jackpot probability at the low probability time and the high probability is not limited to those described above. That is, the big hit probability of the special symbol may be a probability that it is easier to win a big hit at high probability than at low probability. With regard to the order of digesting special symbols, it may be a specification that prioritizes one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of STs in which the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) continues is not limited to the above. Also, the probability change gaming state may be continued until the next big hit. The number of rounds is not limited to that described above, and other round numbers other than 16R may be provided. The actual number of rounds may be the same as the number of regular rounds. The types of jackpot symbols are not limited to those described above. For example, the types of jackpot symbols of the first special symbol may be increased. In addition, even in the big hit game state based on the first special symbol, it is possible to execute the extra bonus. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening count number (prescribed winning number) is set to “10”, but is not limited to this. For example, the special winning opening count may be set to 11 or more or less than 9. The time saving performance may be more than the ST number (the number of games in the probability variation gaming state), or may be less than the ST number including, for example, 0 times. The number of winning balls is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of winning balls relating to the special winning opening is set to a value different from that described above, the planned number of winning balls is calculated using the value and the estimated number of winnings, and notification of the additional number mentioned above is performed. You can do so. With regard to the ordinary symbol, the low probability time and the high probability time hitting probability are not limited to those described above. For example, the hit probability of the normal symbol may be a probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability, for example, it may be winning at a low probability. The number of hit symbols of the normal symbols is not limited to those described above, and may be, for example, two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that the open patterns of the blade members be associated differently. The second starting opening winning number may be a value other than that described above.

[Transition of production mode]
As shown in FIG. 99, as the effect modes of this embodiment, the normal mode (1) to (3), the small hit effect mode, the special mode (1) to (3), the big hit effect mode, and the ST mode (1) to (3) are defined. The small hit presentation mode is a production mode controlled by the sub control circuit 70 in conjunction with the start, execution and end of the small hit gaming state. The big hit presentation mode is a production mode controlled by the sub control circuit 70 in conjunction with the start, execution and end of the big hit gaming state. There are two modes corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The normal modes (1) to (3) are a kind of effect mode controlled by the sub control circuit 70 in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short play state). In the present embodiment, the normal mode (2) is entered after the end of the probability variation gaming state, and transition can be made to different normal modes (1) to (3) according to the determination result of the normal mode effect transition determination processing described later. In the normal mode (1) to (3), when the jackpot is won, the game mode shifts to the jackpot, and when the jackpot is hit, the game mode shifts to the jackpot.

  The special modes (1) to (3) are a kind of effect mode controlled by the sub control circuit 70 in the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-short game state), and after the small hitting gaming state ends For example, the game is executed until five games are consumed as the number of times of variation of the symbol (the number of games). In the present embodiment, after the small hitting game state is ended, transition to any one of the special modes (1) to (3) can be made according to the determination result of the special mode transition destination determination processing described later. When five games are digested in the special modes (1) to (3), the mode shifts to the original normal mode (1) to (3) which was before the start of the small hit gaming state. Also in the special modes (1) to (3), when the jackpot is won, the game mode shifts to the jackpot effect mode.

  The ST modes (1) to (3) are effect modes controlled by the sub control circuit 70 in the probability variation gaming state. In the present embodiment, ST mode (1) is entered after the end of the jackpot gaming state, for example, when 100 games are digested in ST mode (1), ST mode (2) is entered, and in ST mode (2). When the 74 games are consumed, it shifts to ST mode (3). Furthermore, when 10 games are digested in the ST mode (3), the probability variation gaming state ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode (2). In the ST mode (1) to (3), when the jackpot is won, the game mode shifts to the jackpot effect mode.

  The type and number of effect modes may be more or less than those shown in FIG. Further, each of the effect modes may be different in background image, BGM, and the like, but at least in part of the display image as the effect, the sound, and the like. The period (number of games) in which the special mode stays after the small hit gaming state ends is not limited to the five games described above, and can be appropriately set to the number of games according to the specification. The period (number of games) in which each of the ST modes (1) to (3) in the probability variation gaming state stay is not limited to the 100 games, 74 games, and 10 games described above, and is appropriately set to the appropriate number of games according to the specifications. can do.

[Display screen example of gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 100, three decorative symbols 500 are variably displayed and stopped at the center of the display area 4A. The variable display means a state in which one of the three decorative symbols 500 is displayed so as to flow up and down without being stopped completely, or is sequentially enlarged and displayed. The stop display means a state in which all three decorative symbols 500 that are variably displayed stop and indicate a combination of these symbols. In the following description, the stop display related to the decorative symbol 500 and the special symbol may be referred to as "finalized display". The variation display and the determination display of the decorative symbol 500 are synchronized with the variation display and the determination display of the special symbol except in the case of a so-called pseudo run which will be described later. At the lower part of the display area 4A, the three-dimensional ball display area 600, the first three-dimensional ball hold display area 610, the second three-dimensional ball hold display area 620, the relevant gem display area 700, and the gem hold display area 710 are displayed. Ru. The three-dimensional ball display area 600, the first three-dimensional ball holding display area 610, and the second three-dimensional ball holding display area 620 are stored in the work RAM 73 according to the start storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The image of the three-length ball is displayed based on the held information. In the following description, the hold information pertaining to the three-length ball is simply referred to as "hold information" or "three-length ball hold information". Specifically, the suspension information includes "hit determination random number value", "hit symbol determination random number value", and the like as information, but for convenience, based on these random value values, determination of hit type The result shall be included in the pending information. Although the “variation pattern determination random number value” is not included in the hold information in the present embodiment, the type of variation pattern may be included in the suspension information based on the “variation pattern determination random number value”. In addition, "hit random number", "random symbol determination random number", and "variation pattern determination random number" (various random numbers extracted according to winning on the starting opening) etc. Since the storage information is configured, the main control circuit (main CPU) may perform various processes related to the prefetch notice executed by the sub control circuit (sub CPU) described later based on the start storage. . In this case, the hold information pertaining to the three-length ball is treated as the start memory. An image of a three-length ball may be simply referred to as a "three-length ball". In the jewelry display area 700 and the jewelry reserve display area 710, an image of the jewelry is displayed based on the reserve information stored in the work RAM 73 in response to the passage of the game ball in the lost opening 242. In the following description, the hold information pertaining to a gem is referred to as "gem hold information". An image of a gem may be simply referred to as a "gem". At the upper part of the display area 4A, for example, up to four character images 800 of a pyrotechnician are displayed. The character image 800 of the pyrotechnician may be simply referred to as a "pyrographer".

  In the case of the pseudo ream, although the decorative symbol 500 appears as if it were stopped and displayed once or several times between the time when the special symbol is variably displayed based on one starting memory and the finalized display, strictly May be in the state of the temporary stop display which can not be said to be the state completely stopped and displayed due to vibration or the like. For example, in the case of the pseudo run 2, the decorative symbol 500 is in the state of temporary stop display next to the variable display, and thereafter, is finally finalized and displayed after the variable display. In the case of the pseudo ream 3, the decorative symbol 500 is in the state of temporary stop display next to the variable display, then it is in the state of temporary stop display again after the variable display, and then finally displayed after the variable display . In the case of the pseudo ream 4, the decorative symbol 500 is in the state of temporary stop display next to the variable display, then it is in the state of temporary stop display again after the variable display, and then it is in the state of temporary stop display again after the variable display. After that, it is finally displayed after the variable display.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 (during the first variable display in the case of pseudo ream), the three-sized ball display area 600 is an image of the three-sized ball (hereinafter simply referred to as holding information according to the starting memory underlying it). It is an area for displaying as "three-level ball", and is located at the lower left end of the display area 4A. In the three-sized ball display area 600, there may be a case where the three-sized ball display is erased along with the finalized display of the decorative symbol 500 (in the case of pseudo run, the first temporary stop display). If the decorative symbol 500 is finally confirmed and displayed, and at least one three-length ball is displayed in the first three-length ball hold display area 610, the first three-length ball hold display area 610 is displayed. One three-sized ball is displayed so as to move to the three-sized ball display area 600. In the three-sized ball display area 600, a three-sized ball can be displayed by any of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  The first three-scale ball suspension display area 610 is an area for individually arranging and displaying suspension information corresponding to the first to fourth starting memories as a three-scale ball image. Located to the right. In the first three-scale ball reserve display area 610, the first reserve information stored most recently is displayed as the leftmost three-scale ball, and the second to fourth reserve information is sequentially arranged to the right of the leftmost three-grade ball Displayed by a plurality of juxtaposed balls. In the first three-scale ball reserve display area 610, basically, the leftmost three-scale ball indicating the first reserve information is moved and displayed in the three-scale ball display area 600 each time it is erased. If there is a three-length ball indicating the ~ 4th hold information, it is moved and displayed so as to shift to the left next to each other. In the first three-scale ball suspension display area 610, it is possible to display a three-scale ball image by any of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  The second three-scale ball holding display area 620 is an area for collectively displaying holding information corresponding to the latest four holding balls as one three-sized ball when the number of holding balls becomes five or more, It is located to the right of the first three-dimensional ball holding display area 610 and the gem holding display area 710. In the second three-scale ball reserve display area 620, when the total number of pieces of reserve information is five, in the order of storage with the oldest one as the first, the reserve information for the second to fifth four pieces is one triple It is displayed collectively as a ball. At this time, the hold information having the first stored order is displayed as a three-length ball at the leftmost end of the first three-length ball hold display area 610. Similarly, in the second three-scale ball suspension display area 620, when the total number of suspension information is 6 to 8, the storage order is 3 to 6th, 4 to 7th, 5th to 8th, etc. The information is displayed together as one three-stroke ball. At this time, the first, second, third, and fourth to fourth retention information items are displayed as three-length balls arranged in order from the leftmost end of the first three-length ball retention display area 610. When the total number of holding information changes from 5 or more to 4 pieces, the three-length balls collectively displayed in the second three-length ball holding display area 620 are erased, and the first to third holding information is the first three-length ball holding It is displayed as four three-length balls arranged from the leftmost end to the rightmost end of the display area 610. In addition, since the upper limit number of reservations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 4 pieces each, when a 3 size ball is displayed in the 2nd 3 length ball retention display field 620, five or more pieces of retention information The hold information corresponding to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be included. In other words, only the holding information corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol does not display the three-length ball in the second three-length ball holding display area 620.

  The jewelry display area 700 is, for example, jewelry holding information that is the basis for displaying the decorative pattern 500 in a fluctuating display by a part of pseudo reams (such as "pseudo ream fluctuation 1 pseudo reams 2" of the effect pattern). It is an area for display by a gem, and is located above the three-dimensional ball display area 600. For example, in the gem display area 700 in some pseudo reams, the display of the gems is erased along with the stop display of the decorative symbol 500 by the pseudo reams. The display of the gem may be erased along with the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol. If at least one gem is displayed in the gem reserve display area 710 when the decorative pattern 500 is stopped or displayed temporarily, one of the gem reserve display area 710 to the gem display area 700 is displayed. The gems appear to move. In the jewelry display area 700, an image of the jewelry can be displayed in any of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  The gem reserve display area 710 is an area for displaying individually up to four pieces of gem reserve information by gem images, and is located to the right of the gem display area 700. In the gem reserve display area 710, the oldest stored first gem reserve information is displayed as the leftmost gem, and the 2nd to 4th gem reserve information is sequentially arranged on the right of the leftmost gem. Displayed by. In the gem reserve display area 710, basically, every time the leftmost gem indicating the first gem reserve information is erased, it is moved and displayed in the gem display area 700, and the remaining 2 to 4 gem reserves are displayed. If there is a gem that shows information, it is displayed moving so as to shift to the left next to each other. In the gem reserve display area 710, an image of the gem can be displayed in any of a plurality of display colors indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit.

  The character image 800 is used to give advance notice of advance reading according to the remaining number of people, etc., as a type of advance notice effect, and is displayed above the decoration pattern 500 or in the background or the like as a firecracker. The character image 800 is displayed so as to decrease or maintain the number originally displayed after basically digesting the predetermined game number, but it is displayed as apparently reduced due to the cassette pattern, but then returns It may be maintained internally by doing.

[Operation timing of gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 101, in the normal mode, there may or may not be cases where a pseudo run occurs. As shown in the figure as an example, in the first half where the gem retention information is stored, as the special symbol is variably displayed based on the lost variability pattern 2, the decoration as the effect based on the pseudo reciprocity fluctuation 2 is decorated The symbol 500 is variably displayed at the first variation (pseudo 1), and then temporarily stopped, and is further variably displayed at the second variation (pseudo 2), and finally displayed final. At this time, from the first change of the decorative symbol 500 to the temporary stop display, three-length ball hold information is used as a target hold, and the image of the three-length ball based on the three-length ball hold information is the first three-length ball hold display The area is moved from the area 610 to the three-dimensional ball display area 600 and displayed. Thereafter, from the second variation of the decorative pattern 500 to the finalized display, the gem hold information is used as a target hold, and the image of the gem based on the gem hold information is moved from the gem hold display area 710 to the gem display area 700 Is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown as an example in FIG. 101, in the second half, as the special symbol is variably displayed based on the lost variation pattern 2 as in the first half, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed as an effect based on the normal variation 2. The variable display is performed once, and then the final display is performed (not shown for the final display). At this time, from the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 to the final display, the three-length ball holding information is consistently used as the target holding, and the image of the three-length ball based on the three-length ball holding information is the first three-length ball It is moved from the hold display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600 and displayed. Also, even if, for example, the gem hold information is stored at this time, the gem hold image is displayed in the gem hold display area 710 as it is without using the gem hold information.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, a period of about 1 s) immediately before the decorative symbol 500 becomes a temporary stop display or a final display changes, for example, at a relatively low speed even while the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display. The display is temporarily enlarged. Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the gem holding information, the pseudo-link is generated in the variable display of the decorative pattern 500 only when the effect pattern including the pseudo-link is determined in the normal mode. However, the pseudo run may be generated on the condition that the pseudo run occurs in a mode other than the normal mode or the gem holding information is present.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102, in the normal mode, demonstration displays (1) and (2) may be performed. As shown in the figure as an example, in the first half where the three-length ball retention information is stored, the three-piece ball retention information is used along with the special symbol being variably displayed based on the lost variation pattern 2 As an effect based on the normal variation 2, the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed, and is then determined and displayed. At this time, from the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 to the final display, the three-length ball holding information is consistently used as the target holding, and the image of the three-length ball based on the three-length ball holding information is the first three-length ball It is moved from the hold display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600 and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 102, in the second half where there is no gem size ball holding information and gem holding information exists, the special symbol is not displayed as it is in a non-variable state, but by a limited demo at the time A demonstration display (2) using gem holding information is performed as an effect. In this demonstration display (2), whenever an image of a gem based on gem holding information is moved from the gem holding display area 710 to the gem display area 700 and displayed, for example, “latent?”, “Big hit? A message is displayed that gives the player an advantage, such as “high expectation?”, And the like. Such demonstration display (2) is repeatedly performed, for example, in a time of about 8 s per one piece of gem holding information when there is a plurality of pieces of gem holding information.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 102, when none of the three-length ball holding information and the gem holding information is lost, the non-variable state of the special symbol is continued, and the demonstration display (1) is displayed as an effect by the normal demonstration. To be done. Unlike the demonstration display (2), the demonstration display (1) displays an image for explaining a game or the like. Such a demonstration display (1) is different from the demonstration display (2) in the generation conditions and occurs not only in the normal mode but also in other modes, and decoration is performed in a state where there is no three-length ball holding information and gem holding information This occurs when the non-variation state of the symbol 500 has passed a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, the demonstration display (1) is not necessarily performed via the demonstration display (2) in the normal mode, and the gem holding information is displayed after the decorative symbol is determined based on the three-length ball holding information. If not, the demonstration display (1) will be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 103, in the special mode, special mode dedicated effects may be performed as the demonstration display (3). In this demonstration display (3), unlike the demonstration displays (1) and (2), although the gem hold information is used, the image of the gem is not displayed and, for example, the remaining number of special modes is A message is displayed to impress the player in an advantageous state, such as “X times” or “big chance?”.

  As shown in FIG. 103 as an example, in the first half where three-level ball retention information is stored, three-level ball retention information is used as the special symbol is variably displayed based on the lost variation pattern 7 As an effect based on the effect pattern (the first step, the fireworks master can not be found), the decorative symbol 500 is displayed in a variable manner and then displayed. At this time, from the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 to the final display, the three-length ball holding information is consistently used as the target holding, and the image of the three-length ball based on the three-length ball holding information is the first three-length ball It is moved from the hold display area 610 to the three-size ball display area 600 and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 103, when there is a state where gem holding information is lost due to the absence of the three-length ball holding information, the special symbol is not changed and it becomes a non-changing state, but non-time short non-probability variation only after small hit As a demonstration effect, a demonstration display (3) of a special mode dedicated effect using gem hold information is performed. In this demonstration display (3), while the image of the gem is not displayed, a message is displayed which impresses the remaining number of special modes or the advantageous state as described above. Such demonstration display (3) is displayed to indicate different messages in the gem holding information unit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103, when the three-length ball holding information (starting memory) is established during execution of the demonstration display (3), the special symbol is variably displayed, for example, based on the lost fluctuation pattern 7 Along with that, the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed as effect based on the effect pattern (second stage: pyrotechnician can not be found) using the three-length ball holding information, and then the final display is performed (not shown for the final display). Even at this time, from the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 to the final display, the three-length ball holding information is consistently used as the target holding from time to time, and the image of the three-length ball based on the three-length ball holding information is the first three It moves to the said three-measurements ball display area 600 from the measurement ball holding display area 610, and is displayed.

  In the special mode, when the three-scale ball holding information disappears, the demonstration display (3) may be performed regardless of the presence or absence of the gem holding information.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 104, in the ST mode, ST mode dedicated effects may be performed as a demonstration display (4). In this demonstration display (4), unlike the demonstration displays (1) to (3), the gem image is not displayed although the gem holding information is used, and an effect design pattern consisting of alphabets instead of the decoration pattern 500, for example, Numbers such as “A”, “B”, “C”. The demonstration display (4) may be an effect such as notifying or suggesting the opening timing of the blade member 34.

  As shown as an example from the upper row to the middle row in FIG. 104, when the three-length ball holding information (1) and (2) are stored, the special symbol is first variably displayed based on the reach loss variation pattern 7 At the time, as an effect based on the effect pattern (one shot button reach middle button) using the three-length ball holding information (1), an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation button 9A is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol 500 in the variable display. Be done. And if predetermined time passes regardless of depression of the pressing operation button 9A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed. At this time, from the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 to the final display, the three-length ball holding information (1) is consistently used as the target holding, and the image of the three-length ball based on the three-length ball holding information (1) Are moved from the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 to the three-dimensional ball display area 600 and displayed.

  Next, when the special symbol is variably displayed based on the reach loss fluctuation pattern 8, during the fluctuation display as an effect based on the effect pattern (triple button reach middle button) using the three-length ball holding information (2) An image prompting three-time continuous pressing of the pressing operation button 9A is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern 500 of FIG. And if predetermined time passes regardless of depression of the pressing operation button 9A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed. At this time, from the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 to the final display, the three-length ball holding information (2) is consistently used as the target holding, and the image of the three-length ball based on the three-length ball holding information (2) Are moved from the first three-scale ball holding display area 610 to the three-dimensional ball display area 600 and displayed. In addition, for example, in the case where three-level ball holding information (1), (2) is stored and when gem holding information is also stored, the three-length ball holding information (1), (2) is digested Gem hold information is digested regardless of whether it is or not.

  On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 104 as an example, when the three-length ball holding information disappears and only a plurality of gem holding information is present, the special symbol is not displayed in a variable state, and the gem holding information is used. A demonstration display (4) of the ST mode dedicated effect which has been performed is performed. In this demonstration display (4), while the image of the gem is not displayed, the above-mentioned variable display and stop display of the effect design are performed in place of the decorative design 500. Such demonstration display (4) is performed so as to periodically show a series of behaviors from the variable display to the stop display every time the gem holding information is digested. Also, if the gem hold information is lost, the demonstration display (4) is not performed, and if the gem hold information is stored again without the three-length ball hold information, the demonstration display (4) is displayed based on the gem hold information. It will be done.

  FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 mainly show the timing of promotion of holding in the normal mode. In addition, each of FIG. 105 (1)-(3) has shown the fluctuation period of the decorative pattern 500 based on a fluctuation pattern and an effect pattern which are mutually different, Although the time length generally differs, the fluctuation start timing of each other And the variation end timings are shown to coincide with each other. Also, each of FIGS. 106 (1) to 106 (4) shows the fluctuation period (first fluctuation period) of the decorative pattern 500 based on the same fluctuation pattern and rendering pattern, although the temporal length is the same. The numbers of times of pseudo reams are shown as different ones.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (1), in the effect pattern according to “normal fluctuation”, “pseudo chain” without reach, and “normal reach”, one hold is performed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 500 to the end of the fluctuation. There is a promotion timing. The promotion of holding means an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit by changing the display color of the three-sized ball according to the three-sized ball holding information. However, the pending promotion timing only indicates a point at which there is a possibility of the display color change, and the displayed color may or may not be changed at the pending promotion timing. The pending promotion timing is also simply referred to as "promotion timing".

  As shown in FIG. 105 (2), in the effect pattern according to "long reach", the period from the start of the change of the decorative symbol 500 to the end of the change is the first change period in the first half of the change and the second change in the second half of the change. It is divided into periods. In the first variation period, the variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed in the same manner as the effect pattern according to “normal variation”, “pseudo chain” without reach, and “normal reach”, and in the second variation period, The variation display of the decorative pattern 500 is performed in a specific manner according to "long reach". The first fluctuation period and the second fluctuation period are defined, for example, such that the time ratio is 6: 4. Each of the first change period and the second change period has one hold promotion timing. That is, when the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed based on "long reach", there are two holding promotion timings, and the probability of changing the display color and the expectation of the big hit are better than in the case of FIG. Is also enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (3), in the effect pattern relating to "SP reach", the period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 500 to the end of fluctuation is the first fluctuation period in which the first half of the fluctuation is It is divided into a fluctuation period and a third fluctuation period in the second half of the fluctuation. Note that "SP reach" corresponds to an effect pattern related to reach other than "normal reach" and "long reach". In the first variation period, the variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed in the same manner as the effect pattern according to “normal variation”, “pseudo chain” without reach, and “normal reach”, and in the second variation period, The variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed in the same manner as the effect pattern according to the "long reach", and the variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed in the specific mode according to the "SP reach" in the third variation period. The first fluctuation period, the second fluctuation period and the third fluctuation period are defined, for example, such that the time ratio is 3: 1: 6. Each of the first change period and the second change period has one hold promotion timing, and the third change period has two hold promotion timings. That is, when the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed based on "SP reach", there are four hold promotion timings, and the probability of changing the display color and the expectation of the big hit are better than in the case of FIG. 105 (2). Is also enhanced.

  Note that the promotion timing is not limited to the number of times shown as an example in FIG. 105, and can be appropriately changed according to the specification. Further, in the present embodiment, all the effect patterns correspond to any one of FIGS. 105 (1) to (3). For example, in the case of the effect pattern in which the variation time is designated as 10 s in the pattern shown in FIG. 105 (3), the first variation period, the second variation period, and the third variation period are exactly 3s, 1s, 6s. If a remainder occurs in the time of the fluctuation period (if not allocated at 3: 1: 6), the remainder may be allocated to the third fluctuation period or another fluctuation period. In addition, a fourth change period or the like may be further provided after the third change period, and the hold promotion timing may be defined in the fourth change period or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (1), in the effect pattern without “pseudo chain”, there is one hold promotion timing in the first variation period. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 106 (2) to (4), in the effect pattern in which “pseudo-run” with reach is defined as two times, three times, and four times, the first variation period is “pseudo-run”. It is divided into a plurality of sections divided by the number of times, and variable display and temporary stop display by “pseudo series” of the corresponding times are performed in each section. There is one hold promotion timing in each of the sections corresponding to such "pseudo-run" each time. That is, when the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed based on "pseudo series" with reach, there is a hold promotion timing corresponding to at least the number of pseudo series, and the display color is changed according to the number of pseudo series. The potential of the jackpot is enhanced with the possibility.

  Note that some “pseudo-runs” with reach have a plurality of promotion timings defined in a predetermined section in the first fluctuation period, and there may be cases where the hold promotion timing is more than the number of pseudo runs. In addition, there are cases where a plurality of promotion timings are defined also in the pseudo-series effect using the gem reservation information as shown in FIG. Also, for example, in the patterns shown in FIGS. 106 (2) to 106 (4), although the first variation period is divided equally into a plurality of sections according to the number of “pseudo series”, a remainder occurs in the time of each section In this case, the remaining time may be allocated to the last section or other sections.

  FIG. 107 shows a variation pattern of the decorative symbol 500 in the special mode and in the ST mode. As shown in the figure, in the effect pattern with "reach" in the special mode and in the ST mode, the first fluctuation period and the second half of the fluctuation, in which the period from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation end of the decorative symbol 500 is the first half of the fluctuation And the second variation period. During the first variation period, variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed in the same manner as the effect pattern relating to “normal variation”, and in the second variation period, the variation pattern of the decoration symbol 500 is unique in the particular aspect relating to “reach”. Variable display is performed. The first fluctuation period and the second fluctuation period are defined to have a time ratio different from the time ratio in the normal mode. The holding promotion timing may be defined or the pseudo link may be performed also in the first variation period and the second variation period in the special mode and the ST mode.

  Next, various tables and storage areas used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Table for special symbol variation pattern determination]
108 to 111 show the special symbol variation pattern determination table referred to by the main CPU 61. 108 and 109 show a first special symbol variation pattern determination table, and FIGS. 110 and 111 show a second special symbol variation pattern determination table. The first special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponds to the case where the number of reservations (number of start memories) is 1 to 4 in the non-probability variation non-time short game state, and the number for suspension is 5 in the non-probability variation non-time short game state The thing corresponding to the case of 8 pieces, the thing corresponding to the case where the number of reservations is 1 to 8 in the non probability variation non-short play game state after small hit, and the number of reservations 1 to 8 in the definite variation time short game state It is divided into those corresponding to the case. The second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponds to the case where the number of reservations (the number of start memories) is 1 to 5 in the non-probability variation non-time short game state and the number for suspension is 6 in the non-probability variation non-time short game state The thing corresponding to the case of 8 pieces, the thing corresponding to the case where the number of reservations is 1 to 8 in the non probability change non-short play game state after small hit, the number of times of the variable display of special symbol up to 1 The thing corresponding to the case where the number of reservations is 1 to 8 in the definite variation time short game state, the one corresponding to the case where the number of reservations is 1 to 8 in the definite variation time short game state to 101 to 174 times, 175 to 183 times The thing corresponding to the case where the number of reservations is 1 to 8 in the definite variation time short game state up to and the one corresponding to the case where the number of reservations is 1 to 8 in the 184th definite variation time short game state In the game time of 1 to 8 for the number of reservations in the short game state of It is divided. These special symbol variation pattern determination tables are stored in the main ROM 62.

  As shown in FIG. 108 and FIG. 109, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the determination result of hit type (loss, small hit, big hit ( A definite variation 1)), a variation time determination random number (0 to 99), various variation patterns, a variation time, and a variation pattern specification command (h1 to h34) are defined. As shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the determination result of hit type (lost, big hit 4), fluctuation time determination random numbers (0 to 99), various fluctuation patterns, fluctuation time, and fluctuation pattern specification commands (h1 to h58).

  For example, in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (non-probable variation non-temporal short retention numbers 1 to 4) shown in FIG. 108, the determination result of the hit type is “loss” and the variation time determination random numbers “90” to “94 When one of the two is extracted, “reach loss fluctuation pattern 5” whose fluctuation time is 20.5 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and fluctuation pattern designation command “h11” indicating that is It is generated. Also, in the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (small hit after non-probable non-constant non-temporal non-temporary short holding numbers 1 to 8) shown in FIG. 109, the determination result of the hit type is “loss” and the random number “0” for variation time determination When one of "99" is extracted, "loss variation pattern 7" having a variation time of 15 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern designation command "h29" indicating that Is generated. In the first special symbol variation pattern determination table (probable variation time short retention numbers 1 to 8) shown in FIG. 109, when the determination result of the hit type is “big hit (probability variation 1)”, the variation time determination random numbers “0” to “99 If any of the above is extracted, "big hit fluctuation pattern 12" whose fluctuation time is 20 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern designation command "h34" indicating that is generated. Ru. The variation pattern designation commands “h1” to “h34” generated in this manner are transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

  Further, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (non-probable variation non-temporal number of reservations 1 to 5) shown in FIG. When one of the two is extracted, “reach loss fluctuation pattern 5” whose fluctuation time is 20.5 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and fluctuation pattern designation command “h11” indicating that is It is generated. Also, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (ST101 to 174 times variation variation short retention number 1 to 8) shown in FIG. When any of "25" to "49" is extracted, "big hit fluctuation pattern 19" whose fluctuation time is 180 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern designation command indicating that "H51" is generated. Furthermore, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 111 (the number of specific variations, certain variation time short retention numbers 1 to 8), the determination result of the hit type is “loss” and the variation time determination random numbers “0” When any of the 89 "is extracted," reach loser fluctuation pattern 14 "whose fluctuation time is 180 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and fluctuation pattern specification command" h57 "indicating that is generated Be done. The fluctuation pattern designation commands “h1” to “h58” generated in this manner are transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

  In addition, as a table for special symbol variation pattern determination, it is good also as one table which is not distributed by the number of reservations (number of starting memory storage). In addition, when the table for determining the first special symbol variation pattern and the table for determining the second special symbol variation pattern are assembled into one, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined In this case, one special symbol variation pattern determination table may be referred to. In addition, a plurality of special symbol variation pattern determination tables corresponding to each of the holding numbers 1 to 8 may be provided for some gaming states or all gaming states, and the table to be referred to may be different for each holding number . The fluctuation patterns determined according to the determination result of the hit type are not limited to the types and numbers shown as an example in FIGS. 108 to 111, and can be appropriately changed according to the specification. The fluctuation time can also be appropriately changed according to the specification. In ST mode (3), depending on the number of games, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (ST175 to 183 times probability variation time short hold number 1 to 8) is used, and for the second special symbol variation pattern determination Although there is a case where a table (ST 184 times a probability change time short holding number 1 to 8) is used, one table may be used without being distributed according to the number of games. The second special symbol variation pattern determination table (specific variation number probability variation time short hold number 1 to 8) is determined according to the type of hit symbol that decided the big hit gaming state before shifting to the probability variation time short gaming state It is a table which may be used when a 2nd special symbol carries out change display in the number of times of change. The number of specific changes is determined to be "170" when the type of hit symbol is "first special symbol big hit (positive variation 1)", and "130" for "second special symbol big hit (positive variation 1)" Is determined to be "140" in the case of "second special symbol big hit (positive variation 2)" and "150" in the case of "second special symbol big hit (positive variation 3)", "second special symbol big hit In the case of (probability 4), "160 is determined. The first special symbol variation pattern determination table (small hit after non probability variation non-short time number 1 to 8) and the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (small hit non probability variation non time period number 1 to 8) are small It is a table used until the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes 1 to 5 times in the non-probable variation non-time-short game state after hitting.

[Table for determining the presentation pattern]
FIGS. 112 to 123 show effect pattern determination tables referred to by the sub CPU 71. 112 to 116 show a first effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIGS. 117 to 123 show a second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The first effect pattern determination table corresponds to the normal mode (1) to (3) in the absence of gem reserve information (is not stored), and the gem reserve information on the normal mode (1) to (3) In the special modes (1) to (3), the variation display count corresponds to the first to fifth rotations, and in the special mode (1) to the ST mode (1) to (stored). It is divided into those corresponding to each of (3). The second effect pattern determination table corresponds to the normal mode (1) to (3) in the absence of gem reserve information (is not stored), and the gem reserve information on the normal mode (1) to (3) In the special modes (1) to (3), the variation display count corresponds to each of the first to fifth rotations, and in the ST mode (1), Those corresponding to (2), (3) -1, and (3) -2, and those corresponding to when the high expectation degree effect is not executed in the specific variation count of the probability variation short gaming state, and the identification of the probability variation short gaming state The number of times of change is divided into those corresponding to the time when the high expectation degree effect has been performed. Here, the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (3) -1) corresponds to the case where the number of times of display of variation of the special symbol in the probability variation short game state (ST mode) is 175 to 183 times. The second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (3) -2) corresponds to the case where the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the probability variation short game state (ST mode) is the 184th. These effect pattern determination tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 116, the first effect pattern determination table performs the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol 500, the other image display, etc. in conjunction with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol. Is a table for determining a presentation pattern of the game, and defines fluctuation pattern specification commands (h1 to h34), various fluctuation patterns, random numbers for presentation determination (0 to 99), and various presentation patterns. . As shown in FIGS. 117 and 123, the second effect pattern determination table performs the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol 500, the other image display, etc. in conjunction with the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol. Table for determining the effect pattern of the variation pattern designation command (h1 to h12, h19 to h29, h31 to h58), various variation patterns, effect determination random numbers (0 to 99), various types It defines the effect pattern.

  For example, in the first effect pattern determination table (normal modes (1) to (3): no gem retention shown) shown in FIG. 112, when “reach loss change pattern 5” is specified by the change pattern specification command “h11”, When one of the effect determination random numbers “0” to “89” is extracted, “long reach” is determined as the effect pattern, and one of the effect determination random numbers “90” to “99” is extracted. In the case, “Long Reach Pseudo-Ren 2” is determined as the effect pattern.

  Further, in the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (2)) shown in FIG. 122, when “reach loser change pattern 10” is specified by the change pattern specification command “h47”, the effect determination random number “0” If any of “19” is extracted, “pyrophorist door breakthrough reach door red” is determined as the effect pattern, and any of the effect determination random numbers “20” to “99” is extracted. "Large fireworks door reach reach blue" is decided as the effect pattern. In addition to this "Fireworkmaster door breakthrough reach door red", the directing pattern of "Woman door breakthrough reach door red" is a so-called intense heat directing pattern (also called "specific directing pattern") in which the expectation of the jackpot is relatively high. Equivalent). In addition to the second presentation pattern determination table (ST mode (2)), the presentation patterns for intense heat such as "Fireworks teacher door breakthrough reach door red" and "Female door breakthrough reach door red" are specified in Figure 123. It is also specified in the second effect pattern determination table shown (when the number of specific changes is in a certain variation time high expectation degree non-execution condition).

  In the effect pattern including "reach", except for "all rotation reach big hit", it is basically a reach mode in which only one is variably displayed with two of the three decorative patterns 500 aligned, and this reach mode After passing through, three decorative symbols 500 are displayed as a lost symbol, a small hit symbol, or a big hit symbol. The “pseudo-run 2”, “pseudo-run 3”, and “pseudo-run 4” are pseudo-run effects including temporary stop display of the decorative pattern 500. For example, in the case of "pseudo ream 2", while the special symbol changes and starts being displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed twice and the temporary stop display is performed once. Finally, the finalized display is performed. In the case of "pseudo series 3", the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed three times, and the temporary stop display is performed twice, and finally the finalized display is performed. In the case of "pseudo reunion 4", the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is performed four times, and the temporary stop display is performed three times, and finally the finalized display is performed. In the effect pattern including the “large continuous notice pseudo-link”, the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol 500 are performed in conjunction with the variable display and the fixed display of the special symbol. A predetermined image such as "lightning bolt" or "flame" is displayed multiple times. For example, in the effect pattern of "three consecutive large notices", one of "ice", "lightening bolt" and "flame" is displayed three times. The degree of expectation of the big hit can be made to differ according to the appearance pattern of such a predetermined image. For example, when the same predetermined image appears all the time, it can be suggested that the big hit is determined. In the special mode, it is possible to execute story-like effects from the first to the fifth rotation of the variable display based on the effect pattern defined in advance in association with each of the special modes (1) to (3). . In addition, with "total rotation reach", it is a speed at which the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol during fluctuation, and the three symbols fluctuate in a state where they are aligned with the same symbol, and the state where three identical symbols are aligned as they are It means what is fixedly displayed. Also, the small hit symbol means that it is displayed temporarily in the reach-loss mode, and then revaried to be fixedly displayed with, for example, the symbol "135".

  Looking at the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (1)), for example, with the “one shot button reach large button”, the probability of a big hit is 10/100 with a probability of losing due to “reach losing fluctuation pattern 7” Since the probability of becoming a big hit is 50/100 based on the “big hit fluctuation pattern 15”, the expectation of the big hit is about 83% when calculated as the relative ratio of these. Similarly, looking at the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (2)), for example, in "Fireworkmaster door breakthrough reach door red", the probability of losing on the basis of "reach lost fluctuation pattern 10" becomes 20/100. Since the probability of becoming a big hit is 80/100 based on the “big hit fluctuation pattern 19”, the relative probability of the big hit is calculated to be 80%. Thus, although there is a possibility of a loss, the effect pattern in which the degree of expectation for the big hit is about 60% or more corresponds to the effect pattern (specific effect pattern) of intense heat described above, and is also referred to as "high expectation degree effect" Ru. For example, in "Fireworks master door reach reach door blue", the probability of losing due to "reach lost fluctuation pattern 10" becomes 80/100 and the probability of becoming big hit based on "big hit fluctuation pattern 19" becomes 20/100 Therefore, it is 20% when the degree of expectation of big hit is calculated as a relative ratio of these. For this reason, "Let's reach reach door blue" does not correspond to "high expectation degree effect" (specific effect pattern). If such high expectation degree effects are not executed at all before the specific fluctuation number, the second effect pattern determination table (specific fluctuation time probability variation short high expectation degree non-execution) is used in the specific fluctuation number . On the other hand, if the high expectation degree effect is performed at least once before reaching the specific change number, the second effect pattern determination table (specific change number probability variation time high expectation degree effect execution completed) is performed in the specific change number. Used. Thereby, the high expectation degree effect is always executed by the specific fluctuation number in the ST mode. The degree of expectation of the big hit is calculated by dividing the number of effect determination random numbers at the time of big hit by the total number of effect determination random numbers at the time of big hit and loss.

  The number of effect patterns defined for one fluctuation pattern is not limited to the number shown as an example in FIGS. 112 to 123, and can be appropriately changed according to the specification. In addition, when the table for determining the first effect pattern and the table for determining the second effect pattern are integrated into one and the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern are determined, the table for determining one effect pattern is used. May be referred to.

[Held information storage area]
FIG. 124 is a view for explaining the hold information storage area related to the three-length ball hold information of the work RAM 73, and FIG. 125 is a view for explaining the gem hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. The hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 corresponds to the special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 in which start storage is stored in the main control circuit 60, while the gem hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 is a sub control circuit 70. Provided independently in

  As shown in FIG. 124, the pending information storage area of the work RAM 73 is composed of 8 bits, and the upper 3 bits (5th to 7th bits) and the lower 4 bits (0th to 3rd bits) show different attributes. It is used as a thing. In the present embodiment, the fourth bit is unused, but all bits can be used according to the specification. In the lower 4 bits, the type of special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the "lost", the "small hit", the "big hit" types (parameter 1) 4) is stored. In the upper three bits, color information (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) indicating the display color of the three-length ball is stored as a parameter included in the three-length ball holding information. The display color of the three-length ball suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit, and when arranged in the order from the one with the lowest degree of expectation to the highest, white, blue, yellow, green, red and rainbow are in order. The three-measure ball holding information is stored in the holding information storage areas 1 to 8 in the order from the oldest to the latest. In the hold information storage areas 1 to 8 shown as an example in FIG. 124, the hold information storage area 1 stores hold information in which the display color is white and the first special symbol is lost, and the display color is displayed in the hold information storage area 2 Hold information in which the first special symbol is lost in blue is stored, and hold information in which the display color is yellow and the second special symbol is a big hit (probability 2) is stored in the hold information storage area 3, and other hold The information storage areas 4 to 8 are unstored.

  When the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed using the hold information of the hold information storage area 1, the hold information of the hold information storage area 1 is transferred to the hold information storage area (not shown) and the hold information The hold information of the storage areas 2-8 is shifted to the hold information storage areas 1-7. The new hold information is stored in an unstored state among the hold information storage areas 1 to 8 in order from the area with the smallest storage address. As a result, the hold information of the hold information storage area is used as a resource for displaying a three-measure ball in the three-measure ball display area 600. In addition, when the hold information is stored in the hold information storage areas 1 to 4, these hold information is for displaying the first to third three-length balls in the first three-length ball hold display area 610. Used as a resource. When hold information is stored in the hold information storage areas 5 to 8 in addition to the hold information storage areas 1 to 4, that is, when five or more pieces of hold information are stored, four from the latest one are counted Is used as a resource for displaying a three-length ball in the second three-length ball retention display area 620, and the other suspension information displays a three-length ball in the first three-length ball retention display area 610. It is used as a resource to In short, the hold display mode of the three-length ball by the first three-measure ball hold display area 610 and the second three-measure ball hold display area 620 is switched between the case where the number of hold information is four or less and However, the storage address of the pending information serving as the resource is not rewritten according to the switching of the pending display mode, and the pending information is efficiently read and written by the so-called FIFO method.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the gem reserve information storage area of the work RAM 73 is constituted by 8 bits, and stores the gem reserve information as one block in 2-bit units. As a result, a maximum of four pieces of gem hold information are stored in the gem hold information storage area. In each block of the gem reserve information storage area, color information (light blue, purple, gold) indicating the display color of the gem is stored as the gem reserve information. The display color of the gem indicates the expectation of the big hit, and when arranged in the order from the one with the low degree of expectation to the high degree, the order is light blue, purple and gold. Gem reserve information is stored in blocks 1 to 4 of the gem reserve information storage area in the order from the oldest to the newest. In blocks 1 to 4 of the reserve information storage area shown as an example in FIG. 125, gem reserve information whose light display color is light blue is stored in block 1, and gem reserve information whose gold display color is gold is stored in block The block 3 stores gem holding information in which the display color is purple, and the block 4 is unstored.

  When the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed by pseudo link using the gem reserve information of such gem reserve information storage area, the gem reserve information of block 1 is transferred to the gem reserve information storage area (not shown). , 2 to 4 gem hold information is shifted to blocks 1 to 3. The new gem hold information is stored in order from the block with the smallest storage address which is in the unstored state among the blocks 1 to 4. Thereby, the gem reserve information of the gem reserve information storage area is used as a resource for displaying the gem in the gem display area 700. Also, the gem holding information of blocks 1 to 4 is used as a resource for displaying the 1st to 4th gems in the gem holding display area 710. In addition, it is made to shift similarly also in the demonstration display using gem reservation information.

[Table for determination of gem hold display pattern]
FIG. 126 shows the gem hold display pattern determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for determining gem holding display patterns is divided into one corresponding to the case where the number of held gems is 1 to 3 and one corresponding to the case where the number of held gems is four. These gem hold display pattern determination tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the gem hold display pattern determination table is a table for determining the display color of the gem as the gem hold display pattern, and the pattern and the judgment result of the hit included in the three-length ball hold information, It specifies the display color (light blue, purple, gold) of the gem and random numbers (65536 pieces) for determining the effect relating to these display colors. Note that the determination result is obtained from the three-length ball holding information of the holding information storage area 1 in which the storage order is the first. In addition, when there is no three-scale ball holding information in the holding information storage area 1 (not stored), the determination result is regarded as the first and second special symbol loss.

  For example, when the number of pieces of gem holding information in the gem holding information storage area is 1 to 3 in the gem holding display pattern determination table (the number of holding gems 1 to 3) shown in FIG. If the determination result included in the three-length ball retention information of the retention information storage area 1 is "first / second special symbol loss", the gem retention is based on the gem retention information according to the entering of the lost port 242. The display color of the gemstone newly displayed in the display area 710 is determined to be light blue with a probability of 61440/65536, determined to be purple with a probability of 4096/65536, and determined to be gold with a probability of 0/65536. Further, in the table for determination of gem reserve display pattern (number of gem reserves 4), when the number of pieces of gem reserve information in the gem reserve information storage area is four due to entering the loose port 242, If the determination result included in the three-length ball holding information is “second special symbol big hit (certain changes 2 to 4)”, it is newly added to the gem holding display area 710 based on the gem holding information according to entering the lost port 242. The display color of the gemstone displayed on is determined to be light blue with a probability of 49152/65536, determined to be purple with a probability of 14336/65536, and determined to be gold with a probability of 2048/65536. As a result, a pre-reading advance notice effect using the display color of the gem is performed, and the player can increase the degree of expectation for the big hit according to the display color of the gem.

  Note that the table for determining the gem holding display pattern may be one table not distributed according to the number of holding gems. The range of the effect determination random numbers relating to the display color may be defined for each symbol and the type of hit to be the determination result. The gem retention display pattern is not limited to that illustrated, but can be appropriately set according to the specification. For example, five or more pieces of gem holding information may be stored, and in this case, it is possible to select a gem holding display pattern determination table according to the number of five or more pieces of gem holding. Also, in the present embodiment, the gem hold display pattern is determined based only on the determination result of the hold information storage area 1, but it is possible to draw a lottery information from among the hold information storage areas where the hold information is stored. It is also possible to determine the gem hold display pattern based on the determination result indicated in the determined hold information storage area. Further, the gem hold display pattern may be determined based on the determination result indicated in the hold information storage area in which the numbers at the end of the gem hold information storage area are the same.

[Table for temporary information display pattern temporary decision]
FIG. 127 shows the pending information display pattern temporary decision table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The pending information display pattern temporary determination table is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the table for temporary information display pattern temporary determination is a table for provisionally determining the display color of a three-sized ball as a pending information display pattern according to a three-sized ball, and is included in three-sized ball reserved information. Defines the symbol and the judgment result of the hit, the display color (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) of the three-length ball, and the random number (65536) for effect determination for these display colors .

  For example, in the suspension information display pattern temporary determination table shown in FIG. 127, when a winning (pass) of the game ball in the first starting opening 211 or the second starting opening 241 is detected, a three-length ball generated accordingly A judgment result is acquired from the hold information, and if the judgment result is "the first and second special symbol missing", it is displayed in the first three-measure ball hold display area 610 corresponding to the three-measure ball hold information The display color of the three-length ball is tentatively determined to be white with a probability of 61440/65536, tentatively determined to be blue with a probability of 2048/65536, tentatively determined to be a yellow with a probability of 1664/65536, and probable with a probability of 256/65536 It is tentatively determined to be green, tentatively determined to be red with a probability of 128/65536, and tentatively determined to be a rainbow with a probability of 0/65536. In addition, in the table for temporary information display pattern temporary determination, if the determination result included in the three measure ball reserve information is “second special symbol big hit (certain variations 2 to 4)”, corresponding to the three measure ball reserve information The display color of the three-dimensional ball displayed in the first three-dimensional ball holding display area 610 is temporarily determined to be white with a probability of 4096/65536, is temporarily determined to be blue with a probability of 14336/65536, and has a probability of 14336/65536. Is tentatively determined to be yellow in the case, is tentatively determined to be green in the probability of 14336/65536, is tentatively determined to be red in the probability of 14336/65536, and is tentatively determined to be the rainbow in the probability of 4096/65536. As a result, a pre-reading advance notice effect using the display color of the three-length ball is performed, and the player can increase the expectation for the big hit according to the display color of such three-length ball.

  In the present embodiment, the table for provisionally determining the pending information display pattern is used for the advance notice of the number of pending information changes to be described later, and the pending information display pattern determined using this table is immediately reflected as the display color of the three measure ball. It is not a thing. That is, when the hold information display pattern is tentatively determined using the hold information display pattern temporary determination table, the corresponding three-measure ball is the second three-measure ball hold display area from the first three-measure ball hold display area 610. When it is not displayed as a display color according to the pending information display pattern before transitioning to 620, but after transitioning to the second three-scale ball suspension display area 620, it is again shifted to the first three-scale ball suspension display area 610 Is displayed as a display color according to the hold information display pattern. In the present embodiment, when the corresponding three-length ball is displayed in the first three-length ball hold display area 610 in the normal mode other than the ST mode, or the corresponding three-length ball is the second regardless of the effect mode. When displayed in the three-scale ball reserve display area 620, the reserve information display pattern is not immediately reflected as the display color, but as long as the three-scale ball to be subjected to the advance notice is displayed regardless of the effect mode or display area. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the display color according to the hold information display pattern immediately. Further, the hold information display pattern relating to the three-length ball may be determined by the main CPU of the main control circuit.

[Table for previewing notice execution judgment]
FIG. 128 shows a pre-reading advance notice execution determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The prefetching advance notice execution determination table corresponds to the case where there are two pieces of pending information related to a three-length ball, the case corresponding to three to four cases, and the case corresponding to five to eight pieces. It is divided into what to do. The pre-read advance notice execution determination table is stored in the program ROM 72, and is used in the normal mode in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the pre-read advance notice execution determination table is a table for determining whether or not to perform various pre-read advance notice effects in the normal mode, and determination of symbols and hits included in the three-length ball hold information A result, a random number lottery result (non-winning / winning) for deciding whether or not to execute prefetch advance notice effect, and a random number for effect determination (65536) relating to non-winning / winning are defined. The determination result is obtained from the latest three-scale ball holding information stored most recently.

  For example, in the pre-read advance notice execution determination table (two pending information numbers) shown in FIG. 128, the determination result is obtained from the three-length ball reserve information, and the determination result is “first special symbol big hit (certain variation 1)” The pre-read advance notice effect is determined as non-winning (execution non-permission) with a probability of 45876/65536, and is determined as winning (performing execution) with a probability of 19660/65536. Moreover, in the table for prefetch advance notice execution determination (three to four pieces of pending information), the determination result is obtained from the three-length ball retention information, and the determination result is "first special symbol big hit (probable variation 1)", The prefetch advance notice effect is determined as non-winning (execution non-permission) with a probability of 42599/65536, and is determined as winning (execution permission) with a probability of 22937/65536. Furthermore, in the pre-read advance notice execution determination table (5 to 8 pending information numbers), the determination result is obtained from the three-length ball retention information, and the determination result is "first special symbol big hit (probable variation 1)", The prefetch advance notice effect is determined as non-winning (execution non-permission) with a probability of 39322/65536, and is determined as winning (permission of execution) with a probability of 26214/65536. As a result, as the hold information pertaining to the three-length ball increases, “Fireworks read pre-notice notice (for prize hold information target)”, “Firework master pre-read notice (for existing hold information target)” shown in FIG. The possibility of being executed for any of the feature pre-notification notice and the pending information number pre-notification notice is increased, and the player can increase the expectation for the big hit as well as the expectation for pre-notice pre-notice effect.

  Note that the pre-read advance notice execution determination table may be provided by the number of pieces of three-measure ball holding information. In the present embodiment, when there are two or more pieces of three-measure ball holding information in the normal mode, there is a possibility of being executed for pre-reading advance notice effect, for example, one piece of three-measure ball holding information Even if there is the above possibility, there may be four or more. Further, for example, when the number of pieces of the three-measure ball holding information is six, the prefetch advance notice effect may not be executed when the specific number is reached, such as the advance notice advance effect is not executed. The pre-read advance notice execution determination table may also be referred to in the special mode or the ST mode. Further, in the case of a lost symbol or a specific hit symbol (for example, a small hit symbol), the advance notice effect may not be performed.

[Table for determining prior notice type]
FIG. 129 shows a pre-reading notice type determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for pre-reading notice type determination corresponds to the case where there are two pending pieces of information related to a three-length ball, the one corresponding to three to four cases, and the one corresponding to five to eight. It is divided into what to do. The prefetch notice type determination table is stored in the program ROM 72, and is used in the normal mode in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the pre-reading notice type determination table is a table for determining the pre-reading notice effect type in the normal mode, and the judgment result of the symbol and the hit included in the three-length ball holding information and the pre-reading notice. With the type of effect (“Firework master advance notice (for prize hold information target)”, “Fireworks master advance notice (for existing hold information target)”, “hold information display feature preview notice”, “hold information number change advance read notice”) and The effect determining random numbers (65536) are defined for each of these types. Here, “presence for“ presence of reading a fireworks display (for winning a prize holding information) ”means an effect of changing the display color of the holding information according to the number of final display people of the pyrotechnician described later according to the holding information at the time of winning. The "presence of reading a pyrotechnician (target of existing holding information)" means an effect of changing the display color of the holding information according to the number of final display persons of the pyrotechnician described later using the existing holding information already stored. “Pending notice display feature pre-notice notice” is an effect using the movable effect member 42A as a prize, and displayed as a target of pre-reading notice in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 or the first three-span ball holding display area 610 This means that the movable effect member 42A appears so as to overlap with the three-length ball, and the light-emission color of the movable effect member 42A is changed along with the display color of the three-length ball. In the "number of pending information number change prefetch notice", after the three-length ball temporarily shifts from the first three-length ball holding display area 610 to the second three-length ball holding display area 620, the first three-length ball holding display area 610 is again displayed. Means an effect that appears in a predetermined display color when displayed. The specific contents of these pre-read advance notice effects will be described later.

  For example, in the prefetch notice type determination table (two pending information numbers) shown in FIG. 129, the determination result is obtained from the three-length ball retention information, and the determination result is “first special symbol big hit (certain variation 1)”. If it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, as the type of the pre-reading advance effect, “Fireworks master pre-notice notice (for prize hold information object)” is determined with probability of 32768/65536, probability of 0/65536 "The fireworks display advance notice (for existing hold information target)" is determined, the "hold information display feature pre-read notice" is determined with the probability of 40000/65536, and "the hold information number change advance notice with the probability of 0/65536" Is determined. Further, in the pre-reading notice type determination table (3 to 4 pending information numbers), the determination result is obtained from the three-length ball retention information, and the determination result is “first special symbol big hit (probable variation 1)” and read ahead If it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed, the "presence notice for fireworks display read advance (for prize hold information target)" is determined with the probability of 25536/65536 as the type of the advance notice effect for presentation, and the probability of 20000/65536 Firework teacher pre-reading notice (for existing holding information target) is decided, “holding information display role thing pre-reading notice” is decided with probability 20000/65536, “holding information number change pre-reading notice” is decided with probability 0/65536 Be done. Furthermore, in the pre-reading notice type determination table (5 to 8 pending information numbers), the determination result is obtained from the three-length ball retention information, and the determination result is “first special symbol big hit (probable variation 1)” and read ahead If it is decided that the advance notice effect is to be executed, the type of pre-read advance notice effect is "20.060.5.65", and "Fireworks master advance notice (for winning prize information target)" is determined, and "20480 / 65.536 probability". Firework teacher pre-reading notice (for existing holding information target) is decided, “holding information display role thing pre-reading notice” is decided with probability 0/65536, “holding information number change pre-reading notice” is decided with probability 24576/65536 Be done. As a result, the player can increase the degree of expectation for the big hit also by the type of the advance notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, there is a type of pre-reading preview effect not selected depending on the number of pending information (the number of three-level ball holding information), but all types of pre-working preview effects are available regardless of the number of pending information It may be determined. Further, only a specific type of pre-reading advance notice effect may be determined according to the number of pending information. Furthermore, in the table for determining the advance notice type according to the present embodiment, the selection rates for each of the advance notice effect are set to be different according to the determination result.

[Table for deciding on pending notification target hold information]
FIG. 130 shows a pre-read notice object pending information decision table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for determining pre-notice notice object pending information is a table used when the pre-reading advance notice (presence of existing on-hold information) is selected as the pre-notice notice effect, and only the pending information of lost is stored as three-length ball on-off information , And those corresponding to the case where the hit hold information is stored. The pre-read advance notification target hold information determination table is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the pre-read advance notice target hold information determination table is a table for determining three-length ball hold information to be a target of the fireman's look-ahead notice (the existing hold information target) in the normal mode. The number of pending pieces (1 to 7) pertaining to other existing three-spac ball pending information at the time point when the shaku ball pending information is stored, and the order (1 to 7) of three-spacs ball pending information determined as a target of advance notice. And a random number for effect determination (65,536) for each of these orders. The order of the three-measure ball holding information is assigned to be 1, 2, 3, ... in order from the oldest to the newest.

  For example, in the table for prefetching advance notice target suspension information determination (storage of only loss retention), when the existing number of suspension is 3 pieces, the three-measure ball suspension information of the rank "1" is a target of prefetch notification at a probability of 21845/65536. It is determined, and the 3-length ball retention information of the rank "2" is determined as the target of the preview notice with the probability of 21845/65536, and the 3-length ball retention information of the rank "3" is the target of the prefetch notice with the probability of 21846/65536 It is determined. Also, in the table for pre-notice advance notice target hold information determination (storage of each hold), the target of the pre-read advance notice is determined based on the hold information indicating the hit as a determination result, for example, the hold number is 1 when the number is 1 If the order of the information is the third, the order of the prefetch notice is determined with reference to the line corresponding to the number of pending calls "1". Also, in the case where the number of pending reservations is two and the order of the pending information is the third and fourth, the order of the prefetch notice is determined with reference to the line corresponding to the number of pending reservations “2”. In such a table for pre-notice advance notice target hold information determination (stores a hit hold), the target hold decision is made by applying the random number range shown in the row from the row of the low number of “target hold” according to the hit hold number. Be done. For example, if there are 3rd, 4th and 6th pending information indicating the jackpot win and the pending number is 3 then the random number range of "target pending 1" is allocated third, and "target pending 2" The random number range is assigned fourth, and the random number range of “target hold 3” is assigned sixth, so that in which order the hold information is to be held is drawn. As a result, when the fireman's look-ahead notice (the existing hold information target) is determined, there is a possibility that the existing three-measure ball hold information is used as a target of the look-ahead notice.

[Table for determining the final display color pattern for holding information display features]
FIG. 131 shows a table for determining a final display color pattern of a held information display combination that is referred to by the sub CPU 71. The hold information display combination product final display color pattern determination table is a table used when the hold information display combination product pre-reading notice is selected as the pre-reading notice effect, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 131, when making the movable presentation member 42A appear to overlap with the three-dimensional ball display area 600, the table for determining the holding information display combination final display color pattern is a light emitting lens 42B of the movable presentation member 42A. Is a table for determining the light emission color (also referred to as “display color”), and the determination result of the symbol and the hit included in the three-length ball holding information targeted for advance notice, and the final display color pattern of the light emission lens 42B (White, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) and random numbers for effect determination (65536) are defined for each of the final display color patterns. In addition, when the movable effect member 42A appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the back three balls, but the three balls at this time are also displayed as the display color of the same color as the light emitting lens 42B. At this time, since the light emitting lens 42B can see the back, by not emitting the light emitting lens 42B, the display color of the three-length ball displayed behind can be visually recognized through the light emitting lens 42B. It is also good.

  For example, in the hold information display combination product final display color pattern determination table, when the determination result is the first special symbol loss, the final display color pattern of the light emitting lens 42B overlapping the three-dimensional ball display area 600 is 26624/65536. The probability is determined to be "white", the probability of 16384/65536 is determined to be "blue", the probability of 16384/65536 is determined to be "yellow", the probability of 4096/65536 is determined to be "green", 2048 / It is determined to be "red" with a probability of 65536, and "rainbow" with a probability of 0/65536. Thereby, when the hold information display role thing reading notice is determined, the movable effect member 42A appears so as to overlap with the three-dimensional ball display area 600, and the light emitting lens 42B has a color according to the final display color pattern. It emits light. Thereafter, when the movable effect member 42A is retracted, the display color (the same color as the light emission color) of the three-length ball according to the final display color pattern is visually recognized. From the color emitted by the light emitting lens 42B along with the behavior of the movable effect member 42A and the display color of the three-length ball displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600, the degree of expectation of the big hit is enhanced. In addition, since the light emission color of the light emission lens 42B and the display color of the three-length ball always become the same color, even if the movable effect member 42A does not appear due to a failure etc., the advance notice is given only with the three-color ball display color. Can.

  The final display color pattern determined using the table for determining the final display color pattern for holding information display combination product is the display color of the three-length ball that can be finally displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 and the light emitting lens 42B. However, the display color in the first three-scale ball hold display area 610 is determined using a hold display change pattern determination table described later. When the light emitting lens 42B overlaps the three-dimensional ball display area 600, light is emitted in the same color as that of the three-dimensional ball that can be finally displayed based on the final display color pattern. The light emitting color may be a color different from the display color of the three-length ball, or the movable effect member 42A may be made to appear so that the three-length ball can simply be seen through without causing the light emitting lens to emit light. Further, the final display color pattern to be finally displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 may be determined using the table for determining the final display color pattern of the held information display combination.

[Table for determining pending display change pattern]
132 to 134 show the pending display change pattern determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for determining the pending display change pattern corresponds to the case in which a three-length ball for previewing advance notice is displayed in the second to fourth of the first three-shot ball pending display area 610 (see FIG. 132), (1) The first sample corresponding to the case where the three-length ball for previewing advance notice is displayed in the first three-piece ball holding display area 610 (see FIG. 133) It is divided into those corresponding to the case where a three-sized ball to be notified is displayed (see FIG. 134). These pending display change pattern determination tables are stored in the program ROM 72.

  The hold display change pattern determination table is based on the final display color pattern determined using the hold information display combination product final display color pattern determination table, the first three-scale ball reserve display area 610 and the three-measure ball display area. It is a table for determining the pending display change pattern of the three-color ball displayed as a target of the advance notice of advance reading at 600 and the light emission color of the light-emitting lens 42B when overlapping with this. The table for determining the pending display change pattern is a current color pattern (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) indicating the determined color of the final display color and the display color of the corresponding three-length ball or light emitting lens 42B. And the display color change pattern (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) showing the display color which changes from the current time to the next, and the random number for presentation determination (65536) for each of these display color change patterns doing. In addition, in the first three-length ball holding display area 610, a three-length ball for previewing notice that overlaps the light emitting lens 42B is also displayed as a display color of the same color as the light emitting lens 42B.

  For example, in the reserve display change pattern determination table (second to fourth) in FIG. 132, the final display color pattern is “yellow”, and the fourth position of the first three-measure ball reserve display area 610 is located. When the display color (current color pattern) before change in the three-length ball and the light-emitting lens 42B is "white", the light-emission color (display color change pattern) of the three-length ball and the light-emitting lens 42B after change at the position is It is determined to be "white" with a probability of 40960/65536, "blue" with a probability of 16384/65536, and "yellow" with a probability of 8192/65536. Moreover, in the table (1st) for the pending display change pattern determination of FIG. 133, the case where the final display color pattern is "yellow" and the third one positioned in the first one of the first three-length ball pending display area 610 When the display color (current color pattern) before the change in the measurement ball and the light emission lens 42B is “blue”, the emission color (display color change pattern) of the three-length ball and the light emission lens 42B after the change at the position is 49152 It is determined to be “blue” with a probability of / 65536 and is determined to be “yellow” with a probability of 16384/65536. Furthermore, in the table for determining a reserve display change pattern (0th) in FIG. 134, a three-level ball and a light-emitting lens 42B located in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 in the case where the final display color pattern is "yellow". When the display color (current color pattern) before the change in “Y” is “yellow”, the emission color (display color change pattern) of the three-length ball and the light emitting lens 42B after the change at the position is “65536/65536 It is determined to be yellow. Thereby, the display color of the three-dimensional ball and the light-emitting lens 42B changes every time the movable effect member 42A (the light-emitting lens 42B) moves from the first three-dimensional ball holding display area 610 to the three-dimensional ball display area 600 Therefore, the expectation from the final change to the display color to the expectation of the jackpot is also raised. In the present embodiment, in the case of the same color before and after the change, the display color is maintained, but the display color may be maintained by temporarily changing it and then restoring it.

  Note that the table for determining the pending display change pattern is used to determine the display color change pattern when the pending information to be subjected to the prefetch notice is stored in the pending information storage areas 1 to 4 of the work RAM 73 or the pending information storage area. It can be said that it is used for Moreover, in the present embodiment, as a premise of the display color change pattern, the display color when the three-length ball and the light emitting lens 42B are first displayed is defined to be "white" without fail. Thereby, even if the three-length ball or the light-emitting lens 42B is first displayed at any of the first to fourth display positions of the first three-length ball holding display area 610, for example, these first display colors are "white" , And changes or maintains from "white" to another color first at the position. Thereafter, the display color is changed or maintained as the display position moves. Note that the determination processing may be repeated until the final display color pattern is obtained so that the final display color pattern must be obtained, and the display color may be changed a plurality of times in the three-scale ball holding area. For example, when the final display color pattern is "red" and the current display color pattern is "blue", the display color change pattern determination process is performed using the pending display change pattern determination table to change the display color. When it is determined that the pattern changes to "yellow" as the pattern, the display color change pattern determination process is performed again using the pending display change pattern determination table again while temporarily changing the current display color pattern to "yellow". . Furthermore, when it is determined that the display color change pattern is to be changed to "green", the display color change pattern determination process is performed using the pending display change pattern determination table again with the current display color pattern as "green". The determination processing can be performed until it is finally determined that the display color change pattern is changed to “red”. In this case, in the three-sized ball display area, for example, the display color of the three-sized ball and the light emitting lens 42B changes three times in the order of “blue” → “yellow” → “green” → “red”. The display color change pattern is not limited to that shown in the drawing, and can be set appropriately according to the specification.

[Table for holding information display role movable pattern determination]
FIG. 135 shows a table for determining a held information display combination thing movable pattern which is referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for holding information display combination movable pattern determination corresponds to the case where the third inspection ball for previewing advance notice is displayed in the first to fourth of the first three-jump ball holding display area 610, and the zeroth It is divided into those corresponding to the case where a pre-read advance target three-sized ball is displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600. The hold information display combination product movable pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the table for holding information display combination movable pattern determination changes the display color of the three-dimensional ball and the light emitting lens 42B in the first three-dimensional ball holding display area 610 or the three-dimensional ball display area 600. It is a table for determining the movable pattern to be operated after arranging the movable effect member 42A so as to overlap with the three-length ball, and the determined display color change pattern (no change, one step change, 2 A change of level or more), movable patterns of the movable effect member 42A (no movement, vertical swing, horizontal swing, wing appearance) and random numbers for effect determination (65536) are defined for each of these movable patterns. . “No change” in the display color change pattern means that the display color determined as the display color change pattern does not change in the same color as the display color of the current color pattern. The "one-step change" of the display color change pattern means that the display color determined as the display color change pattern is one color higher than the display color of the current color pattern (for example, "white") (for example, "blue") It means to change. "Change by two or more steps" of the display color change pattern means that the display color determined as the display color change pattern is a color (for example, "yellow") superior to the display color of the current color pattern (for example, "white") , Means "green", "red", "rainbow"). In addition, "no movement" of the movable pattern means that the movable effect member 42A does not appear or that even if it appears, no rocking occurs, and "up and down rocking" means that the movable effect member 42A is in the vertical direction "Swimming" means that the movable effect member 42A swings finely in the left and right direction, and "Evoke appearance" means that the vanes of the movable effect member 42A appear radially. Do.

  For example, in the hold information display combination object movable pattern determination table (first to fourth), the display color change pattern corresponding to the first third length ball and the light emitting lens 42B of the first three length ball storage display area 610 is When it corresponds to "change in two or more steps", "no movement" is determined with a probability of 0/65536 as the movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A that can appear to overlap with this three-length ball, and 32768/65536 The "vertical movement" is determined by the probability, and the horizontal movement is determined with the probability of 32768/65536. In addition, in the table for determining the hold information display combination object movable pattern (0th), the display color change pattern corresponding to the three-length ball and the light-emitting lens 42B of the three-dimensional ball display area 600 corresponds to "change in two or more steps" In this case, as the movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A that can appear to overlap with the three-length ball, "no movement" is determined with a probability of 0/65536, and "up and down" with a probability of 32768/65536. It is determined and it is determined to be "feather appearance" with a probability of 32768/65536. In the present embodiment, when the movable effect member 42A is operated based on the movable pattern, only the display color change of the three-length ball is changed by changing the display color of the three-length ball and the emission color of the light emitting lens 42B. The degree of expectation of the big hit is enhanced not only by the operation of the movable effect member 42A but also by the light emission color of the light emitting lens 42B.

  In addition, the table for holding information display combination thing movable pattern determination may be put together as one table. The movable pattern and the display color change pattern are not limited to those illustrated, but can be appropriately set according to the specification.

[Table for determining the final display number of fireworks displayers]
FIG. 136 shows a table for determining the final display number of people who can be referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for determining the final display number of people for fireworks display is a table that is used when the fireworks reading for preview reading is selected as the prefetching preview effect, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the table for determining the final display number of persons for fireworks display is a table for determining the final number of remaining numbers of the pyrotechnicians who will be the execution main body in the above-mentioned staging and promotion effect. It defines the determination result of the symbol and the hit included in the three-length ball holding information which becomes, the final number of pyrotechnicians (0 to 4), and the random number for presentation determination (65,536) for each final number of these pyrotechnics . The final number of pyrotechnicians may be called the final display number.

  For example, in the table for determining the final display number of people for the fireworks display, when the determination result included in the three-length ball holding information for previewing advance notice is "second special symbol big hit (certain variation 1)" It is determined to be "0" with a probability of 65536, "1" with a probability of 8192/65536, "2" with a probability of 8192/65536, and "3" with a probability of 16384/65536. It is determined to be "4" with a probability of 32768/65536. On the basis of the final number of pyrotechnicians determined in this manner, basically, a number of hold promotion operations corresponding to the final number of people will be performed. Specifically, in the hold promotion, an effect is performed such that one by one from the final number of the pyrotechnicians, the three-length ball displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 is lit to change the display color. However, even with the hold promotion, the display color of the three-length ball does not necessarily change to the upper color having a higher hit probability. In addition, in the hold promotion, there may be an effect that all the final number of the pyrotechnicians light the three-length ball of the three-length ball display area 600 to change the display color. The final number of pyrotechnicians may not be determined to be "0".

  In the case where the table for determining the final display number of persons for the fireworks display is the determination result of the “second special symbol big hit (probability variation 1)” which is most advantageous for the player, the fireworks displayer is relatively compared to the other determination results. It is preferable to stipulate that the final number of people be determined in large numbers.

[Table for determining the initial display number of fireworks displayers]
FIG. 137 shows a table for determining the initial display number of persons displayed by the sub CPU 71. The table for determining the initial display number of persons for fireworks display is a table for determining the number of the first number of the pyrotechnicians in the preliminary notice for the fireworks display read-ahead. It is memorized.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the table for determining the initial display number of persons for fireworks display is a symbol and a determination result of hitting included in the three-length ball holding information to be subjected to the advance notice, A random number for effect determination (65,536) is defined for each of these initial numbers of pyrotechnicians.

  For example, in the table for determining the initial display number of persons for the initial stage (the final number 1), when the determination result included in the three-length ball holding information for previewing advance notice is "second special symbol big hit (certain variation 1)" The number of people is determined to be "1" with a probability of 8192/65536, "2" with a probability of 8192/65536, "3" with a probability of 16384/65536, and "4" with a probability of 32768/65536. Is determined. In this way, the number of pyrotechnicians is changed at a predetermined timing from the initial number of pyrotechnics determined in this way to the final number of pyrotechnics. That is, when the three-length ball targeted for the advance notice is displayed in the three-piece ball display area 600, the pyrotechnician is displayed with the final number of the pyrotechnicians reduced or maintained from the initial number of pyrotechnicians and displayed finally. The greater the number of remaining pyrotechnicians, the higher the expectation of the jackpot.

[Table for fireworks color scheme pattern determination]
FIG. 138 shows a table for determining a pyrotechnic color scheme referred to by the sub CPU 71. The fireworks color arrangement pattern determination table is a table for determining the color arrangement of all the fireworks displayers displayed from the initial number to the final number, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the table for determining the pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern is determined with the symbol and the determination result of the hit included in the three-length ball holding information to be subjected to the advance notice, and the final number (1 to 4) of the pyrotechnicians. The pyrotechnic color arrangement patterns (white, red, rainbow) to be performed and random numbers for effect determination (65536 pieces) are defined for each of the pyrotechnic color arrangement patterns. The pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern suggests the degree of expectation of the big hit, and when arranged in the order from the one with the lowest degree of expectation to the highest, the order is white, red, rainbow. Also, as the final number of pyrotechnicians is larger, "red" or "rainbow" is more likely to be selected stochastically as the pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern.

  For example, in the table for fireworks color arrangement pattern determination, the determination result included in the three-length ball hold information for the advance notice is "second special symbol big hit (probability 1)" and the final number of fireworkmen is "4" When it is, as a firework master color arrangement pattern, it is determined to be "white" with a probability of 32768/65536, determined to be "red" with a probability of 16384/65536, and determined to be a "rainbow" with a probability of 16384/65536 . The color arrangement of the pyrotechnician is displayed according to the pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern determined in this manner. As a result, in the case where the color arrangement of the displayed pyrotechnician is “red” than “white” and “rainbow” than “red”, the degree of expectation of the jackpot is enhanced.

  In addition, the number of colors of the fireworks display color arrangement pattern can be appropriately changed according to the specification. Also, the color arrangement when the pyrotechnician is initially displayed may be determined separately from the color arrangement to be finally displayed. Furthermore, only the pyrotechnician corresponding to the final number of the pyrotechnicians is made to select a color other than "white", or the pyrotechnicians corresponding to the final number of the pyrotechnics are "red" or "rainbow" The probability that the color scheme of “is selected may be made relatively high.

[Table for determination of fireworks display decrease pattern]
FIG. 139 shows the table for determining the number of fireworks display patterns referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for determining the number of pyrotechnic decline patterns is a table for determining the reduction pattern of the pyrotechnicians from the initial number of pyrotechnics to the final number of the pyrotechnics. Corresponding to those stored in the storage information storage areas 5 to 8 of the RAM 73, those corresponding to the storage in the storage information storage areas 2 to 4 and those stored in the storage information storage area 1 And are stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the table for determining the number of pyrotechnicians decreasing patterns includes the final number (0 to 4) of the pyrotechnicians determined from the table for determining the final display number of persons described above and the current number (1 to 4) And the determined number of pyrotechnicians reduced (−4 to 0) and the random number for effect determination (65536) for each number of pyrotechnics reduced. Here, the "current number of people" means the number of pyrotechnicians before reduction in determination of the number of pyrotechnic reductions.

  For example, in the table for determining the number of fireworks display patterns (targets for holding 5 to 8), in the case where holding information to be subjected to pre-reading notice is stored in the holding information storage area 6, the final number is “3” When the current number of people is "4", the number of pyrotechnic decreases is determined to be "0" with a probability of 60000/65536, and determined to be "-1" with a probability of 5536/65536. At this time, if “−1” is determined as the number of fireworks display decrements, the number of finalists is “3” as the number of fireworks display decrements when the hold information to be subjected to the advance notice is stored in the hold information storage area 5. And the current number of people is “3”, so it is determined to be “0” with a probability of 65536/65536. As described above, the number of fireworks display decrements is sequentially determined each time the storage address of the hold information is shifted until the current number of people matches the final number of people. The number of pyrotechnicians may be reduced each time the three-length ball to be targeted for the advance notice is moved and displayed according to the determined number of pyrotechnicians reduced.

  In addition, how to distribute the table for determining the number of fireworks display patterns can be appropriately changed according to the specification. For example, a table may be provided for each pending information number to be a target of the pre-reading advance notice, or may be a table of the same contents without dividing for each pending information number.

[Table for fireworks reduction decrease gasse pattern determination]
FIG. 140 shows a table for determining a fireworkman decrease gasse pattern referred to by the sub CPU 71. The table for determining the number of firecracker reduction gasse patterns is a table for determining a case pattern regarding an effect such as returning to appear as if the number of fireworkers decreases, and is stored in the program ROM 72. Such a table for determining the number of fireworks display reduction patterns is referred to only when it is determined that the number of fireworks display reductions is “0” based on the table for determination of fireworks display patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the table for determining the firecracker reduction gasse pattern includes the judgment result of the symbol and the hit included in the three-length ball holding information targeted for the advance notice, the winning and non-winning of the gasse pattern, A random number for effect determination (65536) is defined for each winning and non-winning.

  For example, in the table for determining the number of fireworks displayed by the fireworker decrease, if the symbol and the judgment result of the hit included in the three-length ball holding information targeted for the advance notice are "second special symbol big hit (probable variation 1)" The gasse pattern that makes the masters appear to decrease is determined to be won with a probability of 32768/65536. According to such a cassette pattern, it is possible to produce an effect that looks like the number of pyrotechnicians not only decreases but also increases.

  In the present embodiment, although the effect is basically such that only one of the pyrotechnicians decreases after the decrease due to the gassed pattern, a return is performed after collectively reducing the number of persons. May be

[Table for determining the number of promotion timings]
FIG. 141 shows a promotion timing number determination table. The promotion timing number determination table is a table for determining the number of promotion timings of pending promotion (hereinafter also referred to as “promotion of fireworks display”) using the final display number of the fireworks displayer, and is stored in the program ROM 72 .

  As shown in FIG. 141, in the promotion timing number determination table, in the case of the effect pattern including “normal fluctuation”, “normal reach” having no pseudo link, and “large continuous notice”, the promotion timing number is 1 and 2 respectively. If the effect pattern is 4 times and further includes “pseudo run 2”, “pseudo run 3” and “pseudo run 4”, the promotion timing number is incremented by +1, +2 times, +3 times respectively Is defined in On the basis of such promotion timing count, the timing at which hold promotion is executed is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 as described above. That is, the number of promotion timings is only the number of times (1 to 7 times in the present embodiment) that there is a possibility that the staging promotion effect will be executed, and the staging promotion effect for all the numbers determined as the promotion timing number Is not performed. Incidentally, the number of executions of the hold promotion is 1 to 4 times, which corresponds to the final number of the pyrotechnicians, or once when all the final persons simultaneously carry out the hold promotion. Note that the number of promotion timings may be uniquely determined according to the rendering pattern without using a table.

[Promotion execution decision table]
FIG. 142 shows the promotion executability determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The promotion executability determination table is a table for determining the executability of the effect of the fireworks display promotion (hold promotion) according to the final display number of the fireworks displayer, and is stored in the program ROM 72.

  As shown in FIG. 142, in the promotion executability determination table, when the final display number of the fireworks displayer is “4”, for example, it is determined with a probability of 32768/65536 that execution of the effect of promotion of the fireworks display is possible, The fact that execution is not possible is determined with the probability of 32768/65536. Such a promotion executability determination table is used when the number of promotion timings described above is larger than the final display number of the pyrotechnician. For example, when the final display number is “4” and the number of promotion timings is “7”, the promotion executability determination table is used until four wins (execution possible) of seven promotion timings are obtained.

  That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a determination process as to whether or not the effect of the firework teacher promotion is to be executed from the first of the promotion timing based on the promotion execution availability determination table. At this time, for example, when each of the first to fourth promotion timings is elected (permitted) for the effect of promotion of the firework master, for the fifth to seventh as promotion timings for that other, it is for promotion executability decision It is considered impossible to carry out the promotion of the pyrotechnician without using the table. On the other hand, for example, when the first and second promotion timings are won (executed) for the effect of promotion of the fireworks display, and the third to fifth times are not won (impossible), the other promotion timings become 6 With regard to the second and seventh times, the effect of promoting the pyrotechnician promotion is forcibly made executable without using the promotion executability determination table.

  In addition, the table for promotion executability determination is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and can be set appropriately according to the specification, for example, regardless of the final display number It may be specified. Further, it may be defined that the probability of winning is higher as the final display number is smaller.

[Table for promotion pattern determination]
FIGS. 143 and 144 show the promotion pattern determination table referred to by the sub CPU 71. The promotion pattern determination table is a table for determining a suspension display pattern serving as staging promotion effect content, and if it is roughly classified, it corresponds to the pseudo run time shown in FIG. 143 and the non-pseudo run time shown in FIG. It is distributed to the corresponding ones and stored in the program ROM 72. Specifically, as the promotion pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 143, the table corresponding to “lost pseudo continuous time”, the one corresponding to “small hitting pseudo continuous time”, “corresponds to the big hit pseudo continuous time” Those that correspond to “Loss, small hits, big hit pseudo continuous irregulars” are provided, and as shown in FIG. 144, those corresponding to “Loss non pseudo linked”, “Small hit non pseudo linked There is provided one corresponding to "time", one corresponding to "big hit non pseudo continuous time", and one corresponding to "lost, small hit, big hit non pseudo continuous time irregular". "Irregular time" means that the final display number of the pyrotechnician is larger than the promotion timing number.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the promotion pattern determination table includes the display colors (white, blue, yellow, green, red) of the three-length ball at the current time recognized in the determination process and the pyrotechnicians at that time. Remaining number (1 to 4) and display color of white ball which can be determined as a reserved display pattern (white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow, white (NEXT), blue (NEXT), yellow (NEXT) , Green (NEXT), red (NEXT), and effect determination random numbers (65536) are defined for each of the reserved display patterns. In addition, with "NEXT", a character image "NEXT" is displayed along with a part of the decorative pattern 500 and the three-length balls of the three-sized ball display area 600 as a special pseudo-series pattern at the time of pseudo-series execution. It means that the character image disappears and the display color of the three-length ball becomes the corresponding color in the re-variation display later, and it is defined in association with the significant random number for effect determination only in the table corresponding to the pseudo run time There is. In the case of "NEXT", the original color may be restored.

  For example, in the promotion pattern determination table (big hit pseudo run) shown in FIG. 143, when the decorative design 500 to be the big hit design is displayed variably as pseudo run, the display of the three-length ball in the three-run ball display area 600 It is used to determine the pending display pattern for changing the color due to pending promotion. Also, for example, in the promotion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 144 (at the time of big hit non pseudo continuous), when the decorative symbol 500 to be the big hit symbol is displayed in a variable manner and corresponds to the predetermined promotion timing, It is used to determine a hold display pattern for changing the display color of the three-measure ball in the measure ball display area 600 by hold promotion. Further, the promotion pattern determination table corresponding to the irregular time shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. 144 shows the display color of the three-length ball in the three-length ball display area 600 when digesting the final display number of people of the pyrotechnician together. It is used to determine a hold indication pattern to be changed by hold promotion. In short, when determining the promotion pattern at the hold promotion timing shown in (2), (3) and (4) of FIG. 106, the table of FIG. 143 corresponding to “pseudo link” is referred to, and other hold When determining the promotion pattern at the promotion timing, the table in FIG. 144 corresponding to “non-pseudo linked” is referred to.

  For example, according to the promotion pattern determination table (big hit pseudo run), as an example, when the color at the present time is "white" and the number of remaining pyrotechnicians is "4", the display color of the three-length ball as the hold display pattern Is changed to "blue" with a probability of 4280/65536. The next pending display pattern uses the promotion pattern determination table (big hit pseudo continuous time) or the promotion pattern determination table (big hit non pseudo continuous time), and the color at the present time is "blue" and the remaining number of pyrotechnicians The one corresponding to the case where “3” is determined is determined, and then the same process is repeated until the remaining number becomes “0”, whereby the suspension display pattern for the final display number of people is determined.

  In addition, according to the promotion pattern determination table (big hit pseudo run time), as an example, when the color at the present time is "white" and the number of remaining pyrotechnicians is "4", the display of a three-length ball as a hold display pattern It is determined with a probability of 60244/65536 that color etc. is to be "white (NEXT)", and determined to be "blue (NEXT)" is determined with a probability of 756/65536, and change to "yellow (NEXT)" It is determined with the probability of 256/65536 that it is made to do. This next display display pattern also uses the promotion pattern determination table (big hit pseudo continuous time) or the promotion pattern determination table (big hit non pseudo continuous time), and the color at the present time is "white" and the remaining number of pyrotechnicians The one corresponding to the case where “3” is determined is determined, and then the same process is repeated until the remaining number becomes “0”, whereby the suspension display pattern for the final display number of people is determined.

  Furthermore, according to the promotion pattern determination table (loss, small hit, big hit non-periodic continuous irregular) corresponding to the irregular time shown in FIG. 144, the color at the present time is “white” as an example and the final of the pyrotechnician When the number of displayed people (remaining number) is "4", the display color of the three-length ball is maintained as "white" as a pending display pattern when the pending promotion is performed using all the final displayed people, 16384 / It is determined with the probability of 65536, the effect of changing the display color of the three-length ball to "blue" is determined with the probability of 16384/65536, the effect of changing it to "yellow" is determined with the probability of 16384/65536, "green" The decision to change to "is determined with a probability of 8192/65536, the decision to change to" red "is determined with a probability of 8192/65536, and the decision to change to" rainbow "is not determined with probability 0. In this case, if the number of promotion timings is smaller than the final display number, that is, if the final display number of people is collectively put on hold promotion, the hold display pattern corresponding to the hold promotion is determined. Based on the display color of the three-length ball is changed or maintained.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. The processes executed by the main CPU 61 according to the present embodiment are substantially the same as those according to the other embodiments described above, and thus the description of the same or similar processing is omitted.

[First start port switch check process]
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment. This first starting opening switch check processing is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 19, but a series of processing is executed when a winning (pass) of the gaming ball in the first starting opening 211 is detected. In the winning effect determination process of S505, the main CPU 61 is configured to determine that the winning effect is to be performed with a probability of 100%. As a result, the sub CPU 71 can execute an effect related to the advance notice without being restricted by the main CPU 61 according to the start winning command, without restricting the execution of the effect concerning the advance notice. In the prize effect determination process included in the first starting opening switch check process, it is determined whether or not the effect according to the advance notice is executed as the prize effect, and if the determination result to the effect is obtained, the sub The CPU may further determine whether or not to execute the advance notice. In addition, in the winning effect determination process of the main CPU, processing is performed to determine the type of preview notice as well as whether to execute the effect according to the preview notice, and to cause the sub CPU to execute preview notice based on the determination result and the determination result. You may Alternatively, when the main CPU obtains the judgment result indicating that the prefetch notice is to be executed, the sub CPU determines the type of the prefetch notice, and the sub CPU executes the prefetch notice based on the decision result. Good.

[Second start port switch check process]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment. Although this second starting opening switch check processing is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 20, a series of processing is executed when a winning (pass) of the gaming ball in the second starting opening 241 is detected. In the winning effect determination process of S515, the main CPU 61 is configured to determine that the winning effect is to be performed with a probability of 100%. As a result, the sub CPU 71 can execute an effect related to the advance notice without being restricted by the main CPU 61 according to the start winning command, without restricting the execution of the effect concerning the advance notice. In the prize effect determination process included in the second starting opening switch check process, it is also determined whether or not the effect according to the advance notice is executed as a prize effect, and a determination result indicating execution is obtained, the sub The CPU may further determine whether or not to execute the advance notice. In addition, in the winning effect determination process of the main CPU, processing is performed to determine the type of preview notice as well as whether to execute the effect according to the preview notice, and to cause the sub CPU to execute preview notice based on the determination result and the determination result. You may Alternatively, when the main CPU obtains the judgment result indicating that the prefetch notice is to be executed, the sub CPU determines the type of the prefetch notice, and the sub CPU executes the prefetch notice based on the decision result. Good.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment. The special symbol storage check process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 23, but the demonstration display process of S522, the determination process of S523, and the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S531 are different.

  In the demonstration display process of S522, the main CPU 61 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, but there is no start storage of the special symbol game even if a predetermined time such as 30s has passed since this transmission. Send the demo display command again. That is, the demo display command is periodically and periodically transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 until the number of starting memories related to the first and second special symbols becomes one or more. The demonstration display command includes data indicating the type of the gaming state at the current time, together with an instruction to permit execution of the demonstration display.

  At S523, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the next variable display corresponds to the second special symbol. That is, the main CPU 61 monitors the storage order of the starting memory corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and this storing order corresponds to the second special symbol for the oldest starting memory. Determine if In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the next variable display corresponds to the second special symbol (S523: YES), the process moves to S524, while the next variable display corresponds to the second special symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not the symbol, that is, the symbol corresponds to the first special symbol (S523: NO), the process proceeds to S525.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination process of S531 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation pattern determination processing executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment. The special symbol variation pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in S560, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the variable display number counter, and shifts the process to S561. The variation display number counter is an addition counter mainly for counting the number of games (number of symbol variations) in the probability variation short gaming state, and is reset each time the big hit gaming state ends.

  In S561, the main CPU 61 refers to a table (not shown) for selecting the special symbol variation pattern determination table, and the type of special symbol to be varied, the gaming state, the number of start memories (number of reservations), variation indication The special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 108 to 111) is selected according to the value of the number counter and the hit symbol flag. The hit symbol flag is set in response to the end of the big hit or the end of the small hit in the non-probable variable non-short game state. The hit symbol flag in this embodiment is "01H" in the case of "first special symbol big hit (positive variation 1)", "02H" in the case of "second special symbol big hit (positive variation 1)", "second special symbol "03H" in case of big hit (probability 2), "04H" in case of "2nd special symbol big hit (probability 3)", "05H" in case of "2nd special symbol big hit (probability 4)", not "06H" is set in the case of "the first special symbol small hit" in the probability variation non-short game state. Different specific variation counts are associated with “01H” to “05H” of the winning symbol flag, and the specific variation count is “170” for “01H” and “130” for “02H”. The specific fluctuation number is "140H" in 03H ", the specific fluctuation number is" 150 "in" 04H ", and the specific fluctuation number is" 160 "in" 05H ". In addition, “1 to 5” is associated with “06H” of the hit symbol flag as the number of times of special variation related to the special mode.

  For example, when the special symbol to be changed in the probability variation short game state is the second special symbol, and the hit symbol flag is "02H" and the value of the variation display number counter is "130", the second special symbol variation pattern determination table ( If the number of specific fluctuation number certain variation time short number of suspension 1 to 8) is selected, and the hit symbol flag is “02H” and the value of the variable display frequency counter is “150”, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (ST101 to 174 times The probability variation time short hold number 1 to 8) is selected. Also, when the special symbol to be changed in the non-probable non-time-shifting game state is the first special symbol, and the hit symbol flag is "06H" and the value of the variable display number counter is "5" or less, the first special symbol variation pattern is determined. A table for small hits (1 to 8 for non-probable non-constant non-probable non-short-cuts) is selected.

  In S562, the main CPU 61 refers to the selected special symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S563.

  In S563, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting data corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special symbol is variably displayed and stopped based on the data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S564.

  In S564, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S562 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Thereafter, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination processing routine. The fluctuation pattern designation command thus set is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61 of the present embodiment. The hit / end interval management process is similar to that shown in FIG. 30 or 54 and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in S571, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process (S571: YES), the process proceeds to S572. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process (S571: NO), it ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  At S572, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (S572: YES), the process proceeds to S573. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (S572: NO), the hit end interval management processing routine is ended.

  In S573, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S574.

  In S574, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the type of the hit gaming state ended is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit (S 574: YES), the process proceeds to S 575. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the type of the hit gaming state ended is not a big hit, that is, a small hit (S 574: NO), the process proceeds to S 578.

  At S575, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a predetermined value in the hit symbol flag. At this time, as the predetermined value, any one of "01H" to "05H" corresponding to the hit symbol of the ended big hit gaming state is set. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S576.

  In S576, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set “01H” indicating the probability changing time short game state to the game state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S577.

  At S577, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “184” as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S580.

  In S578, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63 is "00H" indicating the non-probable variation non-short time gaming state. When the main CPU 61 determines that the gaming state flag is "00H" (S578: YES), the processing is shifted to S579. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the gaming state flag is not "00H" (S578: NO), the processing is shifted to S581.

  At S579, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the hit symbol flag. At this time, as the predetermined value, "06H" corresponding to the hit symbol of the finished small hit gaming state is set. As a result, the hit symbol flag "06H" may be set in the non-probable variable non-short game state, but will not be set in the positive short time game state. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S580.

  At S580, the main CPU 61 executes processing for setting “0” to the fluctuation display number counter. As a result, after the big hit ends, or after the small hit end in the non-probable non-time-varying short game state, the fluctuation display number is counted. When this process ends, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S581.

  At S581, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command, and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is transmitted from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 receives various commands from the main CPU 61 and performs various processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 32, but the movable effect apparatus control process of S596 is partially different.

  In S596, the sub CPU 71 performs movable effect device control processing via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 moves the movable effect member 42A from the first three-length ball holding display area 610 to the three-dimensional ball display area 600, or swings the movable effect member 42A vertically or horizontally. A control process is performed to cause the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A to emit light or to project a blade from the outer periphery of the movable effect member 42A. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S591, and thereafter repeats the processes of S591 to S596.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. Since this command reception interrupt process is the same as that shown in FIG. 33, the description thereof is omitted.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. 34, but the timer update process of S611 is different, and a missing port switch check process of S613 is added. The timer update process of S611 will be described later with reference to FIG. 153, and the missing port switch check process of S613 will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer update process is executed in the following steps.

  In S620A, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not "hit" is received from the reception of the hit start display command until the reception of the gaming state command. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit is "in passing" (S620A: YES), the process is shifted to S629. On the other hand, if it is determined that "not successful" (S620A: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S620.

  In S620, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the effect mode flag corresponds to any of "06H" to "08H". The effect mode flag indicates the type of effect mode (normal mode (1) to (3), special mode (1) to (3), ST mode (1) to (3)), and the normal mode (1) ) “00H”, normal mode (2) “01H”, normal mode (3) “02H”, special mode (1) “03H”, special mode (2) “04H”, special mode (3) ) Is "05H", ST mode (1) is "06H", ST mode (2) is "07H", and ST mode (3) is "08H". If the effect mode flag falls under any of “06H” to “08H” (S620: YES), that is, if it is the ST mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S622. On the other hand, when the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of “06H” to “08H” (S620: NO), the sub CPU 71 recognizes the effect mode other than the ST mode, and then shifts the processing to S622.

  In S621, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the hold information related to the three-length ball is stored. If the hold information relating to the three-length ball is stored (S621: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S629. On the other hand, if the hold information related to the three-length ball is not stored at all (S621: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S622.

  In S 622, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the demonstration display timer is “0”. The demonstration display timer is for clocking the execution time of the demonstration display, and a predetermined time is set according to the gaming state, and is decremented each time the timer updating process is performed. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display timer is “0” (S 622: YES), the process proceeds to S 625. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display timer is not “0” (S 622: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 623.

  In S623, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S624.

  In S624, the sub CPU 71 determines again whether the demonstration display timer is “0”. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display timer is “0” (S 624: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 625. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display timer is not "0" (S624: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S629.

  In S625, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not gem hold information is stored in blocks 1 to 4 of the gem hold information storage area. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the gem hold information is stored (S625: YES), the process proceeds to S626. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gem reservation information is not stored (S625: NO), the process proceeds to S629.

  In S626, the sub CPU 71 performs gem hold information update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transfers the gem reserve information stored in block 1 of the gem reserve information storage area to the gem reserve information storage area (not shown), and blocks 2 of the remaining gem reserve information storage area. The gem hold information stored in 4 to 4 is shifted to blocks 1 to 3. Thereby, a gem is displayed in the gem display area 700 based on the gem reserve information stored in the gem reserve information storage area. Incidentally, the gem reserve information stored in the gem reserve information storage area is erased according to the end of the demonstration display or the finalized display of the decorative symbol 500 in the pseudo ream using the gem. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S627.

  In S627, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to the type of effect mode to the demonstration display flag, and sets effect data according to the demonstration display flag to a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. The demonstration display flag indicates the type of demonstration display to be executed based on the demonstration display command etc. “01H” corresponding to the demonstration display (1) when there is no gem holding information regardless of the type of presentation mode , "02H" corresponding to demo display (2) in the normal mode with gem hold information, "03H" corresponding to demo display (3) in the special mode with gem hold information, there is gem hold information In the case of the ST mode, it is set as "04H" corresponding to the demonstration display (4). Incidentally, in the non-demonstration display state other than the demonstration display (1) to (4), the demonstration display flag is "00H". Thereby, the effect image according to demonstration display (1)-(4) is displayed based on a demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S628.

  In S628, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a predetermined value corresponding to the demonstration display flag to the demonstration display timer. For example, when the demonstration display flag is “01H”, a value corresponding to 20 s is set in the demonstration display timer as the time for performing the demonstration display (1) according to the normal demonstration. When the demonstration display flag is "02H", a value corresponding to 8s is set in the demonstration display timer as the time for performing the demonstration display (2) using a gem in the normal mode. When the demonstration display flag is "03H", a value corresponding to 10s is set to the demonstration display timer as the time for performing the demonstration display (3) in the special mode. When the demonstration display flag is "04H", a value corresponding to 3s is set in the demonstration display timer as a time for performing demonstration display (4) in the ST mode. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S629. The value set in the demonstration display timer can be appropriately changed according to the specification.

  In S629, the sub CPU 71 performs update processing for other timers, and ends the timer update processing routine.

[Missing port switch check processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart of the missing port switch check process executed by the sub CPU 71. The missing port switch check process is executed in the following steps.

  In S630, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the ball entry of the gaming ball into the lost port 242 has been detected based on the detection signal from the lost port switch 380. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a ball entering the lost port 242 based on the detection signal from the lost port switch 380 (S630: YES), the process proceeds to S631 and enters the lost port 242. If it is determined that there is no ball (S630: NO), the missing port switch check processing routine is ended.

  In S631, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the number of gem holdings (the number of gem holding information) is four or more. In this process, if the number of gems held is 4 or more (S631: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the missing port switch check processing routine, and if the number of gems held is not 4 or more (S631: NO), the process proceeds to S632. Transfer.

  In S632, the sub CPU 71 performs table selection processing for determination of gem holding display pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting a gem holding display pattern determination table (see FIG. 126) in accordance with the updated number of holding gems. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S633.

  In S633, the sub CPU 71 performs gem hold display pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 uses the selected table for determining the gem display pattern to determine a gem displayed in the gem reserve display area 710 based on the pattern and the determination result of the hit included in the three-length ball stock information. Determine the gem hold display pattern of the. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S634.

  In S634, the sub CPU 71 performs gem hold information update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 stores the latest gem hold information in the empty block of the gem hold information storage area based on the determined gem hold display pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the missing port switch check processing routine.

Command analysis processing
155 and 156 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is similar to the command analysis process of FIG. 35, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in S640, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a reception command. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a reception command (S640: YES), the process proceeds to S641. On the other hand, when determining that there is no reception command (S640: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

  In S641, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data in the subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading out the data of the reception command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S642.

  In S642, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a demo display command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demo display command has been received (S642: YES), the process proceeds to S643. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the demo display command has not been received (S642: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S644.

  In S643, the sub CPU 71 executes a demonstration display control process. The demonstration display control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S644, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a start winning command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has been received (S 644: YES), the process proceeds to S 645. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has not been received (S 644: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 646.

  In S645, the sub CPU 71 executes a first hold information update process. The first hold information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S646, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received (S646: YES), the process proceeds to S647. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received (S646: NO), the process proceeds to S649.

  In S647, the sub CPU 71 executes effect pattern determination processing. The effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S648.

  In S648, the sub CPU 71 executes a second hold information update process. The second hold information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S649, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received (S 649: YES), the process proceeds to S 650. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received (S 649: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 651.

  In S650, the sub CPU 71 executes stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S651, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command has been received as a reception command. If it is determined that the symbol stop command has been received (S651: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S652. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received (S 651: NO), the process proceeds to S 653.

  In S652, the sub CPU 71 executes a decorative symbol stopping process. The decorative symbol stopping process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S653, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received (S653: YES), the process proceeds to S654. On the other hand, when determining that the hit start display command has not been received (S653: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S655.

  In S654, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process is substantially the same as that according to the above-described embodiment, but a process of setting "0" to the demonstration display timer and a process of setting "00H" to the demonstration display flag are further performed. . When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S655, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command has been received as a reception command. If it is determined that the special winning opening open display command has been received (S655: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S656. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening open display command has not been received (S655: NO), the process proceeds to S657.

  In S656, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during a round. The in-round presentation processing is the same as that according to the above-described embodiment. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S657, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a hit end display command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received (S657: YES), the process proceeds to S658. On the other hand, when determining that the hit end display command has not been received (S657: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S659 in FIG.

  In S658, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit / termination effect process is similar to that according to the above-described embodiment. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  As shown in FIG. 156, in S659, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received (S659: YES), the process proceeds to S660. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has not been received (S659: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S661.

  In S660, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode shift processing. The effect mode transfer process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  In S661, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a definite variation end command has been received as a reception command. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the definite variation end command has been received (S 661: YES), the process proceeds to S 662. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the definite variation end command has not been received (S661: NO), the process proceeds to S663.

  In S662, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode transition processing. This effect mode transfer process is also the same as in S660, and will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

  At S663, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis process routine.

[Demo display control process]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing a demonstration display control process executed by the sub CPU 71. The demonstration display control process is executed in the following steps.

  In S670A, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the game is "hit" until the game state command is received after the hit start display command is received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the game is "hit" (S670A: YES), it ends the demonstration display control process routine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit is not "hit" (S670A: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S670.

  In S670, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the demonstration display flag is "00H" indicating a non-demonstration display state. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display flag is "00H" (S670: YES), the process proceeds to S671. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display flag is not "00H" (S670: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the demonstration display control processing routine.

  In S671, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "01H" in the demonstration display flag based on the demonstration display command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S672.

  In S672, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the demonstration display flag to the demonstration display timer. As a result, a value corresponding to 20 s corresponding to the demonstration display (1) is set in the demonstration display timer. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the demonstration display control processing routine.

[First pending information update process]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing a first hold information update process executed by the sub CPU 71. The first hold information update process is performed in the following steps.

  In S680, the sub CPU 71 executes a pending information display mode temporary determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 tentatively determines the display color of the three-length ball as the on-hold information display pattern using the on-hold information display pattern temporary determination table (see FIG. 127). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S681.

  In S681, the sub CPU 71 executes pending information storage area update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 generates latest three-scale ball suspension information including color information indicating the display color of the temporarily determined three-scale ball together with data included in the start winning command, and works the three-scale ball suspension information It is stored in the free area of the pending information storage areas 1 to 8 in the RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S682.

  At S682, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice flag is "00H". The pre-reading notice flag indicates the type of pre-reading notice in addition to execution / non-execution of pre-reading notice, and is set as “00H” when not being executed, and executes the pre-reading notice of firework master's notice (for prize hold information target) In this case, it is set as "01H", set as "02H" when executing the fireman's look-ahead notice (target of existing hold information), and is set as "03H" when performing hold information display combination pre-reading notice. It is set as "04H" when executing a pre-notification notice that the number of pending information changes. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch advance notice flag is “00H” (S 682: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 683. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the pre-reading advance notice flag is not “00H” (S 682: NO), it ends the first hold information update processing routine.

  In S683, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “00H”. The pending information count change pre-notification in progress flag indicates execution / non-execution of pending information number pre-change notice for pending information number, and is set as "01H" in case of execution and set as "00H" in case of non-execution. ing. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “00H” (S683: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S684. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “01H” instead of “00H” (S683: NO), it ends the first pending information update processing routine.

  In S684, the sub CPU 71 executes pre-reading notice processing. The pre-read advance notice process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the first hold information update processing routine.

[Read ahead notice processing]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading advance notice process executed by the sub CPU 71. Pre-reading notice processing is executed in the following steps.

  In S690, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any one of "00H" to "02H". If the effect mode flag falls under any of “00H” to “02H” (S690: YES), that is, if it is the normal mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S691. On the other hand, when the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of “00H” to “02H” (S690: NO), the sub CPU 71 recognizes the effect mode other than the normal mode, and ends the prefetch notice processing routine.

  In S691, the sub CPU 71 performs table selection processing for prefetching notice execution determination. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects one of the pre-read advance notice execution determination tables (see FIG. 128) in accordance with the number of three-scale ball holding information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S692.

  In S692, the sub CPU 71 performs prefetch advance notice execution determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for previewing notice execution determination, and determines whether to perform prefetching notice by random number lottery based on the latest hold information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S693.

  In S693, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute pre-reading advance notice based on the determination result of S692. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice is to be executed (S693: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S694. On the other hand, when it is determined that the prefetch notice is not to be executed (S693: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetch notice processing routine.

  In S694, the sub CPU 71 performs table selection processing for pre-reading notice type determination. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects one of the prefetch notice type determination tables (see FIG. 129) in accordance with the number of three-length ball holding information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S695.

  In S695, the sub CPU 71 performs pre-reading notice type determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the type of preview for preview notice, and determines the type of preview for preview by random number lottery based on the latest hold information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S696.

  In S696, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a value according to the determination result in S695 in the prefetch advance notice flag. At this time, the pre-reading notice flag is set as "01H" when the result of determination to execute the firework teacher pre-reading notice (for the prize holding information target) is set, and the pyrotechnic pre-reading notice (for the existing holding information target) is executed. Is set as "02H" when the determination result of "to perform" is obtained, and is set as "03H" when the determination result of performing pre-notification of the pre-display of the pre-display information display combination is obtained, pre-reading of the number of pending information changes It is set as "04H" when the decision result to execute the advance notice is obtained. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S697.

  In S697, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice flag is “02H” indicating the pre-reading firework teacher's advance notice (the target of the existing hold information). If it is determined that the prefetch advance notice flag is “02H” (S 697: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 698. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice flag is not "02H" (S697: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S700.

  In S698, the sub CPU 71 performs table selection processing for pre-reading notice object pending information determination. In this process, the sub CPU 71 receives any pre-fetching notice depending on whether there is pending information including symbols (big hit symbols and small hit symbols) per existing pending information or only pending information including lost symbols. The target holding information determination table (see FIG. 130) is selected. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S699.

  In S699, the sub CPU 71 performs pre-read notice object pending information determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for pre-notice advance notice target hold information determination, and determines the hold information of the order of the pre-read notice based on the number of hold by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S700.

  In S700, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value indicating the order of the hold information to be a target of the pre-notice advance notice in the pre-read notice execution frequency determination counter based on the determination result of S699. The pre-reading advance notice execution frequency determination counter is a subtraction counter for determining the number of times pre-reading notice is executed for holding information to be a target of pre-reading notice. For example, in the case of the first hold information, “1” is set in the prefetch notice execution frequency determination counter, and in the case of the third hold information, “3” is set in the prefetch notice execution frequency determination counter. When the prefetch notice flag is "04H", if the number of pending information decreases to 4 or less before the value of the prefetch notice execution frequency determination counter becomes 0, the first three-shot ball reserve display area as a target of prefetch notice. The display color of the three-length ball displayed at 610 is changed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S701.

  In S701, the sub CPU 71 executes pre-reading advance notice pattern determination processing. This pre-read advance notice pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the pre-read notice processing routine.

[Pre-reading notice pattern decision processing]
FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing a pre-reading advance notice pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The prefetching advance notice pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  In S710, the sub-CPU 71 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice flag is “03H” indicating the pre-notice of the held information display part pre-reading notice. If it is determined that the prefetch advance notice flag is "03H" (S710: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch advance notice flag is not "03H" (S710: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S712.

  In S711, the sub CPU 71 executes a pending information display role pre-notification advance notice pattern determination process. The on-hold information display feature pre-notification advance notice pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetching advance notice pattern determination processing routine.

  In S712, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice flag is “04H” indicating the number of pending information change pre-reading notices. If it is determined that the prefetch advance notice flag is "04H" (S712: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetch notice pattern determination processing routine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice flag is not "04H" (S712: NO), the sub CPU 71 recognizes the pre-reading advance notice for pyrotechnics (presence for winning prize information) or the pre-reading notice for pre-working pyrotechnics (target for existing pre-pending information). Transfer the process to

  In S713, the sub CPU 71 executes a firecracker pre-reading advance notice pattern determination process. This pyrotechnician pre-reading advance notice pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetching advance notice pattern determination processing routine.

[Holding information display role thing pre-reading notice pattern decision processing]
FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the on-hold information display role pre-notification advance notice pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The on-hold information display function pre-notification advance notice pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  In S720, the sub CPU 71 performs a table selection process for determining the on-hold information display combination product final display color pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects and reads the table for determining the final display color pattern of the held information display combination (see FIG. 131). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S721.

  In S721, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a display information product final display color pattern. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the final display color pattern of the held information display combination, and based on the determination result of the held information to be subjected to the pre-reading notice, the last information in the held information display combination pre-reading notice. The display color pattern is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S722.

  In S722, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value obtained by adding 1 to the current order of the pending information to be subjected to the pre-reading advance notice as a predetermined value in the role feature pattern determination counter. The feature pattern determination counter is a subtraction counter for counting the number of executions of the pre-reading advance notice using the movable effect member 42A. By setting a predetermined value to this counter, the pre-reading using movable effect member 42A is performed until the three-length ball is moved and displayed from the first three-length ball holding display area 610 to the relevant three-length ball display area 600. A notice is given. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S723.

  In S723, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the character item pattern determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S724.

  In S724, the sub CPU 71 performs a pending display change pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub-CPU 71 changes the hold display change pattern according to the order indicating the number of pieces of the target three-length ball to be displayed in the three-dimensional ball hold display area 600 and the first three-mark ball hold display area 610. The determination table (see FIGS. 132 to 134) is selected. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S725.

  In S725, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a display information display combination display color change pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the reserve display change pattern, and displays the target three-length ball and the light-emitting lens 42B next based on the final display color pattern and the current color pattern. The color change pattern is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S726.

  In S726, the sub CPU 71 performs a table selection process for holding information display combination product movable pattern determination. In this process, the sub CPU 71 controls the target three-length ball or movable effect member 42A in the three-dimensional ball holding display area 600 (zero) and the first three-dimensional ball holding display area 610 (first to fourth). The table for holding information display combination thing movable pattern determination (refer to FIG. 135) is selected according to which of them is displayed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S727.

  In S727, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a held information display combination object movable pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining a held information display combination product movable pattern, and determines the movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A by random number lottery based on the display color change pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S728.

  In S728, the sub CPU 71 sets data for executing the display color change pattern and the movable pattern determined in S725 and S727 in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S729.

  In S729, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the character feature pattern determination counter is one. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not all of the display color change pattern and the movable pattern at the time of displaying the target three-measure ball in the first three-measure ball suspension display area 610 have been determined. If the value of the role pattern determination counter is 1 (S729: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S730. On the other hand, if the value of the item pattern determination counter is not 1 (S729: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines the other display color change pattern and movable pattern in the first three-stroke ball hold display area 610, S723. Transfer the process to

  In S730, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting a pending display change pattern determination table, as in S724. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a table for determining a reserve display change pattern (see FIG. 134) according to the time when the target three-scale ball is displayed in the three-measure ball reserve display area 600. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S731.

  In S731, the sub CPU 71 performs the process of determining the on-hold information display combination display color change pattern, as in S725. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the reserve display change pattern, and based on the final display color pattern and the current color pattern, the target three-length ball or the light emitting lens 42B is displayed as the three-dimensional ball reserve display The display color change pattern to be displayed in the area 600 is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S732.

  In S732, the sub CPU 71 performs a table selection process for determining a held information display combination product movable pattern, as in S726. In this process, the sub CPU 71 displays the hold information display combination object movable pattern determination table (zero-th) according to the case where the target three-length ball or the light-emitting lens 42B is displayed in the three-piece ball storage display area 600. See FIG. 135). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S733.

  In S733, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a held information display combination object movable pattern, as in S727. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining a hold information display combination product movable pattern (0th), and measures the length of the three-length ball hold display area 600 based on the display color change pattern. The movable pattern of the movable effect member 42A at the time of displaying a ball is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S734.

  In S734, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting data for executing the display color change pattern and the movable pattern determined in S731 and S733 in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the held information display combination pre-forecasting notice pattern determination process routine. According to such a holding information display feature pre-notification advance notice pattern determination process, pre-reading advance notice using the movable effect member 42A is performed. In the advance notice with the movable effect member 42A, the moveable effect member 42A appears to overlap with the three-length ball to be subjected to the advance notice, and until the variation display of the decorative symbol 500 based on the object hold information is ended. The movable effect member 42A continues to overlap with the three-length ball. Therefore, once the movable effect member 42A overlaps with the target three-length ball, it moves as the three-length ball is moved and displayed thereafter. In addition, after the movement display of the three-length ball and the movement of the movable effect member are synchronized and the movable effect member appears on the display area, it may be difficult or impossible to visually recognize the three-length ball. In addition, there may be a period in which the three-length ball can be visually recognized by the movement of the movable effect member after the holding image moves.

[Fireworks master advance notice pattern determination process]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the pyrotechnician pre-reading advance notice pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The pyrotechnician pre-reading advance notice pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  In S740, the sub-CPU 71 performs a table selection process for determining the final display number of fireworks displayers. In this process, the sub-CPU 71 determines the final number of the fireworks displayer for determining the final number of the pyrotechnicians when displaying the target three-length ball in the three-spin-ball holding display area 600 (see FIG. 136). Choose). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S741.

  In S741, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for determining the final number of displayed pyrotechnicians. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the final display number of persons for the selected fireworks display, and based on the determination result included in the suspension information for the preliminary-notice preview object, the corresponding three-scale ball is three-dimensional ball suspension display The final number of the pyrotechnicians by the pyrotechnics pre-reading notice at the time of displaying in the region 600 is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S742.

  In S742, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value determined in S741 in the final display number counter. The final display number counter is a subtraction counter for counting the number of executions of hold promotion corresponding to the final display number of the fireworks displayer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S743.

  In S743, the sub CPU 71 performs a table selection process for determining the initial display number of people for the pyrotechnician. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a table for determining the initial number of displayed pyrotechnicians (see FIG. 137) for determining the initial number of pyrotechnicians according to the final number determined in S741. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S744.

  In S744, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the initial number of displayed pyrotechnicians. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the initial number of displayed fireworks persons, and randomly selects the initial number of the pyrotechnicians according to the prior notice of the fireworks display preview based on the determination result included in the suspension information for the preliminary announcement notice. Determined by In the present embodiment, since the number of pyrotechnicians is basically reduced or maintained in the pyrotechnics pre-reading advance notice, the number of initially displayed persons is determined as the number of the final displayed persons or more. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S745.

  In S745, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the determined value in the initial display person number counter. The initial display number counter is a counter for specifying a number corresponding to the initial display number of the pyrotechnician. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S746.

  In S746, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a table for determining the color arrangement pattern of the fireworks displayer (see FIG. 138) for determining the color arrangement pattern of the fireworks display in the preview of the fireworks reading. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S747.

  In S747, the sub CPU 71 performs a pyrotechnic color arrangement pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the color arrangement pattern for the pyrotechnician, and based on the determination result included in the suspension information for the preliminary notice to be previewed and the final display number of the pyrotechnician, The color arrangement pattern of is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S748.

  In S748, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting a value corresponding to the order of the target holding information as a target value in the pyrotechnic pattern determination counter. The pyrotechnic pattern determination counter is a counter used to determine an effect pattern of pre-reading advance notice for each target hold information order. For example, "4" is set as a predetermined value when determining an effect pattern when the order of the target holding information is the fourth. When the sub CPU 71 ends the process of step S749, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to step S749.

  In S749, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the pyrotechnic pattern determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S750.

  In S750, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for selecting a table for determining the number of fireworks display patterns. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a table for determining a pyrotechnic reduction pattern (see FIG. 139) for determining a reduction pattern of the pyrotechnician in the preliminary reading of the pyrotechnician according to the order of the target holding information. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S751.

  In S751, the sub CPU 71 performs a fireworks display reduction pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the number of fireworks display reduction patterns, and determines the number of reductions of the fireworks displayers by random number drawing according to the final display number of the fireworks displayers and the current number of people before reduction. . The current number of people is indicated as the value of the initial display number of people counter, and is obtained from this counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S752.

  In S752, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the number of pyrotechnicians is to be reduced from the current number. If it is determined that the number of pyrotechnicians is decreased from the current number (S752: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S753. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pyrotechnicians is maintained without decreasing from the current number (S752: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S754.

  In S753, the sub CPU 71 performs initial display person number counter subtraction processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the decrease from the initial display person number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S756.

  In S754, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of selecting a table for determining a fireworkman's reduced gasse pattern. In this process, the sub-CPU 71 selects a table for determining a reduced number of firecracker patterns (see FIG. 140) to make it appear that the number of fireman tips is reduced. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S755.

  In S755, the sub CPU 71 performs a firecracker reduction gasse pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for determining the firecracker decrease gasse pattern and selects whether to execute the firecracker decrease gasse pattern based on the determination result included in the target holding information Determined by When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S756.

  In S756, the sub-CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the pyrotechnician pre-reading advance notice pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. By this processing, the display pattern of the pyrotechnician at the time when the three-length ball to be subjected to the advance notice is displayed in the hold display area corresponding to the value of the fireworker pattern determination counter + 1 is determined. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S757.

  In S757, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the pyrotechnic pattern determination counter is zero. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the order of the target holding information becomes 0, and the effect pattern related to the advance notice before displaying the corresponding three-length ball in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 is determined. . If the value of the pyrotechnic pattern determination counter is 0 (S757: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the pyrotechnics pre-reading advance notice pattern determination process routine. On the other hand, if the value of the pyrotechnic pattern determination counter is not 0 (S757: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S749 to determine the effect pattern of the pyrotechnician according to the remaining order.

[Demonstration pattern determination processing]
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern determination process performed by the sub CPU 71. The effect pattern determination process is performed in the following steps.

  In S760, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding one to the value of the mode staying number counter. The mode stay number counter is a counter that may be used when selecting the first and second effect pattern determination tables, and is for counting the number of games when the same effect mode is continuously executed. It is a thing. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S761.

  In S761, the sub CPU 71 extracts a random number for effect determination. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S762.

  In S762, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any of "00H" to "02H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the effect mode is the normal mode. If the effect mode flag falls under any of "00H" to "02H" (S762: YES), that is, if it is the normal mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S763. On the other hand, if the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of “00H” to “02H” (S690: NO), the sub CPU 71 recognizes the effect mode other than the normal mode and moves the process to S764.

  In S763, the sub CPU 71 performs normal mode effect pattern determination processing. The normal mode effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process routine.

  In S764, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the effect mode flag corresponds to any of "03H" to "05H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the effect mode is the special mode. If the effect mode flag falls under any of "03H" to "05H" (S764: YES), that is, if it is the special mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S765. On the other hand, when the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of “03H” to “05H” (S 764: NO), the sub CPU 71 recognizes the ST mode and moves the process to S 766.

  In S765, the sub CPU 71 performs special mode effect pattern determination processing. The special mode effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process routine.

  In S766, the sub CPU 71 performs ST mode effect pattern determination processing. The ST mode effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect pattern determination process routine.

[Normal mode effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a normal mode effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The normal mode effect pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  In S770, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S771.

  In S771, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting 0 to the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S772.

  In S772, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination table selection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects an effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 112, 113, 117, and 118) for determining an effect pattern in the normal mode. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S773.

  In S773, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the effect pattern determination table corresponding to the selected normal mode, and based on the effect determination random number extracted in S761 for the effect pattern to be executed in the normal mode based on the fluctuation pattern designation command. Decide. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S774.

  In S774, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. The data set here is data for ending the demonstration display. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S775.

  In S775, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the prefetch advance notice flag is "01H" or "02H". That is, it is determined whether or not it is a pyrotechnician pre-reading notice. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice flag is “01H” or “02H” and it is determined that the firecracker pre-reading advance notice (S775: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S776. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice flag is neither “01H” nor “02H” (S775: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the normal mode effect pattern determination processing routine.

  In S776, the sub CPU 71 performs a firecracker promotion pattern determination process. This fireworks display promotion pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the normal mode effect pattern determination process routine.

[Fireworks teacher promotion pattern decision processing]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the pyrotechnic worker promotion pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The pyrotechnic worker promotion pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  In S780, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the promotion timing determination number counter. The promotion timing determination frequency counter is for counting the number of times of promotion promotion timing (promotion timing number), and as a predetermined value, corresponds to the effect pattern using the promotion timing number determination table (see FIG. 141). The number of timings (1 to 7) is set. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S781.

  In S781, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the final display number counter is larger than the value of the promotion timing determination number counter. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of executions of hold promotion corresponding to the final display number of people is larger than the number of promotion timings. If the value of the final display number counter is larger than the value of the promotion timing determination number counter (S781: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S782. On the other hand, if the value of the final display number counter is equal to or smaller than the value of the promotion timing determination frequency counter (S781: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S786.

  In S782, the sub CPU 71 performs a promotion pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a promotion pattern determination table (see FIGS. 143 and 144) for determining a promotion pattern (pending display pattern) related to the three-length ball in accordance with the effect pattern. At this time, since the number of executions of pending promotion is irregular more than the number of promotion timings, a table corresponding to irregular is selected as the promotion pattern determination table. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S783.

  In S783, the sub CPU 71 performs a promotion pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected promotion pattern determination table, and based on the current color of the target three-length ball and the remaining number of the pyrotechnician, indicates the next display color (promotion pattern ( The pending display pattern is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S784.

  In S784, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined promotion pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. At this time, the data set here corresponds to the promotion pattern at the time of irregular, and according to the data corresponding to this promotion pattern, the final display number of all the fireworks displayers is the first time point of the promotion timing. At the same time, the three-span-balls in the three-span-ball display area 600 are burned off and disappear while the display color of the three-spans ball is changed to the color defined by the promotion pattern (pending display pattern) It will be. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S785.

  In S 785, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” in the final display number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the pyrotechnic worker promotion pattern determination process routine.

  In S786, the sub CPU 71 executes a promotion execution availability determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes the pending promotion at every promotion timing because the number of promoted timings may be larger than the number of executions although the pending promotion is executed a number of times equal to the final display number of the fireworks displayer. The table for promotion executability determination (see FIG. 142) for determining whether or not to be selected. The table for promotion execution availability determination is used as an exception when the remaining number of promotion timings remaining as pending for execution availability for holding promotion is the same number as the final display number (number of executions for holding promotion) of the pyrotechnician I will not. In this case, all the remaining numbers of the promotion timing are determined without performing the lottery for executing the pending promotion. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S787.

  In S787, the sub CPU 71 performs promotion execution availability determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for promotion executability determination, except for the above-mentioned exception, and determines whether or not to execute hold promotion at each promotion timing based on the final display number of the fireworks displayer. Is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S788.

  In S788, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the final display number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S789.

  In S789, the sub CPU 71 performs a promotion pattern determination table selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a promotion pattern determination table (see FIGS. 143 and 144) for determining a promotion pattern (pending display pattern) related to the three-length ball in accordance with the effect pattern. That is, the promotion pattern determination table is selected in order to determine the promotion pattern at one promotion timing determined to execute hold promotion. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S790.

  In S790, the sub CPU 71 performs a promotion pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the selected table for promotion pattern determination, and performs the next operation based on the current color of the target three-length ball and the remaining number of the pyrotechnician (the value of the final display number counter). A promotion pattern (pending display pattern) indicating a display color of is determined by random number lottery. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S791.

  In S791, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined promotion pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. At this time, the data set here corresponds to the promotion pattern of pending promotion to be executed at one promotion timing, and according to the data corresponding to this promotion pattern, one of the pyrotechnicians is promoted timing While burning off the three-length ball of the three-dimensional ball display area 600 at a predetermined number of times and disappearing, the display color of the three-length ball changes to the color determined by the promotion pattern (pending display pattern) The presentation will be performed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S792.

  In S792, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the final display number counter is zero. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the promotion pattern for the final display number of people (the number of executions of hold promotion) has been determined. If the value of the final display number counter is 0 (S792: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the firework master promotion pattern determination processing routine. On the other hand, if the value of the final display people counter is not 0 (S792: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S788.

[Special mode effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing special mode effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The special mode effect pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  In S800, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S801.

  In S801, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "0" in the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S801.

  In S802, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination table selection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a rendering pattern determination table (see FIGS. 114 to 116 and FIGS. 119 to 121) for determining a rendering pattern in the special mode. At this time, the sub CPU 71 selects a different effect pattern determination table in accordance with the value of the mode staying number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S803.

  In S803, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the effect pattern determination table corresponding to the selected special mode, and based on the effect determination random number extracted in S761 for the effect pattern to be executed in the special mode based on the fluctuation pattern designation command. Decide. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S804.

  In S804, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the special mode effect pattern determination process routine.

[ST mode effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing ST mode effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The ST mode effect pattern determination process is executed in the following steps.

  In S810A, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the demonstration display flag is "04H" indicating the demonstration display (4). If the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display flag is "04H" (S810A: YES), the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the demonstration display flag is not "04H" (S810A: NO), the process proceeds to S810B.

  In S810B, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the demonstration display flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S810C.

  In S810C, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the demonstration display timer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S810.

  In S810, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination table selection processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects a rendering pattern determination table (see FIGS. 116 and 122 to 123) for determining a rendering pattern in the ST mode. At this time, the sub CPU 71 selects a different effect pattern determination table in accordance with the value of the mode staying number counter. In addition, when the value of the mode stay number counter matches the number of specific fluctuations, the sub CPU 71 corresponds to the time when the high expectation degree effect is not executed or the high expectation degree effect is executed according to the value of the specific effect pattern flag described later. Select a pattern determination table. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S811.

  In S811, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the effect pattern determination table corresponding to the selected ST mode, and based on the effect determination random number extracted in S761 for the effect pattern to be executed in the ST mode based on the fluctuation pattern designation command. Decide. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S812.

  In S812, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the specific effect pattern flag is "00H". The specific effect pattern flag is a specific effect pattern corresponding to the high expectation degree effect up to the specific fluctuation number (in the present embodiment, “Fireworkman door breakthrough reach door red”, “female door breakthrough reach door red”, “one strike” Indicates whether or not the button reach large button ", triple button reach large button" is executed, and if the specific effect pattern is not executed, it is "00H", and if it is executed, "01H" It becomes ". If the specific effect pattern flag is "00H" (S812: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S813. On the other hand, if the specific effect pattern flag is "01H" (S812: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S815.

  In S813, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a specific effect pattern has been determined in the process of S811. If it is determined that the specific effect pattern is determined (S813: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S814. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is not determined yet (S813: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S815.

  In S814, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" in the specific effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S815.

  In S815, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data for executing the determined effect pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the ST mode effect pattern determination process routine.

[Second pending information update process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the second hold information update process executed by the sub CPU 71. The second hold information update process is executed in the following steps.

  In S820, the sub CPU 71 performs pending information storage area update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transfers the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 to the hold information storage area based on the change pattern designation command, and holds information on the hold information storage areas 1 to 8 Shift one by one. As a result, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600 based on the holding information of the held information storage area. Then, when the decorative symbol 500 is finalized and displayed, the hold information of the hold information storage area is deleted, and the three-length ball displayed in the three-measure ball display area 600 is also deleted. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S821.

  In S821, it is judged whether or not the pre-reading advance notice flag is "00H". If it is determined that the prefetch advance notice flag is "00H" (S821: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S822. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prefetch advance notice flag is not "00H" (S821: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S823.

  In S822, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “00H”. If it is determined that the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “00H” (S822: YES), the sub CPU 71 ends the second pending information update processing routine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is not “00H” but “01H” (S822: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S823.

  In S823, the sub CPU 71 executes pre-read notice end processing. This pre-reading advance notice end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the second hold information update processing routine.

[Pre-reading notice end processing]
FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice end processing executed by the sub CPU 71. Pre-reading notice end processing is executed in the following steps.

  In S830, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “01H”. If it is determined that the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “01H” (S830: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S831. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pending information count change pre-notification in-execution flag is “00H” instead of “01H” (S 830: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 834.

  In S831, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting one from the value of the on-hold information number change pre-notification in-execution counter. The pending information number change prefetching notice executing counter is a subtraction counter for counting the number of executions of the pending information number change prefetching notice. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S832.

  In S832, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the counter under change in pre-notification number change preemptive notice is “0”. If the value of the counter under change in the number of reserved information change pre-reading notices is “0” (S 832: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 833. On the other hand, if the value of the counter under change in pre-notification number change preemptive notice is not “0” (S 832: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the pre-prediction notice end processing routine.

  In S833, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the pending information number change pre-notification in-execution flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the prefetch notice end processing routine.

  In S 834, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for subtracting one from the value of the pre-read advance notice execution number determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S835.

  In S835, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the pre-reading advance notice flag is "04H", that is, whether or not it is the pre-notification notice for changing the number of held information. If the value of the pre-reading advance notice flag is "04H" (S835: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S836. On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading advance notice flag is not "04H" (S835: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S842.

  In S 836, the sub CPU 71 moves and displays the three-measure ball from the second three-measure ball reserve display area 620 to the first three-measure ball reserve display area 610 whether or not the storage number of reserve information is “4”. It is determined whether or not the If the storage number of the hold information is "4" (S836: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S837. On the other hand, if the number of storages of the suspension information is not "4" (S836: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S842.

  In S837, the sub CPU 71 causes the work RAM 73 to change data for changing the holding information display pattern so as to move and display the three-length ball from the second three-length ball holding display area 620 to the first three-length ball holding display area 610. A process of setting in a predetermined area of That is, according to this data, the first three lengths of the three-length balls to be subjected to the advance notice in accordance with the pending information display pattern temporarily determined using the pending information display pattern temporary determination table (see FIG. 127) It will be displayed in the ball holding display area 610. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S838.

  In S838, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the pre-read advance notice execution number determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S839.

  In S839, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the prefetch advance notice flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S840.

  In S840, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "4" in the pending information number change pre-notification in-execution counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S841.

  In S841, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "01H" in the pending information number change pre-notification in-execution flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S843.

  In S842, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the pre-reading advance notice execution number determination counter is “0”. If the value of the pre-read advance notice execution frequency determination counter is “0” (S842: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S843. On the other hand, if the value of the pre-read advance notice execution number determination counter is not “0” (S842: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the read notice end processing routine.

  In S843, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "00H" to the prefetch advance notice flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the reading notice end processing routine.

[Stop decoration pattern processing]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol stopping process executed by the sub CPU 71. The decorative symbol stopping process is executed in the following steps.

  In S850, the sub CPU 71 performs decorative symbol determination display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for confirming and displaying the decorative symbol 500 in the variable display according to the symbol stop command. When this process ends, the process moves to S851.

  In S851, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode flag corresponds to any of "00H" to "02H". If the effect mode flag falls under any of "00H" to "02H" (S851: YES), that is, if it is the normal mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S852. On the other hand, if the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of "00H" to "02H" (S851: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S855.

  In S852, the sub CPU 71 performs normal mode effect transfer determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 uses the predetermined random number updated in the random number update process of S591 in the main process, and enters the normal mode of a type different from the current time when winning the transition lottery with a probability of 1/128. It decides to make the transition with a probability of 1/2 each. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S853.

  In S853, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether to shift to a different type of normal mode. When shifting to a different type of normal mode (S853: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S854. On the other hand, when the mode is shifted to the normal mode of the different type (S853: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process routine.

  In S854, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the transition destination normal mode to the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process routine.

  In S855, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the effect mode flag corresponds to any of "03H" to "05H". If the effect mode flag falls under any of "03H" to "05H" (S855: YES), that is, if it is the special mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S856. On the other hand, if the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of "03H" to "05H" (S855: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S858.

  In S856, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the mode staying number counter is “5”. If the value of the mode staying number counter is “5” (S 856: YES), the sub CPU 71 determines that the special mode has ended, and shifts the processing to S 857. On the other hand, if the value of the mode staying number counter is not "5" (S856: NO), the sub CPU 71 determines that the special mode is being executed, and ends the decorative symbol stop processing routine.

  In S857, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process routine.

  In S858, the sub CPU 71 performs ST mode effect transfer determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether to shift to the ST mode different from the ST mode in stay as the effect mode, based on the value of the effect mode flag and the value of the mode staying number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S859.

  In S859, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether to shift to an ST mode different from the staying ST mode. When shifting to the different ST mode (S859: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S860. On the other hand, when not transitioning to the different ST mode (S859: NO), the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop processing routine.

  In S860, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the ST mode of the transition destination in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the decorative symbol stop process routine.

[Production mode transition processing]
FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing the effect mode shifting process executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect mode transition process is executed in the following steps.

  In S900, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether a gaming state command has been received. If it is determined that the gaming state command has been received (S900: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S901. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state command has not been received (S900: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S912.

  In S901, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "00H" to the prefetch advance notice flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S902.

  In S902, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the pre-read advance notice execution number determination counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S903.

  In S903, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the pending information number change pre-notification in-execution flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S904.

  In S904, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "0" in the pending information number change pre-notification in-execution counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S905.

  In S 905, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the big hit gaming state has ended based on the received gaming state command. If it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has ended (S 905: YES), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit gaming state ends instead of the big hit gaming state end (S 905: NO), the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S 906.

  In S906, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the mode staying number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S907.

  In S907, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "06H" in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect mode transition process routine.

  In S 908, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the effect mode flag corresponds to any of “06 H” to “08 H”. If the effect mode flag corresponds to any of “06H” to “08H” (S 908: YES), that is, if it is the ST mode, the sub CPU 71 does not shift to the special mode during the ST mode, so the effect mode transition processing End the routine On the other hand, if the effect mode flag does not correspond to any of "06H" to "08H" (S908: NO), that is, if it is the normal mode or the special mode, the sub CPU 71 determines the transition destination to the special mode. Transfer the process to S909.

  In S909, the sub CPU 71 performs special mode transition destination determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a determination process as to which of the special modes (1) to (3) to shift to. In the present embodiment, for example, the probability to shift for each of the special modes (1) to (3) is 1/3, and the transfer destination using the predetermined random number updated in the random number update process of S591 in the main process. The special mode to be is determined. It should be noted that it is decided as to which special mode to shift to in the processing before this, and it is suggested that it should shift to any special mode during the change display of the decorative symbol before winning a small hit. Good. Further, the special mode to be transitioned may be determined in accordance with the judgment result of the pre-reading advance notice. For example, when there is a hold information indicating a big hit in the hold information to be digested after the small hit gaming state end, it may be easier to shift to the special mode (3) than the special mode (1). When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S910.

  In S910, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a value according to the determination result in S909 in the effect mode flag. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S911.

  In S911, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the mode staying number counter. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 ends the effect mode transition process routine.

  In S912, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the specific effect pattern flag. Note that this process may be executed each time the big hit gaming state ends, and the specific effect pattern may be executed once in ST mode. When this process ends, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S913.

  In S913, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "01H" in the effect mode flag. This process is executed only when a game state command indicating the end of the probability variation short game state is received, and "01H" corresponding to the normal mode (2) is set as the effect mode flag. When the value of the effect mode flag is set in this process, a value corresponding to one of the normal modes (1) to (3) may be set by lottery.

  Next, examples of various effects are described with reference to FIGS.

[Demo display (2)]
FIG. 172 is a view for explaining a demonstration display (2) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172 (A), in the normal mode, a three-length ball is displayed in the three-piece ball display area 600, and when the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, it is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. If the number of pieces of three-sized ball holding information becomes zero, three-sized balls are not displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610. At this time, if there is one or more pieces of gem holding information, one or more pieces of gems are displayed in the gem holding display area 710.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is finalized and displayed as a lost symbol, even in the three-dimensional ball display area 600, the three-dimensional ball is displayed unless the three-dimensional ball holding information is newly stored. The ball disappears.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), in the gem reserve display area 710, the gem is displayed to shift to the left by one, and accordingly, one gem moves in the gem display area 700. It is displayed as if you were doing it. Then, in the central portion of the display area 4A, instead of the display of the decorative symbol 500, for example, a message image 510A of "latency?" Is displayed. The term "latency" refers to the probability variation non-short play condition. The display of such a message image 510A is executed as a demonstration display (2) using the gem holding information, and is continued until, for example, about 8 seconds has elapsed in the present embodiment. When the demonstration display (2) ends, the display of the message image 510A is erased, and the display of the gem in the gem display area 700 is also erased. In addition, while such a message is displayed, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed may be displayed at a corner (for example, the upper left corner) of the display area.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D), when the three-scale ball holding information is not newly stored, it is displayed as if one gem in the gem holding display area 710 has moved to the gem display area 700 and displayed. In the central part of the area 4A, a message image 510B different from the previous message image 510A, for example, "big hit?" Is displayed. The display of such a message image 510B is also executed as a demonstration display (2) using the gem hold information. If three pieces of ball hold information are not newly stored and there is no gem hold information, a demo is displayed as a normal demo when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the end of demo display (2). ) Will be executed. In addition, if the three-sized ball holding information is newly stored during the execution of the demonstration display (1), (2), the demonstration display (1), (2) is forcibly ended, and the three-sized ball holding information The variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started on the basis of. Even during such message display, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed may be displayed at a corner (for example, the upper left corner) of the display area.

[Demo display (3)]
FIG. 173 is a view for explaining a demonstration display (3) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173 (A), in the normal mode, a three-length ball is displayed in the three-piece ball display area 600, and when the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, it is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. If the number of pieces of three-sized ball holding information becomes zero, three-sized balls are not displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610. At this time, if there is one or more pieces of gem holding information, one or more pieces of gems are displayed in the gem holding display area 710.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is finalized and displayed as “135” of the specific appearance showing the small hit symbol, the normal mode is shifted to the special mode, and although not particularly shown, An effect image corresponding to the small hit gaming state is displayed. At this time, in the display area 4A, a three-measure ball is not displayed in the three-measure ball display area 600 unless three-measure ball holding information is newly stored.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (C), in the display area 4A in the special mode, the gem is not displayed in the gem display area 700 and the gem retention display area 710. As described above, even when jewelry holding information is stored or a demonstration display using the jewelry holding information is executed, the jewelry is not displayed. At this time, in the gem reserve information storage area of the work RAM 73, the gem reserve information is shifted by one, and one gem reserve information is stored in the gem reserve information storage area of the work RAM 73. Then, in the central part of the display area 4A, a message such as "remaining 5 times?" Indicating the number of remaining games in the special mode instead of the display of the decorative symbol 500 based on the gem reserve information of the gem reserve information storage area. An image 520A is displayed. The display of such a message image 520A is executed as a demonstration display (3) using the gem hold information, and is continued until, for example, about 10 seconds has elapsed in this embodiment. When the demonstration display (3) ends, the display of the message image 520A is erased. In addition, even if the number of remaining games in the special mode is 1 to 4 in such a message image 520A, if there is gem hold information in a state where there is no three-scale ball hold information, based on the gem hold information. Will be displayed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), in the special mode, a state in which a gem is not displayed is continued in the gem display area 700 and the gem retention display area 710. Then, the gem hold information in the next order is stored in the gem hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. As a result, in the central portion of the display area 4A, a message image 520B, such as “big chance?” Different from the previous message image 520A, is displayed based on the second piece of gemstone retention information. The display of such a message image 520B is also executed as a demonstration display (3) using the gem hold information.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), in the special mode, when the three-measure ball hold information is newly stored, while the three-measure ball is displayed in the first three-measure ball hold display area 610, In the gemstone display area 700 and the gemstone reserve display area 710, the state in which the gemstone is not displayed is continued, and the decorative symbol 500 is displayed as a lost symbol, for example. In addition, when there is no gem holding information without newly stored three-scale ball holding information, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the end of the demonstration display (3), the demonstration display is usually performed as a demonstration (1) will be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (F), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is moved from the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 to the three-sized ball display area 600 and displayed. The decorative symbol 500 is displayed again based on the hold information. That is, in this example, the first special mode is executed. In addition, after the end of the demonstration display (3), the second to fifth special modes or the normal mode may be executed again. In addition, if the three-length ball holding information is newly stored during the execution of the demonstration display (3), the demonstration display (3) is forcibly ended, and the variation of the decorative pattern 500 based on the three-length ball holding information The display will be started.

[Demo display (4)]
FIG. 174 is a view for explaining a demonstration display (4) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 174 (A), in ST mode, a three-length ball is displayed in the three-piece ball display area 600, and when the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, it is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. If the number of pieces of three-sized ball holding information becomes zero, three-sized balls are not displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610. Further, also in the display area 4A in the ST mode, the gem is not displayed as in the special mode. In the ST mode, an effect design pattern 530 consisting of an alphabet is displayed on the upper right corner of the display area 4A so as to be capable of variable display and stop display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is finalized and displayed as a lost symbol, in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 as well, the three-dimensional ball is displayed unless the three-dimensional ball holding information is newly stored. The ball disappears.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), in the display area 4A in the ST mode, it is displayed in the upper right corner on the basis of the gem reserve information of the gem reserve information storage area as different from the decorative pattern 500. The variable display of the effect pattern 530 is started. At this time, in the gem reserve information storage area of the work RAM 73, the gem reserve information is shifted by one, and one gem reserve information is stored in the gem reserve information storage area of the work RAM 73. Such variable display of the effect pattern 530 is executed as a demonstration display (4) using the gem holding information, and is continued until, for example, about 3 seconds has elapsed in the present embodiment.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (D), in the display area 4A in the ST mode, when the time defined as the demonstration display (4) elapses, the variation display of the effect pattern 530 in the upper right corner ends. Stop display. At this time, an image may be displayed which indicates the number of remaining games in the ST mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (E), in the display area 4A, when the effect pattern 530 in the upper right corner is erased and the three-length ball retention information is newly stored, the first three-length ball retention display area A three-length ball is displayed at 610. In addition, when there is neither gem holding information nor new holding of gem holding information, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the end of the demonstration display (4), the normal demonstration is displayed as a demonstration (1) will be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 174 (F), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is moved from the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 to the three-sized ball display area 600 and displayed. Based on the corresponding hold information, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed again in a fluctuating manner. In addition, when three-levels ball holding information is newly memorized during execution of demonstration display (4) using production design 530, demonstration display (4) is forcedly terminated and display of production design 530 is performed. Is erased, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 500 is started based on the three-scale ball holding information.

[Pseudo link]
FIG. 175 is a view for explaining a pseudo-link (a pseudo-link executed based on the gem holding information) by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 175 (A), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600, and when the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, It is assumed that the stored three-scale ball holding information is two as an example, and two three-sized balls are displayed in the first three-long ball holding display area 610 in response to this. Also, it is assumed that there are two pieces of gem holding information as an example, and two pieces of gems are displayed in the gem holding display area 710. Also, it is assumed that "simulated continuous change 1 and simulated continuous 2" is determined as the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, as the effect pattern in which the effect relating to the pseudo link is executed based on the gem holding information, "pseudo linked fluctuation 1 pseudo linked 2", "pseudo linked fluctuation 2 pseudo linked 2", "pseudo linked" There are 1 variation 1 quasi run 2 small hit, "pseudo run fluctuation 2 pseudo run 2 small hit", "pseudo run fluctuation 1 pseudo run 2 big hit" and "pseudo run fluctuation 2 pseudo run 2 big hit".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), when the decorative symbol 500 is finalized and displayed as a lost symbol, the display of the three-length ball in the three-length ball display area 600 is erased.

  Thereafter, in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three-scale ball hold information is shifted one by one, and one three-measure ball hold information is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73. At this time, it is assumed that an effect pattern including “pseudo reunion 2” is determined based on the symbol included in the three-measure ball holding information and the determination result of the hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600, and the first decoration pattern 500 is determined based on the determined effect pattern. The variable display of is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), when the predetermined time has elapsed, the first variation display of the decorative symbol 500 ends, and the decorative symbol 500 is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern has not yet been reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (E), since the effect pattern including “pseudo run 2” is executed, in the gem reserve display area 710, the gem is displayed so as to be shifted to the left by one. Accordingly, in the gem display area 700, it is displayed as if one gem has moved. At this time, the three-sized ball of the three-sized ball display area 600 is erased. Then, in the display area 4A, the second variation display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the effect pattern. At this time, the gem displayed so as to move from the gem retention display area 710 to the gem display area 700 is determined using the gem retention display pattern determination table (see FIG. 126) when passing through the missing port 242. Display color. The display color of this gem indicates the degree of expectation according to the reserve information to be digested next when the gem reserve information is established.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), when the variation time based on the variation pattern elapses, the display of the three-length ball in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 is erased and the display of the gem in the gem display area 700 is performed. Is erased, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern 500 is finished, and the decorative pattern 500 is finalized and displayed. That is, the effect display of the pseudo ream 2 ends. As described above, in the effect pattern including “pseudo run 2”, the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol 500 are pseudo-executed twice while digesting one gem. In addition, in this embodiment, the effect which concerns on the pseudo ream which does not use gem reservation information is also provided. For example, the effect pattern ("Fireworks reach pseudo link 2" or the like) defined by the name "... reach pseudo link ..." corresponds to the effect related to the pseudo link which does not use the gem holding information. At the time of execution of this effect, when the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, the central symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as a special “pseudo run pattern” (for example, a character image “NEXT”).

[Fireworks teacher advance notice]
FIG. 176 and FIG. 177 are diagrams for explaining the firecracker look-ahead notice by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 176 (A), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600, and when the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, It is assumed that the stored three-scale ball holding information is two as an example, and two three-sized balls are displayed in the first three-long ball holding display area 610 in response to this.

  At this time, when the three-length ball holding information is newly stored according to the start winning, as shown in FIG. 176 (B), the third position from the left of the first three-length ball holding display area 610 (order of holding In the third position), a three-length ball corresponding to the three-length ball holding information is additionally displayed. In this example, at the time of determination of the effect pattern based on the starting winning combination, it is determined that the fireman's look-ahead notice (target for the prize hold information) is to be executed as the effect corresponding to the three-length ball hold information. . In the following description, the final display number of the fireworks displayer (two in this example), the initial display number of people (four in this example), and the suspension of the three-length ball It is assumed that a pyrotechnics reduction pattern (in this example, a reduction pattern that becomes “−1” → “−1” → “0”) according to the order is determined. Therefore, when the latest three-scale ball holding information is established, four fireworks displayers 800 serving as the initial display number of people are displayed. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute the firecracker reduction gasse pattern, the color arrangement of the pyrotechnician, and also the promotion pattern. In addition, when it is decided to execute the firework teacher advance notice (the target of the existing hold information), the existing three-scale ball hold information stored before the start winning at the current time is stored. The content of the presentation is determined in the same manner as described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (C), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed for confirmation, and the display of the three-dimensional ball in the three-dimensional ball display area 600 is erased. By the time the display of such a three-length ball is erased, it is displayed as if the number of four pyrotechnicians 800 of the initial display number has been reduced by one in accordance with the pyrotechnic reduction pattern.

  Next, in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three-scale ball hold information is shifted one by one, and one three-measure ball hold information stored in the hold information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 is the hold information. It is stored in the storage area. Thus, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), in the display area 4A, a three-length ball is displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600, and a decorative symbol is displayed based on the corresponding three-length ball retention information. 500 variable display is started. Further, in the first three-scale ball suspension display area 610, as long as the three-scale ball suspension information is not newly stored, it is displayed as if the three-scale ball moved leftward one by one and decreased. At this time, the three-sized ball which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice is positioned at the second of the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 as the holding order.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed for confirmation, and the display of the three parallel balls in the three parallel balls display area 600 is erased. By the time the display of such a three-length ball is eliminated, the number of pyrotechnicians 800 who are three is reduced by one more based on the pyrotechnic reduction pattern, so that two people are displayed. It should be noted that even if the number of firemans 800 decreases in this way, it may be displayed as if it were apparently reduced according to the fireman's decrease gasse pattern, and in such a case, the decorative symbol 500 from the next time onwards. The display is performed such that the number of the pyrotechnicians for the reduced number of persons is restored at the time of the variable display of

  Next, in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three-scale ball hold information is shifted by one, and one three-measure ball hold information stored in the hold information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 is the hold information storage It is stored in the area. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 176 (F), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600, and a decorative symbol is displayed based on the corresponding three-sized ball holding information. 500 variable display is started. Further, in the first three-scale ball suspension display area 610, as long as the three-scale ball suspension information is not newly stored, it is displayed as if the three-scale ball moved to the left and decreased. At this time, the three-sized ball which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice is positioned at the first of the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 as the holding order.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (G), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed for confirmation, and the display of the three-sized ball in the three-sized ball display area 600 is erased. At this time, the number of pyrotechnicians 800 who were two last time is not reduced by one on the basis of the reduction pattern, so two persons who are the final display number are displayed as they are.

  Next, the three-measure ball holding information remaining in the holding information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 as a target of the advance notice is transferred to the holding information storage area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (H), in the display area 4A, the three parallel balls in the first three parallel ball storage display area 610 disappear, and the three parallel balls are displayed in the three parallel ball display area 600. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the corresponding three-scale ball holding information. Further, in the first three-scale ball suspension display area 610, the three-scale ball is not additionally displayed unless the three-scale ball suspension information is newly stored. At this time, the three-sized ball which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice is located in the three-sized ball display area 60. And the fireworks displayer 800 in which two persons who become the final display number of persons are displayed remaining will be watched as a main subject of the effect which concerns on holding promotion.

  In this manner, when the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the three-length ball holding information to be subjected to the advance notice, holding promotion consisting of the final display number of the fireworks displayer 800 is executed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 177 (I) and (J), in the display area 4A, the first one of the pyrotechnicians finally displayed fires the three-length ball of the three-dimensional ball display area 600. An effect of changing the display color is performed. FIG. 177 (J) shows, as an example, that the display color of the three-sized ball changes from white to green based on the promotion pattern determined using the promotion pattern determination table.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 177 (K) and (L), during the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 based on the three-length ball holding information targeted for the advance notice, it was finally displayed in the display area 4A. An effect is performed such that one person remaining at the end of the pyrotechnician further lights the three-length ball of the three-length ball display area 600 to change the display color. In FIG. 177 (L), the variation display mode of the decorative symbol 500 becomes a reach mode, and based on the promotion pattern determined using the promotion pattern determination table, the display color of the three-length ball is from green to red as an example. It is shown how it changed. In addition, depending on the promotion pattern, the display color of the three-length ball may not change.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (M), when the decorative symbol 500 is finalized and displayed as a raised symbol indicating a big hit symbol, for example, it becomes a big hit gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 177 (N), In the area 4A, a "big hit" image 540 indicating the start of the big hit is displayed instead of the decorative pattern 500. According to such a pyrotechnics pre-reading notice, the number of executions of hold promotion is increased as the number of final display persons of the pyrotechnics increases, and as a result, the display color of the three-length ball may change to a higher color by hold promotion. Because it increases, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be raised according to the number of people and the display color of the three-length ball.

[Holding information display feature prior notice]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining a pre-notification notice of a held information display part by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178 (A), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600, and when the decorative symbol 500 is in a variable display, It is assumed that the stored three-length ball holding information is three as an example, and three three-sized balls are displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 accordingly. It should be noted that the holding information display feature pre-notification notice is also reflected from the time of the starting winning, as in the case of the above-mentioned firecracker pre-reading notice (for the prize holding information target).

  At this time, when the three-length ball holding information is newly stored according to the start winning, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), the fourth position from the left of the first three-length ball holding display area 610 (order of holding In the fourth position, a three-length ball corresponding to the three-length ball holding information is additionally displayed. Further, in this example, it is determined that the hold information display combination pre-reading notice is performed as the effect corresponding to the three measurement ball hold information according to the starting winning combination, and as the contents, the final display color of the three measurement balls ( In this example, red, a hold display change pattern (in the present example, a hold display change pattern of “white” → “green” → “red” → “rainbow”), a hold information display combination product movable pattern, and the like are determined. Thereby, the first display color of the three-length ball becomes "white". In the present embodiment, when the blade of the movable effect member 42A protrudes, the display color is always changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed for confirmation, and the display of the three-sized ball in the three-sized ball display area 600 is erased. At this time, the three-sized ball which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice is positioned at the fourth of the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 as the holding order. Then, the movable effect member 42A appears to overlap with the fourth three-length ball, and the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A emits green light based on the hold display change pattern. At this time, the display color of the fourth three-sized ball to be subjected to the advance notice is also changed to green based on the hold display change pattern, but the display color is made difficult to be recognized by the movable effect member 42A. In addition, the movable effect member 42A may swing up and down or to the left and right based on the held information display combination object movable pattern. In addition, the display color of the three-length ball may be made visible by the movable effect member 42A being retracted and not overlapping it. Further, only the display color of the three-length ball may be changed without the appearance of the movable effect member 42A at all.

  Next, in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73, the three-scale ball hold information is shifted one by one, and the first three-measure ball hold information stored in the hold information storage area 1 of the work RAM 73 is said hold It is stored in the information storage area. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-dimensional ball display area 600, and a decorative symbol is displayed based on the corresponding three-sized ball holding information. 500 variable display is started. Further, in the first three-scale ball suspension display area 610, as long as the three-scale ball suspension information is not newly stored, it is displayed as if the three-scale ball moved leftward one by one and decreased. At this time, the three-sized ball which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice is positioned at the third of the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 as the holding order. Then, the movable effect member 42A is moved in the left direction so as to overlap with the third three-length ball. At this time, the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A emits green light based on the pending display change pattern, and the third three-length ball as a target of the advance notice is not shown, but the pending display change pattern The display color is green based on.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 (E), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed for confirmation, and the display of the three-sized ball in the three-sized ball display area 600 is erased. Also at this time, the movable effect member 42A is in a state of being overlapped with the three-length ball (third) which is the target of the advance notice. At this time, the display color of the three-length ball may be made visible by retracting the movable effect member 42A. In addition, the display color of the three-length ball is basically changed to the upper color by the hold promotion, but may be changed to the lower color.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 178 (F), when the three-length ball to be subjected to the advance notice is displayed in the three-length ball display area 600, and the decorative symbol 500 is variably displayed accordingly. The movable effect member 42A moves to the position of the three-length ball display area 600 so as to overlap with the three-length ball, and the light emitting lens 42B of the movable effect member 42A is determined as a final color based on the retention display change pattern. It emits red light. At this time, the display color of the three-length ball to be subjected to the pre-reading advance notice is changed to the same color as the light-emitting lens 42B based on the hold display change pattern.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (G), in the display area 4A, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol 500 becomes the reach mode. At this time, the movable effect member 42A is swung up and down or has a blade projected based on the hold information display combination movable pattern in a state of overlapping the three-dimensional ball display area 600, and a rainbow based on the final display color pattern. It will be in the state changed to the color. FIG. 178 (G) shows a state in which the movable effect member 42A has changed its wing to a rainbow color. In this case, the three-dimensional ball may be made visible by retracting the movable effect member, and the display color of the three-dimensional ball may exhibit a color different from the light-emitting color of the light-emitting lens. Alternatively, only the display color of the three-length ball may be changed without the appearance of the movable effect member 42A.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (H), when the decorative symbol 500 is finalized and displayed as a raised symbol indicating a big hit symbol, for example, it becomes a big hit gaming state, and although not particularly shown, in the display area 4A, Instead of the decorative symbol 500, a "big hit" image showing the start of the big hit will be displayed. According to such holding information display combination pre-notification notice, the display color of the light emitting lens 42B and the three-length ball changes to a higher color as the number of holding information increases and the number of appearances of the movable effect member 42A increases. Since the possibility is increased, the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to these display colors. In addition, during execution of the pending information display feature prior warning, even when the pending information is five or more, the state where the four three-long balls are individually displayed in the first three-shot ball pending display area is maintained, The 5th to 8th three-sized balls are displayed in the second three-sized ball holding display area according to the number thereof.

[The number of pending information changes prefetching notice]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the pre-notification notice of change in the number of held information by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179 (A), in the display area 4A, a three-sized ball is displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600, and when the decorative pattern 500 is in a variable display, a three-sized ball according to the start winning. By newly storing the holding information, the three-length ball corresponding to the three-length ball holding information is at the fourth position from the left of the first three-length ball holding display area 610 (the fourth position in the holding order). It is displayed additionally. In this example, it is determined that the number of pending information number change pre-reading notices are to be executed as the effect corresponding to the three-stroke ball pending information according to the starting winning combination, and the final display color of the three-stroke ball (in this example) Red), a pending display change pattern (in this example, a pending display change pattern that changes from “white” to “green”) is determined. In addition, when the three-sized ball which is the target of the pre-reading advance notice is first displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area 610, the display color is always white.

  And, while the decorative symbol 500 is being displayed in a variable manner, if the three-length ball holding information is newly stored according to the start winning, as shown in FIG. 179 (B), the first three-length ball holding display area 610 The display of the three-length ball is erased from the left to the second to fourth positions, and the three-sized balls corresponding to these including the newly stored portion are collectively displayed in the second three-dimensional ball holding display area 620. Ru. That is, the three-length ball to be subjected to the pre-reading advance notice is included in the three-length ball collectively displayed in the second three-sized ball holding display area 620.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (C), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed for confirmation, and the display of the three-sized ball in the three-sized ball display area 600 is erased.

  At that time, as long as the three-measure ball hold information is not newly stored, it is stored in the hold information storage area of the work RAM 73 except for the three-measure ball hold information corresponding to the three-measure ball displayed next in the three-measure ball display area 600. The number of pieces of the three-measure ball holding information obtained is four less than five. As a result, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), the batch display for four three-length balls in the second three-length ball holding display area 620 is erased, and the four three-length balls are the first one. It is re-displayed in the measurement object holding display area 610. Then, the next three parallel balls are displayed in the three parallel balls display area 600, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started based on the corresponding three parallel ball holding information. At this time, the three-length ball to be subjected to the advance notice is located at the third position of the first three-length ball holding display area 610 in the order of holding, and the third three-length ball was initially displayed in white. Is re-displayed as if it moved from the second three-scale ball reserve display area 620 to the first three-scale ball reserve display area 610, the display color of the three-scale ball changes to green based on the reserve display change pattern. It is done. It should be noted that, in the state where the three parallel balls are displayed in the second three parallel balls hold display area, when one three parallel balls are erased, the three parallel balls in the second three parallel balls hold display area are not erased. Even when there is a three-sized ball displayed in the first three-sized ball holding display area, the display color of the three-sized ball may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), in the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 500 is displayed for confirmation, and the display of the three-sized ball in the three-sized ball display area 600 is erased.

  Such an operation is repeatedly performed, and as shown in FIG. 179 (F), when a three-sized ball to be a target of the advance notice is displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600, finally, the three-sized ball is displayed. The display color of the ball is changed to green based on the hold display change pattern. In addition, the display color of the three-dimensional ball changes only once when it is re-displayed as if it moved from the second three-dimensional ball holding display area to the first three-dimensional ball holding display area. However, the display color may be changed twice or more.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (G), in the display area 4A, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol 500 becomes the reach mode. As a result, the player can wait for the finalized display of the decorative symbol 500 while visually recognizing the state in which the display color of the three-sized ball finally changes to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (H), when the decorative symbol 500 is displayed as, for example, a lost symbol, although not particularly shown, the next three-sized ball is moved and displayed in the three-sized ball display area 600, The variable display of the decorative symbol 500 is started again. According to such a pre-notification change in the number of pending information changes, when a three-length ball is initially displayed in the first three-length ball retention display area 610, although the display color does not change, the first three-length ball retention display If it is moved and displayed from the area 610 to the first three-sized ball holding display area 610 again through the second three-sized ball holding display area 620, the displayed color of the three-sized ball may change from white to a different color. The player can play a game while aiming for the number of pending information to be 5 or more. In addition, even when the number of pending information decreases from 5 or more to 4 and the three-length ball is moved and displayed in the first three-length ball holding display area 610, the display color of the three-length ball is expected to change It is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot by changing the display color.

Modification of Fifth Embodiment
The modification of the said 5th Embodiment is demonstrated below. The description of the same or similar points as those described above will be omitted.

[Specs of gaming machines]
As shown in FIG. 180, specifications according to the modification of the fifth embodiment are substantially the same as those shown in FIG. 98, but differ in the following points. That is, although the hit patterns 1 to 6 are the same type and the same number as those shown in FIG. 98, plural types of big hit symbols and probability variation patterns are associated with each of the hit patterns 1 to 5. When such a plurality of types of big hit symbols and probability variation patterns are provided, the following special symbol variation pattern determination table and presentation pattern determination table are constructed.

[Table for special symbol variation pattern determination]
FIGS. 181 to 185 show modifications of the special symbol variation pattern determination table. FIGS. 181 and 182 show a first special symbol variation pattern determination table, and FIGS. 183 to 185 show a second special symbol variation pattern determination table. Here, as shown in FIG. 184 and FIG. 185, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table corresponding to the probability variation short game state (when the number of reservations is 1 to 8) is the number of times of variation display of the special symbol (the following In addition to the one corresponding to 1 to 100 times, the one corresponding to ST 101 to 174 times, and the one corresponding to ST 175 to 184 times, a specific fluctuation number occurs between ST 1 to 100 times It is divided into one corresponding to the case, one corresponding to the case where the specific fluctuation number occurs between ST101 and 174 times, and one corresponding to the case where the specific fluctuation number occurs between ST175 and 184 times. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table is a determination result of the hit type (loss, small hit, big hit (certain 1 to 3)) and a random number (0 to 0) for variation time determination. 99), various fluctuation patterns, fluctuation time, and fluctuation pattern designation commands (h1 to h34). As shown in FIGS. 183 to 185, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table is a determination result of the hit type (loss, small hit, big hit (certainly 1 to 11)) and a random number for determination of the change time (0 to 0) 99), various fluctuation patterns, fluctuation time, and fluctuation pattern designation commands (h1 to h61).

  For example, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 184 (ST101 to 174 times variation variation short holding number 1 to 8), the determination result of the hit type is “big hit (certain variation 1 to 4)” and the variation time is determined When one of the random numbers “25” to “49” is extracted, “big hit fluctuation pattern 19” whose fluctuation time is 180 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and fluctuation pattern indicating that The designated command "h51" is generated. Also, in the second special symbol variation pattern determination table (specific variation frequency (ST 101 to 174 times) with 1 to 8 suspension numbers for specific variation as shown in FIG. 185), the determination result of the hit type is “loss” and for variation time determination When one of random numbers “0” to “89” is extracted, “reach loss change pattern 14” having a change time of 180 seconds is determined as a change pattern of the second special symbol, and a change pattern designation indicating that is determined The command "h57" is generated.

  Such a second special symbol variation pattern determination table, one used in the early stage (1 to 100 times) of the probability variation short gaming state, one used in the middle stage (101 to 174 times), and the last stage (175 to 184) In the middle stage, the variation time is long on average, and in the late stage the variation time is longer on average than in the early stage. It is determined to be shorter. Further, as the second special symbol variation pattern determination table, different ones are used at the specific variation number in each of the early stage, middle stage and late stage, and they are generally long in any of them. In short, it is determined in the early, middle and late stages of the game time short game state whether or not it falls under the specific fluctuation number, and if it falls under the specific fluctuation number, the fluctuation time will inevitably be long .

[Table for determining the presentation pattern]
FIGS. 186 and 187 show a second effect pattern determination table used in the ST mode. The second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the ST mode includes one corresponding to each of the ST modes (1), (2), and (3), and a high expectation degree effect not yet generated by the specific variation number of the ST mode (1) A thing corresponding to each at the time of execution and high expectation degree performance execution, and a thing corresponding to each at the time of high expectation degree production non-execution and high expectation degree execution completion by the specific change frequency of ST mode (2) In the specific variation number of ST mode (3), it is distributed to those corresponding to the high expectation degree non-execution and the high expectation degree execution completed. Here, ST mode (1) means that the variation display count of special symbol corresponds to 1 to 100 times, and ST mode (2) corresponds to the variation display count of special symbol of 101 to 174 times The ST mode (3) means that the variation display number of the special symbol corresponds to 175 to 184 times.

  For example, in the second effect pattern determination table (ST mode (2)) shown in FIG. 186, when “reach loss change pattern 10” is specified by the change pattern specification command “h47”, the effect determination random number “0” When one of “19” is extracted, “Fireworks door breakthrough reach reach door red” is determined as a specific effect pattern, and one of random numbers “20” to “99” is determined for effect determination In the above, “Fireworks door breakthrough reach door blue” is determined as a presentation pattern not corresponding to the specific presentation pattern. As a specific effect pattern, “Woman door breakthrough reach door red” is also applicable. The specific effect pattern is also defined in the second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the ST mode (1) and the ST mode (3). In the ST mode (1), the "one strike button reach large button" and the "triple button reach large button" correspond to the specific effect pattern, and in the ST mode (3), the "door breakthrough reach" corresponds to the specific effect pattern . Furthermore, the specific effect pattern is also defined in the second effect pattern determination table corresponding to the time when the high expectation degree effect is not executed in the specific variation number of ST modes (1) to (3) shown in FIG. As described above, the expectation of the big hit is calculated by dividing the number of effect determination random numbers at the time of the big hit by the total number of effect determination random numbers at the time of the big hit and the loss. Thus, for example, in "one strike button reach large button", the probability of losing due to "reach lost fluctuation pattern 7" becomes 10/100, and the probability of becoming big hit based on "big hit fluctuation pattern 15" becomes 50/100 Therefore, the degree of expectation of the big hit is about 83% when calculated as the relative ratio of these. In addition, in "Fireworkman door breakthrough reach door red", the probability of losing due to "reach lost fluctuation pattern 10" becomes 20/100 and the probability of becoming big hit based on "big hit fluctuation pattern 19" becomes 80/100 Therefore, it will be 80% when the degree of expectation of big hit is calculated as a relative ratio of these. Therefore, the rendering pattern of "one shot button reach large button" or "pyramidist door breakthrough reach door red" corresponds to "high expectation degree rendering" (specific rendering pattern). On the other hand, in "Let firework door breakthrough reach door blue", the probability of losing due to "reach lost fluctuation pattern 10" becomes 80/100 and the probability of becoming big hit based on "big hit fluctuation pattern 19" becomes 20/100 Therefore, it is 20% when the expectation of the big hit is calculated as a relative ratio of these. Therefore, the effect pattern of "Fireworkman door breakthrough reach door blue" does not correspond to "high expectation degree effect" (specific effect pattern). As described above, also in the second effect pattern determination table according to the modified example, the effect pattern in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is approximately 60% or more is defined as the “high expectation degree effect” (specific effect pattern).

  In short, the specific variation number corresponding to each of the early stage, middle stage and final stage of the short game state at the time of probability variation is determined, and when each specific variation number is reached, the second effect pattern determination table as shown in FIG. Therefore, if the specific effect pattern has not been executed even once before reaching the specific change frequency in each of the ST modes (1) to (3), the specific effect pattern is always executed in the specific change frequency. . The specific number of changes is, for example, as follows. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the winning symbol flag and the number of specific variations is defined in advance, and in the case of "the first special symbol big hit probability variation 1 (01H)", the number of specific variations "1", "first special symbol" In the case of big hit probability variation 2 (02H) "specific variation number" 50 ", in the case of" first special symbol big hit probability variation 3 (03H) "specific variation number" 100 "," second special symbol big hit probability variation 1 (04H) In the case of "specific fluctuation number" 30 ", in the case of" second special symbol big hit oddity 2 (05H) "specific fluctuation number" 70 ", in the case of" second special symbol big hit oddity 3 (06H) "specific fluctuation In the case of the number of times "110", "second special symbol big hit oddity 4 (07H)" The number of specific variation "184", in the case of "second special symbol big hit oddity 5 (08H)" Second special symbol big hit oddity 6 (09H) " In the case of specific fluctuation number "120", "second special symbol big hit probability variation 7 (0AH)" In the case of specific variation number "180", in the case of "second special symbol big hit probability variation 8 (0 BH)" Specific variation number "70" in the case of "60", "second special symbol big hit odd variation 9 (0 CH)", specific variation number "130" in the case of "second special symbol big hit odd variation 10 (0 DH)", "second In the case of special symbol big hit probability change 11 (0EH) ", it becomes the specific fluctuation number" 140 ".

  According to the modification of the fifth embodiment, the specific effect pattern relating to the high expectation degree effect is executed in any of the ST modes (1) to (3), so even once in the ST mode. The sense of loss does not increase without the specific effect pattern being executed, and the effect of the effect can enhance the interest in the game. In addition, since the types of jackpot symbols are increased, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the execution timing of the specific effect pattern even by paying attention to the hit pattern, which also can enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment.

  According to the fifth embodiment, although it is possible to execute from the time of establishment of the hold information for which the fireworks read ahead notice and the hold information display role and thing advance notice for the target are targeted, after the target hold information is established, On condition that, for example, one hold information in order is stored, a fireman's look-ahead notice or a hold information display function and a thing pre-read notice may be executed. In addition, when it is not possible to execute temporally prior to the display of the information to hold the fireworks display pre-read notice and the hold information display feature prior notice, the next hold information establishment of execution of the effect according to these pre-read notices is established It may be executed at times. For example, when hold information is established immediately before the end of the variation display of the special symbol, it is not possible to temporally execute the effect of the decrease of the pyrotechnician or the effect of operating the movable effect member or changing the display color. At the time when the holding information is established, the presentation may be performed in the normal manner after the next holding information is digested, with the presentation at the time when the presentation is completed. In addition, “Fireworks master advance notice” and “hold information display role thing advance notice” are the second time (for example, 1 second) after the first time (for example, 1 second) elapses from the establishment of the hold information targeted for advance notice. It is assumed that it will be executed for 3 seconds in the "presence notice for fireworks reading" and 4 seconds in the "prediction notice for holding information display feature", and the time obtained by combining the first time and the second time when the hold information is established. However, when it is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the symbol in the fluctuation display at the time of holding information formation, the aspect of the pre-reading advance notice may be set as the aspect after the predetermined period. For example, when the number of displayers of the pyrotechnician decreases in the "presence of reading of the pyrotechnician", the pyrotechnician according to the number of display persons after the reduction from the temporal condition is displayed as the shortcut of the effect. When the display color is changed in the object pre-reading advance notice, the movable effect member may overlap with the target holding image while the display color is changed immediately after the start winning is achieved. In addition, even at each fluctuation when the advance notice is executed, the effect based on the fluctuation pattern determined as the fluctuation time is executed, but if the time for which the effect can be executed exceeds the fluctuation time, the similar effect shortcut You may do so. Such pre-reading advance notice can be applied not only to the fifth embodiment but also to the fourth embodiment.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when any one pre-reading notice is executed for a plurality of kinds of pre-reading notices, other pre-reading notices are not executed. More than one kind of pre-reading notice may be executed in combination. As a composite pattern, the following examples can be considered.

(Composition pattern 1)
For example, in the case where the "presence of displaying the fireworks display prefetch" and the "pending information display feature previewing" are executed in combination, the movable effect member is moved so as to overlap the three-length ball that is the target of the preview preview. When the shaku ball is displayed in the hold display area, the effect display operation according to the hold promotion such that the pyrotechnic person performs an action is performed on the three slide ball, and the movable effect member holds the hold for each play display operation It can appear so as to overlap with the display area and perform operations such as deformation.

(Composition pattern 2)
In addition, in the case of combined execution of "presence notice of fireworks reading" and "notice of change in number of pending information changes", the fireworks displayer is made to appear under the condition that the number of pending information is 4 or less. It is possible to execute the firework teacher's advance notice by reducing the number of teachers. In this case, a situation may be considered in which a three-sized ball to be subjected to pre-reading advance notice is displayed in the pending display area without the number of pending information pieces becoming 4 or less, but when such a situation occurs, It is desirable not to execute the firework teacher's advance notice as cancellation.

(Composition pattern 3)
Furthermore, in the case of executing "Holding information display feature prior warning notice" and "Holding information number change prefetching notice" in combination, it is considered as an object of the advance warning on condition that the number of the pending information becomes 4 or less. The movable effect member can be moved so as to overlap the three-length ball.

(Composition pattern 4)
Furthermore, all pre-reading notices such as “presence of“ presence of display of fireworks display ”,“ pre-notice of pre-reading of holding information display feature ”, and“ pre-notice of change in number of held information ”may be executed in combination. In this case, for example, the pyrotechnician may be made to appear and the movable effect member may be moved so as to overlap the three-length ball that is the target of the advance notice, on condition that the number of pieces of holding information is four or less. .

  Further, as the complex pattern of pre-reading advance notice, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be made different among a plurality of complex patterns. For example, the expectation for the jackpot may change in the order of composite pattern 4> composite pattern 3> composite pattern 2> composite pattern 1.

  As an execution mode of the pre-reading notice, it may be possible to change to another pre-reading notice of another type and execute it while executing one pre-reading notice. In this case, for example, it is preferable that there is a possibility of being changed to a different type of prefetch notice, only when the hold information targeted for the prefetch notice corresponds to the big hit decision.

  In addition, as an execution mode of the pre-reading notice, during execution of pre-reading notice, the drawing for deciding whether or not to end the pre-reading notice on the way is performed for each digest of the suspension information. It may be terminated during execution. In this case, it is preferable to complete the pre-reading advance notice so as not to win the above-mentioned lottery when the pending information to be subjected to the pre-reading advance notification indicates a big hit.

  With regard to the “presence for reading a pyrotechnician”, the effect (effect pattern) being executed may be promoted to a different effect.

  Although the effect pattern differs in at least a part of effect mode every time the name is different, for example, the aspect of sound or light may be the same while the display mode is different.

  The pseudo-series based on the gem stock information may perform two or more temporary stop displays (three or more variable displays).

  Even if there is only one special symbol, the "preserving notice number change pre-notice notice" can be applied. For example, when the number of pending holdings is four, up to two pending images are individually displayed in the first pending display area, and when there are three or more pieces of pending information, the corresponding pending image is displayed in the second pending display area In the second hold display area, for example, a hold image with a notation such as “× 2” is displayed, and the display is tentatively determined on the condition that the hold information is reduced by one in three or more states. The hold image may be displayed in an aspect.

  The size of the retention image overlapping the movable effect member may be larger or smaller than the outer shape of the movable effect member, or may be the same size.

  As for the effect pattern in which the name of the effect pattern includes “button”, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in response to the operation of the pressing operation button or the like.

  The "pre-reading advance notice" is executed from the establishment of the hold information to the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold information, but is executed from the establishment of the hold information to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol based on the hold information It may be done.

  The demonstration displays (1) to (4) may be executable in any effect mode.

  For example, a character (reel character) having a reel with a number such as “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. on the outer periphery is provided, and the reel is stopped multiple times during one change of a special symbol. The history of the numbers displayed and stopped and displayed may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and the probability of hitting the change may be suggested according to the mode of the history.

  In addition, an effect pattern capable of performing a plurality of button operations (for example, three times) is provided. In this effect pattern, for example, each time the player performs a button operation, for example, (A) image, (B) image, (C) image It is also possible to display one of the plurality of images, and to indicate the expectation of the big hit by combining the images displayed three times.

  In the above embodiment, the special winning opening shutter or shutter surface protrudes or retracts in the front-rear direction or tilts in the front-rear direction, but sliding in the left-right direction opens or closes the special winning opening, or around the vertical axis The big winning opening can be opened and closed by opening and closing the big winning opening by turning, or arranging two big winning opening shutters in parallel, and expanding the interval between the two big winning opening shutters at the time of opening. May be

  Further, the surface shape of the large winning opening shutter or shutter surface may be a sawtooth rough surface, an uneven surface, a wavy surface, or a shape in which a plurality of convex portions are discretely disposed on the entire surface. According to this, it is possible to decelerate the advancing speed of the gaming ball more effectively.

  In the above embodiment, the special winning opening has a characteristic configuration. For example, the same special winning opening shutter as that described above or the shutter surface is applied to a blade member as an ordinary electric winning combination, and the start opening is over. It is also possible to enable winning or control corresponding to this.

  The "deceleration" of the progressing speed of the gaming ball expressed in the description of the above embodiment means that the gaming ball is also stopped.

  As another example of the third to fifth modifications, the entire area covered by the members (the upper stage and the main stage, etc.) constituting the stage may be set as the big winning opening.

  When a plurality of large winning openings are provided, the prescribed number of winnings may be varied for each large winning opening, or the number of winning balls may be varied. For example, as another example of the second modification, for the first large winning opening, the prescribed number of winnings per round is five, the number of winning balls per winning is five, etc., and the second large winning opening For example, the prescribed number of winnings per round may be 10, the number of winning balls per winning may be 15, or the like.

  In the case of achieving a prize exceeding the prescribed prize number by the interpal during the round, for example, the following opening / closing pattern in which the estimated prize number at the first opening and the estimated prize number at the opening after closing the round are changed May be provided. Specifically, in the case where the prescribed number of winnings per round is 10, an opening / closing pattern such that the estimated number of winnings at the first opening is eight and the estimated number of winnings at the later opening is four, and the first opening In some cases, an open / close pattern may be provided such that the estimated number of winnings is six and the estimated number of winnings is six at the time of opening later. According to such an open / close pattern, it is possible to realize a specification in which the process of the over winning itself is different although the number of over winnings is the same.

  In addition, the launch timing with which the winning number can be expected may be notified each time the big winning opening is closed before the round game is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged without realizing the over prize even if the firing operation is stopped halfway in the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, as for notification of the scheduled grant quantity, when a plurality of big winning openings are opened in one big hit gaming state, the number corresponding to each big winning opening may be notified. For example, the total of the planned grant quantity is "2500", and the planned number of prize balls based on the winning of the first big winning opening is "1500", and the planned prize of the number based on the winning of the second big winning opening If "1000" is the predetermined prize ball number pertaining to the first large winning opening "1500", the notification to display the scheduled number ball number pertaining to the second large winning opening "1000" Can.

  As a modified example of the small hitting probability, for example, either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have a higher probability than the other. In this case, the one with a low probability of small hit includes one not winning in small hit (winning probability 0%). In addition, there is no possibility that a person with a high probability of winning a small hit will not win a small hit, but may be a probability that all wins except for a big hit will be won. For example, when the update range of the random numbers for collision determination is 0 to 255, the big hit probability may be 1/256 and the small hit probability may be 255/256.

  As a modification of the lottery (ordinary symbol game lottery) related to the opening of the second starting port, the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch in one or both of the non-time-short game state and the time-short game state Even if this is done, it may be decided whether or not to open uniquely, without performing a lottery relating to the opening. For example, in the non-time-saving game state, it may be always opened without a lottery, and may be opened without a lottery in a time-saving game state. In the case where only one of the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is determined to be unlottery, if the person who falls under the non-lottery is the non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is opened by lottery. If the person who falls under the no-lottery state is the short-time game state, it may be provided with the case where it becomes non-opening in the lottery in the non-time-short game state. That is, the probability that the time saving game state is relatively open will be higher than the non-time saving game state. In addition, for the opening pattern of the wing member, two or more types are provided, for example, 1 time × 1 time opening, 2 seconds × 2 time opening, etc., and a plurality of opening patterns A lottery may be made as to which open pattern to use.

  When the variation example of the lottery related to the small hitting probability and the opening of the second starting opening described above is applied to each embodiment described above, for example, if the number of predetermined winnings in the small hitting is two, the big winning opening before opening. By the interval between rounds or the interval during rounds between the opening of the big winning opening, it is possible to realize three or more over winnings exceeding the prescribed winning number even in the small hitting. For example, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 255/256, and in the non-time-saving game state, it is not opened in the non-lottery game In such a case, in the time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain a large number of winning balls by small hits, and it is possible to further develop gameplay. In addition, when the big hit probability of the first special symbol is 1/256, the small hit probability is 1/256, and the lost probability is 254/256, it is in the interval between rounds before the big winning opening is open or between the big winning opening. The interval during the round enables three or more over wins that exceed the prescribed number of wins even with a small number of small hits.

  As a display related to the special winning opening shutter and winning, for example by providing a ball detection sensor in the vicinity of the left end and near the right end, notification of the expected number of winnings per round and the actual number of winnings by meter display or numerical display in bar graph You may do it. For example, during a predetermined period until the special winning opening is released, when the game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor on the right end side, the expected winning number is added and updated by meter display or numerical display, while ball detection on the left end side When the game ball is detected by the sensor, the expected number of winnings is updated by the meter display or the numerical display, and when the special winning opening is opened, the finally updated numerical value is presented according to the numerical value. For example, display effects such as “maximum winning !!”, “middle winning!” Or “small winning” may be performed.

  A plurality of stage members (upper stage, main stage, etc.) may be provided in one big winning opening.

  The special winning opening may be provided with a specific area inside, and when the gaming ball passes through the specific area in the big hit gaming state, it may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state.

  The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines including pachislot machines, roulette machines, or slot machines as gaming machines.

  Further, it goes without saying that those according to the above-described embodiment and modification can be combined as appropriate.

  Based on the above-mentioned embodiment or modification, basic composition and an effect of the present invention are enumerated as a supplementary note below.

(Appendix A1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A direction change device (e.g., a direction change device 110) capable of changing the rolling direction of game media in the game area;
The turning device is
A receiver (eg, for example, capable of receiving a plurality of gaming media and changing the rolling direction thereof, and discharging the plurality of received gaming media by a predetermined number through the first ejection area (eg, ejection port 111B) Kloen 111),
A posture change mechanism (e.g., for example, a plurality of game media received by the receiver can be discharged through the second discharge area (e.g., the upper surface opening 111C) by changing the posture of the receiver according to the number of received game media , Seesaw mechanism 112),
It is characterized by having.

  According to such a configuration, a state in which the game balls are discharged by a predetermined number through the discharge port 111B and a state in which the plurality of game balls are discharged together through the upper surface opening 111C is accepted As it can be generated, it is possible to be rich in the behavior change of the gaming ball and to make it easy to be interested in the movement of the gaming ball.

(Appendix A2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The receiver has a body (eg, body 111A) having a concave interior,
The first discharge area is formed to penetrate from the inside to the outside of the main body,
The second discharge area is an area different from the first discharge area, and is formed to be able to discharge a plurality of game media from the inside to the outside of the main body,
The posture change mechanism is
A posture change member (for example, an arm 112A) in which the receiver is provided on one end side and a weight member (for example, balance weight 112B) is provided on the other end side;
A support member (for example, a support shaft 113) for supporting the posture change member such that the one end side of the posture change member can be displaced to a first position and a second position lower than the first position;
Have
The posture change member is
When the gaming medium is not received by the receiver, the weight member supports the one end side to be positioned at the first position,
When a predetermined number or more of game media are received by the receptor, the weight of the game media supports the one end side to be positioned at the second position,
The receptor is
When the one end side is located at the first position, the game medium received inside the main body can be discharged through the first discharge area while being rollable inside the main body,
When the one end side is located at the second position, the game medium received inside the main body can be discharged through the second discharge area.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game rich in behavior change of the gaming ball with a simple mechanism without using a driving means such as a motor, and also the weight of the accepted gaming ball and the weight of the balance weight 112B. In response to the change of the supporting posture of the arm 112A, when one end side is displaced from the high position to the low position, it is possible to be interested in that many game balls are discharged from the clown 111, and A novel gimmick rich in behavior change can be realized.

(Appendix A3)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
A passing area (for example, a large winning opening 37) provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Game value giving means (for example, a payout device 83) capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the passage area;
The receiver is characterized in that when the posture is changed by the posture change mechanism, the receiver is in a posture capable of directing the second discharge area to the passage area and discharging a plurality of game media.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of gaming balls are discharged collectively from the clon 111 through the upper surface opening 111C, these gaming balls are guided to the big winning opening 37, and thus more gaming balls are provided. This can contribute to the occurrence of an advantageous situation for the player, which in turn can further enhance the interest of the game.

(Appendix B1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A passage area (for example, the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, LED unit 5) capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information (for example, a special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means;
Game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that performs control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the variable display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area while the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, the specific aspect of the identification information Hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing hold information (for example, start storage, three-scale ball hold information) including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
Reserve image display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) capable of displaying a reserve image (for example, a three-length ball) as an image corresponding to the reserve information stored in the reserve information storage means;
The display of the hold image corresponding to the hold information based on whether or not the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is specific hold information indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. Holding image display mode temporary determination means (for example, sub CPU 71) capable of temporarily determining one of a plurality of display modes including a special display mode (for example, a colored display color);
The identification information display means can start variable display of the identification information based on the hold information, on condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed,
When the identification information is variably displayed by the identification information display unit based on the stored suspension information, the suspension information storage unit may reduce the number of storages of suspension information by deleting the suspension information.
The reserved image display means is
When the storage number of the suspension information in the suspension information storage means is less than or equal to a specific number (for example, 4), the first display area (for example, the first three measurement balls) Can be displayed in the hold display area 610),
When the number of storages of the suspension information in the suspension information storage means is larger than the specific number, the second display area (for example, the second three-scale ball suspension display area 620) displays the suspension image corresponding to at least the specific number of suspension information. Can be displayed on),
After the number of storages of the suspension information is larger than the specific number, the number of the storages decreases, and when the suspension image can be displayed in the first display area, the suspension image display mode temporary determination unit When there is a reserve image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reserve image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
When the number of storages of the suspension information is greater than the specific number and the number of storages does not decrease, even if there is a suspension image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the suspension image display mode temporary determination unit The present invention is characterized in that the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in a display mode (for example, a display color of white) different from the special display mode.

  According to such a configuration, when the reserved image (three measure balls) is displayed in the second three-syllabary ball reserve display area 620, the color display color is displayed as a special display mode when the number of stored reserve information decreases. If there is a provisionally determined holding image, the holding image is displayed in the first three-measure ball holding display area 610 in a colored display color as a special display mode, while the number of storages of holding information is larger than the specific number If there is no decrease in the first display mode even if there is a reserve image for which the color display color has been temporarily determined as the special display mode, the hold image is a white display color with a display mode different from the special display mode. It will be displayed in the display area 610. As a result, the regularity of the pattern in which the reserved image is displayed in the special display mode is broken, so it is possible to make the advance notice with such a reserved image novel and surprising, and hence the fun of the game. It can be enhanced.

(Appendix B2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The passage area is
A first passage area (e.g., the first start port 211);
And a second passage area different from the first passage area (e.g., a second start port 241);
The specific gaming state transition judging means
First specified gaming state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area;
And second specified game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the specified game state on condition that game media has passed through the second passing area.
The identification information display means
First identification information display means (e.g., first special symbol display) capable of fluctuating display and stop display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) based on the determination result by the first specific gaming state transition determination means Part 53),
Second identification information display means (for example, second special symbol display) capable of fluctuating display and stop display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the determination result by the second specific gaming state transition determination means Section 54), and
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the first identification information display means or the second identification information display means, the gaming state control means is in the specific gaming state. It is possible to control to shift,
The pending information storage means is
When the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display means, the game medium is used as the game medium When the variable display of the first identification information is suspended based on the passage of the first identification information, the first suspension information including information indicating whether or not the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, A first hold information storage unit (for example, a first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63) capable of storing the first predetermined number as an upper limit;
When the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display means, or when the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display means, the game medium for the second passing area is displayed. When the variable display of the second identification information is suspended based on the passage of the second identification information, the second suspension information including information indicating whether or not the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, Including a second hold information storage unit (for example, a second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63) capable of storing a second predetermined number as an upper limit;
The first hold information is provided on the condition that the first identification information display means is displaying the first identification information stopped and the second identification information display means is displaying the second identification information stopped. It is possible to start variable display of the first identification information based on
The second hold information is provided on the condition that the second identification information display means is displaying the second identification information stopped and the first identification information display means is displaying the first identification information stopped. It is possible to start variable display of the second identification information based on
The first hold information storage means is configured to erase the first hold information when the first identification information is variably displayed by the first identification information display means based on the stored first hold information. The number of storage of pending information may decrease.
The second hold information storage means erases the second hold information when the second identification information is variably displayed by the second identification information display means based on the stored second hold information. The number of storage of pending information may decrease.
The reserved image display mode temporary determination means
The first hold information stored in the first hold information storage means is based on whether or not the first identification hold information indicating that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. The display mode of the hold image corresponding to the 1 hold information can be determined as any one of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
The second hold information stored in the second hold information storage means is based on whether or not the second identification hold information indicating that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. (2) The display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information can be determined as any one of a plurality of display modes including the special display mode,
The reserved image display means is
The hold image can be displayed as an image corresponding to the first hold information and the second hold information stored in the first hold information storage means and the second hold information storage means,
When the sum of the storage number of the first suspension information in the first suspension information storage means and the storage number of the second suspension information in the second suspension information storage means is less than or equal to the specified number, the first suspension less than the specified number A hold image corresponding to the information and the second hold information can be displayed in the first display area,
When the sum of the storage number of the first suspension information in the first suspension information storage means and the storage number of the second suspension information in the second suspension information storage means is larger than the specific number, at least the first number of the specific numbers The hold image corresponding to the hold information and the second hold information can be displayed in the second display area,
The sum total of the number of storages of the first suspension information and the number of storages of the second suspension information is larger than the specific number, and after the total of the number of storages decreases, the suspension image can be displayed in the first display area When in the state, when there is a reserved image temporarily determined as the special display mode by the reserved image display mode temporary determination means, the reserved image can be displayed in the first display area in the special display mode,
When the sum of the number of storages of the first suspension information and the number of storages of the second suspension information is greater than the specific number, the total of the number of storages does not decrease. Even if there is a reserve image temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reserve image can be displayed in the first display area in a display mode different from the special display mode,
The specified number may be equal to or more than the first predetermined number and equal to or more than the second predetermined number.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where the hold image (three-measure ball) is displayed in the second three-shot ball hold display area 620, the total number of stored first hold information and second hold information even if only one If there is a reserve image in which the color display color is temporarily determined as the special display mode, the reserve image is displayed in the first three-size ball reserve display area 610 in the color display color of the special display mode. If the total of the storage numbers of the 1 suspension information and the 2nd suspension information does not decrease in a state where the total number of stored information is larger than the specific number, the suspension image may be the suspension image whose color display color is temporarily determined as a special display mode Is displayed in the first three-size ball hold display area 610 in the white display color of the display mode different from the special display mode. Such a specific number (four) is a first predetermined number (four) or more, which is the storable number of the first suspension information, and a second predetermined number (four), which is the storable number of the second suspension information It is above. Therefore, when the total of the storage numbers of the first holding information and the second holding information is larger than the specific number, both the first holding information and the second holding information are necessarily stored. As a result, the regularity of the pattern in which the hold image corresponding to the hold information is displayed in the color display color of the special display mode is broken according to the stored numbers of both the first hold information and the second hold information. It is possible to make the pre-reading notice using such a reserved image fresh and unexpected, and thus to enhance the interest of the game.

(Appendix B3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The reserved image display means is
With respect to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means, the hold image can be individually displayed in the first display area,
One hold image can be displayed in the second display area with respect to the specific number of hold information stored in the hold information storage unit,
It is possible to display the reserved image corresponding to the first display area in the special display mode on condition that the one reserved image is not displayed in the second display area.

  According to such a configuration, when the second three-scale ball suspension display area 620 is not displayed from the state where one suspension image is displayed, the suspension image corresponding to the first three-scale ball suspension display area 610 is specially displayed. Because the color display color of the aspect is individually displayed, the color display color as a special display aspect when the display position of the retention image is switched from the second three-scale ball retention display area 620 to the first three-dimensional ball retention display area 610 It is possible to distinguish the reserved image displayed on the screen from the others and to make it easy to recognize a so-called pre-read notice.

(Appendix C1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A passage area (for example, the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information (for example, special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means Part 54),
Game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that performs control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the variable display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area while the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, the specific aspect of the identification information Hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing hold information (for example, start storage, three-scale ball hold information) including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
Based on whether or not the hold information stored in the hold information storage means is specific hold information indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, a specific effect (for example Specific effect determination means (for example, sub CPU 71) capable of determining whether or not to execute such an effect);
And an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing the specific effect when the specific effect determining means determines execution of the specific effect.
The identification information display means can start variable display of the identification information based on the hold information, on condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed,
The specific effect is an effect capable of updating the number of displayed specific images (for example, a character image 800 of a pyrotechnician),
The effect executing means is
When execution of the specific effect is determined based on the predetermined holding information by the specific effect determining means, the specific effect can be performed before the identification information is variably displayed based on at least the predetermined holding information. And
During at least a part of the period during which identification information based on the predetermined holding information is being variably displayed in the identification information display means (for example, the holding promotion timing), a plurality of identification information during fluctuation effects (for example, effects based on a promotion pattern) Can do any of the)
When the specific effect is executed based on the predetermined holding information, the specific image can be displayed even during the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined holding information,
It is characterized in that the effect during identification information change performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information can be changed to the effect during different identification information change based on the number of display of the specific image.

  According to such a configuration, the identification is performed such that the number of specific images (the fireworks displayer) is updated before the identification information (the special symbol, the decorative symbol) is variably displayed based on the predetermined holding information to be subjected to the advance notice. According to the number of display of the pyrotechnician who becomes a specific image during at least a partial period during which the identification information based on the predetermined holding information is being variably displayed while the effect relating to the firework master prefetch warning is executed as the effect. One of a plurality of identification information fluctuating effect (effect based on a promotion pattern) is executed. And, even during the fluctuation display of the identification information based on the predetermined holding information, the specific image may be displayed remaining, and during the fluctuation display, the identification being performed based on the number of the remaining display of the specific image The information may be changed during the information change to something different. In this way, it is possible to perform a specific effect relating to the change in the effect during identification information fluctuation performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information based on the predetermined suspension information, so novelty and surprise for the predetermined suspension information It is possible to realize a certain pre-reading notice, which in turn can enhance the interest of the game.

(Appendix C2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The effect executing means is
When the suspension image corresponding to the suspension information is displayed and the identification information is variably displayed based on the suspension information, the suspension image corresponding to the suspension information is a currently used suspension image (for example, the three-sized ball display area) Can be displayed as 600
The current use suspension image can be displayed in a plurality of different display modes (for example, display colors) during at least a part of the period during which the identification information is being variably displayed in the identification information display means.
While the variable display of identification information based on the predetermined hold information, the display mode of the current use hold image can be changed based on the number of display of the specific image,
The display mode of the current use reserve image is characterized in that it is possible to suggest that the identification information in the variable display may be stopped and displayed in the specific mode.

  According to such a configuration, the currently used reserved image (the three-sized ball) is displayed based on the remaining number of display of the specific image (the pyrotechnician) during the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined reserved information to be subjected to the prefetch notice. The display color of the three-length ball in the display area 600 is changed, and the display color of the currently used suspension image may cause the identification information in the variable display to be stopped and displayed in a specific manner, that is, the jackpot expected degree is suggested Since it is possible to pay attention not only to the number of remaining display of the specific image but also to the display color of the currently used hold image, while the variable information of the identification information based on the predetermined hold information targeted for the prefetch notice is displayed. It can enhance the effect.

(Appendix C3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
A specific area (e.g., a lost opening 242) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Effect holding information storage means (for example, work RAM 73) capable of storing effect holding information (for example, gem holding information) with a predetermined number as an upper limit based on passage of game media through the specific area;
It is possible to provide a game value on the condition that a game medium has passed through the passage area, while a game value giving means (for example, a payout device) does not give a game value even if a game medium passes through the specific area. 83) and
The effect executing means can display the effect holding image (for example, the gems of the jewelry display area 700 and the jewelry hold display area 710) corresponding to the effect holding information stored in the effect holding information storage means Yes,
An effect-pending image determining means (for example, a display-image determining means) that determines a display mode (for example, display color) of the effect-reserving image based on whether or not the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage means is the specific suspension information. , And the sub CPU 71).

  According to such a configuration, although the effect holding information (jewel holding information) does not contribute to the provision of the game value (game ball), the effect holding image (the jewelry display area 700 and the like) corresponding to the effect holding information Since the gems of the gem reserve display area 710 are displayed and the display mode (display color) of the effect reserve image can be determined based on the specific reserve information, it is possible to prevent the situation where the game value is excessively given. Attention can also be paid to the display mode of the suspension image for effect, and the effect can be further enhanced.

(Appendix D1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (eg, game area 1 p) having a game area where game media (eg, game balls) can roll;
A passage area (for example, the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information (for example, special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means Part 54),
Game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that performs control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the variable display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area while the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, the specific aspect of the identification information Hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing hold information (for example, start storage, three-scale ball hold information) including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
When the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, other suspension information stored before the predetermined suspension information stored based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area, It is possible to decide whether or not to execute a specific effect (for example, an effect relating to a firecracker look-ahead notice) based on whether or not the identification information is stop-displayed in the specific mode. Specific effect determination means (for example, sub CPU 71),
And an effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing the specific effect when the specific effect determining means determines execution of the specific effect.
Whether the specific gaming state transition determining means is caused to shift to the specific gaming state based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means, on condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means It is possible to determine whether or not
The effect execution means, when the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the other suspension information by the specific effect determination means, the specific game state transition determination means based on at least the other suspension information It is characterized in that the specific effect can be performed before it is determined whether or not to shift to the state.

  According to such a configuration, although the specific effect is executed when the predetermined holding information is newly stored apparently, the transition of the specific gaming state internally based on the other existing holding information Since a specific effect (presence of a fireworks display read ahead) is executed before a judgment result is obtained, it is possible to realize a novel and unexpected look-ahead notice by such a specific effect, and thus to enhance the interest of the game. it can.

(Appendix D2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The specific effect is an effect capable of updating the number of displayed specific images (for example, a character image 800 of a pyrotechnician),
The effect executing means is
Any of a plurality of identification information fluctuating effects (for example, effects based on a fireworks display reduction pattern) during at least a part of the period (for example, holding promotion timing) in which the identification information is in a variable display in the identification information display means Can be done,
When the specific effect is executed based on the other hold information, the specific image can be displayed even after the variation display of the identification information based on the other hold information,
It is characterized in that it is possible to change the effect during identification information fluctuation to be executed during the fluctuation display of identification information based on the other hold information to a different identification information fluctuation during effect based on the number of displayed specific images.

  According to such a configuration, in the specific effect relating to the pyrotechnician pre-reading notice targeted for existing holding information, the specific image during at least a partial period (holding promotion timing) in which the identification information (decorative symbol 500) is being variably displayed. One of a plurality of effects during the identification information change (effect based on the promotion pattern) is executed according to the number of displays of the pyrotechnician who becomes the. And, even during the variable display of the identification information based on the other existing holding information, the specific image may be displayed remaining, and during the variable display, it is under execution based on the number of remaining display of the specific image. There is a case where the effect during the identification information fluctuation of is changed to a different one. In this way, it is possible to perform a specific effect related to the change in the effect during identification information fluctuation that is executed during the fluctuation display of identification information based on other suspension information, so it is novel and surprising for other suspension information It is possible to realize a certain pre-reading notice, which in turn can enhance the interest of the game.

(Appendix D3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The effect executing means is
When the suspension image corresponding to the suspension information is displayed and the identification information is variably displayed based on the suspension information, the suspension image corresponding to the suspension information is a currently used suspension image (for example, the three-sized ball display area) Can be displayed as 600
While the variable display of identification information based on the other hold information, it is possible to change the display mode (for example, display color) of the current use hold image based on the display number of the specific image,
The display mode of the current use reserve image is characterized in that it is possible to suggest that the identification information in the variable display may be stopped and displayed in the specific mode.

  According to such a configuration, while the variable display of the identification information (decorative pattern 500) based on the other existing hold information is being performed, the currently used hold image (the three lengths) based on the number of display of the specific image (the pyrotechnician 800). The display mode (display color) of the three-length ball in the ball display area 600 is changed, and the display mode of the current use suspension image can stop and display the identification information in the variable display in a specific mode (big hit symbol) Since the gender is suggested, it is possible to focus attention not only on the number of display of the specific image but also on the display mode of the currently used hold image, while the identification display of the identification information based on other hold information targeted for pre-reading notice is changed. , Can enhance the rendering effect.

(Appendix E1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A passage area (for example, the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area When,
Identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information (for example, special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means Part 54),
Game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that performs control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
When the variable display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area while the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, the specific aspect of the identification information Hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing hold information (for example, start storage, three-scale ball hold information) including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined number as an upper limit When,
Hold image display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of displaying a hold image (for example, a three-length ball of the first three-shot ball hold display area 610) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold information storage means; ,
And a reserve display symbol (for example, a movable effect member 42A) displaceable so that at least a part of the reserve image displayed on the reserve image display means overlaps.
The identification information display means can start variable display of the identification information based on the hold information, on condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed,
The holding image display means can move and display a holding image on which at least a part of the holding display combination overlaps, based on the identification information being variably displayed by the identification information display means.
The hold display character is displaceable based on the hold image display means moving and displaying at least a part of the hold image overlapping, and at least a part of the hold image after the movement display after the displacement It is characterized in that it is possible to overlap.

  According to such a configuration, interest and attention can be drawn not only to the moving display of the holding image (three measure ball) but also to the behavior of the holding display character (the movable effect member 42A) displaced so as to overlap the holding image. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel and unexpected presentation gimmick and enhance the presentation effect, which in turn can enhance the interest of the game.

(Appendix E2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The hold display corresponding to the hold image on which at least a part of the hold display combination overlaps is the hold display based on whether or not the hold information indicating that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode. It further comprises a hold display feature display mode determination means capable of determining the display mode (emission color) of the item,
The reserved display combination is characterized in that it is possible to perform display based on the display mode determined by the reserved display combination display mode determining means.

  According to such a configuration, the display mode (emission color of the light emitting lens 42B) of the hold display combination differs depending on whether or not the hold information targeted for the advance notice is the specified hold information, and as so-called advance notice Since it is strongly impressed that the identification information (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (big hit symbol), the rendering effect can be enhanced as the effect gimmick according to the advance notice.

(Appendix E3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The hold display feature is
A movable member (e.g., a blade) movable to a first position (non-projecting position) and a second position (projecting position) different from the first position;
In relation to the movable member moving from the first position to the second position, it is possible to perform display based on the display mode determined by the hold display feature display mode determining means It features.

  According to such a configuration, the display mode of the hold display combination is different in relation to the protrusion of the movable member (feather) of the hold display combination (the movable effect member 42A), and so on. Since it is strongly impressed that the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (big hit symbol), it is possible to enhance the effect as a presentation gimmick related to the advance notice.

(Appendix F1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A passage area (for example, the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241) through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area When,
Variation display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of determining a variation display pattern (for example, variation pattern) of identification information (for example, special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means;
Identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, the second special symbol display unit 54) for performing the fluctuation display of the identification information based on the fluctuation display pattern determined by the fluctuation display pattern determination unit;
Effect pattern determination means (for example, sub CPU 71) for determining an effect pattern based on the fluctuation display pattern determined by the fluctuation display pattern determination means;
Effect executing means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing an effect according to the fluctuation display of the identification information in the identification information display means based on the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means;
A game state control means (for example, a game state control means) which performs control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) based on the determination result by the specific game state shift determination means. Main CPU 61),
A special game which is relatively more advantageous than a non-special game state (for example, non-probability non-time change non-time game state) until the number of times of variation display of identification information reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 184 times) after termination of the specific game state A special gaming state control unit (for example, the main CPU 61) that can be controlled to a state (for example, a certain variation time gaming state);
The variation display pattern determination means performs variation display of the identification information when the variation display count of the identification information after the end of the specific gaming state reaches a specific number (for example, the number of specific variations) As the pattern, it is possible to determine a specific variation display pattern (for example, reach loss variation patterns 14 and 15),
In the case where the specific variation display pattern is determined by the variation display pattern determination means, the effect pattern determination means may
If a specific effect pattern (for example, "Firework door door breakthrough reach door red", "Female door breakthrough reach door red") is not determined in the special gaming state, the specific effect pattern can be determined,
If the specific effect pattern is determined in the special gaming state, a special effect pattern different from the specific effect pattern (for example, "Fireworkman door breakthrough reach door blue", "Female door breakthrough reach door blue") ) Can be determined,
The effect executing means is
When the specific effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination means, a specific effect is executed as the effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the identification information,
When the special effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination means, the special effect is executed as the effect accompanying the fluctuation display of the identification information.

  According to such a configuration, the special variation display pattern (variation pattern) when the variation display number of the identification information reaches the specific number (specific variation number) in the special gaming state (probable variation short gaming state) If the reach loss fluctuation pattern 14, 15) is determined, a specific effect pattern (“pyrophorist door breakthrough reach door red,” “female door breakthrough reach door red”) is not determined, and the specific number of times is specific. While a rendering pattern is determined, if a specific rendering pattern is determined, a special rendering pattern (“Grounder door breakthrough reach door blue”, “female door breakthrough reach door”) that differs from the specific rendering pattern in a specific number of times Blue ") is determined. That is, in the special gaming state, while the specific effect based on the specific effect pattern is executed up to the specific number of times, the number of execution times can be reduced as much as possible, thereby enhancing the degree of attention to the specific effect and its usefulness. At the same time, it is possible to effectively exhibit the effect of the specific effect.

(Appendix F2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
In the case where the specific effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determination means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the identification information display means than in the case where the special effect pattern is determined. It is characterized by a high probability.

  According to such a configuration, a specific effect pattern is more specific when a specific effect is executed based on a specific effect pattern ("Fireworkman door breakthrough reach door red," Female door breakthrough reach door red "). The identification information (special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (big hit symbol) than when special rendition is executed based on (“Firework teacher door breakthrough reach door blue”, “female door breakthrough reach door blue”) As the probability of playing is increased, that is, the degree of expectation for the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) is increased, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the specific effect in the special gaming state (probable change time short gaming state), and in the special gaming state It can effectively prevent the decline in interest.

(Appendix F3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The specified number of times includes a first specified number of times and a second specified number of times different from the first specified number of times,
The particular aspect includes a first particular aspect and a second particular aspect different from the first particular aspect.
The variation display pattern determination means
The variation display pattern when the number of times of variation display of identification information reaches the first number of specified times after the termination of the specific gaming state shifted based on the identification display being stopped and displayed in the first specific mode It is possible to determine a specific variation display pattern,
The variation display pattern when the number of times of variation display of identification information reaches the second number of specified times after the termination of the specific gaming state shifted based on the identification display being stopped and displayed in the second specific mode It is characterized in that the specific variation display pattern can be determined.

  According to such a configuration, the specific number of times (specific fluctuation) in which the specific fluctuation display pattern (reach loss fluctuation patterns 14 and 15) is determined in the special gaming state (certain short time gaming state) after the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) ends The number of times is the stop display mode of the identification information (special symbol) determined to shift to the specific gaming state before shifting to the special gaming state depending on whether the first specific aspect or the second specific aspect It will be different. That is, in the special gaming state, when there is a case where the specific effect is executed when the variation display number of the identification information reaches the first specific number, the specific effect is executed when the second specific number is reached In some cases, the specific effect can be performed irregularly, so it is difficult to catch the execution timing of such specific effect, and it can be felt as if the specific effect was performed by accident.

(Appendix G1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A rolling area (for example, a conduction opening 221) in which gaming media can roll in the gaming area;
Any of a plurality of passages including the first passage (for example, the ball passage leading to the first start opening 211) and the second passage (for example, the ball passage leading to the introduction opening 212) A sorting member (for example, sorting crank 230) that can be sorted
A first passage area (for example, the first start opening 211) through which the game medium which is distributed to the first passage by the distribution member and which passes through the first passage can pass;
The second passage area (for example, the second start opening 241) and the third passage through which the game medium received while being distributed to the second passage by the distribution member and passing through the second passage can be received A rolling member (e.g., Kluin 240) having a plurality of passage areas including an area (e.g., the missing port 242);
And a game value giving unit (for example, a payout device 83) capable of giving a game value on condition that a game medium has passed through the first passing area or the second passing area. .

  According to such a configuration, the game ball is distributed to one of the first passage and the second passage by the distribution member (the distribution crank 230), and the game balls distributed to the second passage are further rolled. After being received by the member (clune 240), it passes through the second passing area (second starting opening 241) to which the gaming value (gaming ball) is given, or passes through the third passing area (missing opening 242) As it will be different, it is possible to be rich in the behavior change of the gaming ball and to make it easy to be interested in the movement of the gaming ball.

(Appendix G2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
A specific gaming state transition that determines whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area or the second passing area Determination means (for example, main CPU 61);
The first specified gaming state (the first specified gaming state (), wherein the gaming value provided by the gaming value providing means is relatively reduced based on the determination made by the specific gaming state transition determining means to shift to the specific gaming state For example, the first special symbol big hit (probable variation 1) and the second specific gaming state (for example, the second special symbol big hit (probable variation) which is defined so that the gaming value provided by the gaming value giving means is relatively large. Game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to any one of a plurality of specific game states including 1) to 4)),
The gaming state control means plays the second passing area more than when it is determined by the specific gaming state transition determining means that the gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state based on passage of gaming media through the first passing area. It is easier to perform control to shift to the second specific gaming state when it is determined that the specific gaming state transition determining means shifts to the specific gaming state based on the passage of the medium.
The game value giving means does not give a game value even when a game medium passes through the third passing area.

  According to such a configuration, the game ball passes relatively to the second passing area (second starting opening 241) rather than the first passing area (first starting opening 211). Because it is easy to shift to the second specific gaming state (the second special symbol big hit (certain 1 to 4)) where the game value (game ball) increases, it is distributed to the second passage rather than the first passage, and the second Since the expectation that the game ball passes through the second passage area is higher than that of the three passage area (missing opening 242), it is possible to make the user more interested in the movement of the game ball. In addition, when the ball is distributed to the first passage, the ball is distributed to the first passage area, and when the ball is distributed to the second passage, the game ball passes through the second passage area or the third passage area. If the game ball passes the second passage area, the game value is higher than when the game ball passes the first passage area although the game value may not be awarded. Since it is easy to shift to the specific gaming state, it is possible to balance the case where it is distributed to the first passage and the case that it is distributed to the second passage so that the superiority and the inferiority do not get extremely. From this, it is possible to prevent a drop in interest for the game.

(Appendix G3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
A first effect (for example, variation display of the decorative symbol 500, etc.) can be executed based only on the passage of game media to the first passage area or the second passage area, and the game medium to the third passage area Provision of presentation execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing the second presentation (for example, demonstration display (2) to (4)) based only on the passage of
The effect executing means is a third effect (for example, a decorative symbol) based on both the passage of gaming media to the first passage area or the second passage region and the passage of gaming media to the third passage region. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a pseudo ream by 500).

  According to such a configuration, the passage of the game ball to the first passage area (the first start opening 211) or the second passage area (the second start opening 241) and the passage to the third passage area (the disconnection opening 242) Based on both the passage of the game ball, the first effect based on the passage of only one of them (such as the variable display of the decorative symbol 500) and the second effect (demonstration display (2) to (4)) Since it is possible to execute a different third effect (effect according to a pseudo ream), it is possible to execute a plurality of effects in various ways so that the effects are different according to the passing area through which the game ball is passed. Can enhance the interest of

(Appendix H1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A first passage area through which game media can pass in the game area (for example, the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241);
Specific gaming state transition determining means (for example, main) determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information (for example, special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means Part 54),
Variation display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of determining a variation display pattern (for example, variation pattern) of the identification information based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means;
Identification information display control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for performing control of causing the identification information display means to change and display the identification information based on the change display pattern determined by the change display pattern determination means;
After the identification information is variably displayed based on the variation display pattern determined by the variation display pattern determination means, the specific game is displayed based on the stop display of the identification information in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) Gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for performing control to shift to the state;
In the case where the identification information is fluctuatingly displayed in the identification information display means, and the fluctuation display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the first passage area, the identification information is specified for the identification information. Hold information storage means (for example, main RAM 63, work RAM 73) capable of storing hold information including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed in the form of a predetermined number as an upper limit;
A second passage area (for example, a missing port 242) through which game media can pass in the game area;
A variable display pattern capable of storing variable display pattern determination information (for example, gem hold information) capable of determining the variable display pattern based on passage of gaming media through the second passage area, with a predetermined number as an upper limit Information storage means for determination (for example, work RAM 73);
A game value giving unit (for example, a payout device 83) which can give a game value when a game medium passes through the first passage area, but does not give a game value even if a game medium passes through the second passage area. ), And,
The specific gaming state transition determining means can determine whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state based on the hold information stored in the hold information storage means,
The variation display pattern determination means determines the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means and the variation display pattern determination on condition that the variation display pattern determination information is stored in the variation display pattern determination information storage means. The variable display pattern can be determined based on the usage information.

  According to such a configuration, the game ball passes through the first passage area (the first starting opening 211, the second starting opening 241), and the identification information (special symbol, decorative symbol) is variably displayed by the passage of the game ball. When the game ball passes through the 2 passage area (missing opening 242), the fluctuation display pattern of the identification information (decorative design) is determined based on the fluctuation display pattern determination information (jewel reserve information) stored accordingly There is something to be done. That is, since the relativity is given to the fluctuation display of the identification information based on the passage of both the first passage area and the second passage area, and the interest and attention are attracted to the fluctuation display, the decoration as a novel and unexpected presentation As well as realizing variable display of symbols, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect, which in turn can enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since the game value (game ball) is not excessively imparted when the game ball passes through a plurality of passing areas such as the first passing area and the second passing area, the degree of attention to the change display of the decorative symbol The effect can be enhanced without diluting the

(Appendix H2)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, and no hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, and the variable display pattern determination information is stored in the variable display pattern determination information storage means. In the case of being stored, it is characterized in that there is provided an effect executing means capable of executing predetermined effects (for example, demonstration displays (2) to (4)) based on the information for variable display pattern determination.

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect (demonstration display (2) to (4)) is executed based on the storage number of the suspension information and the variable display pattern determination information (jewel suspension information). It is possible to make it easy for the game ball to pass through the 1 passage area (the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241) and the second passage area (the loose opening 242), thereby enhancing the interest of the game. it can. In addition, since the application of the variable display pattern determination information can be made different depending on the presence / absence of the hold information, and effects relating to the demonstration display can be executed in various ways, this also enhances the interest of the game. it can.

(Appendix H3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
In the effect execution means, identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, and no hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, and the variable display pattern determination information storage means is changed. In the case where the display pattern determination information is not stored, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, demonstration display (1)) different from the predetermined effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. It features.

  According to such a configuration, when neither the holding information nor the variable display pattern determination information (jewel holding information) is stored, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed as the predetermined condition, the specification different from the predetermined effect Since it is switched to the effect (demo display (1)), the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Appendix H4)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The gaming state control means includes a special gaming state (for example, a certain variation time short gaming state) and a non-special gaming state (for example, a non-probable variation non-short playing state) which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state than the special gaming state. , Can be controlled to any of the gaming state among the plurality of gaming state,
The effect executing means is
During the non-special game state, identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, and no hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, and the variable display pattern determination information storage means When the variable display pattern determination information is stored in the table, predetermined effects (for example, demonstration display (2), (3)) can be performed based on the variable display pattern determination information,
When the variable display pattern determination information is stored in the variable display pattern determination information storage unit regardless of whether or not the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit during the special gaming state. It is characterized in that a predetermined effect (for example, demonstration display (4)) can be executed based on the information for variable display pattern determination.

  According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern determination information (in accordance with the condition) regardless of whether it is in the non-special game state (non-probable variation non-short play state) or in the special game state (probability change time short game state) Since it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (demonstration display) based on the gem holding information), the variable display pattern determination information stored in accordance with the passage of the gaming ball to the second passage area (hose port 242) is specified. This can be reflected in the effect of, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect and the interest of the game. Further, in the non-special game state, if there is no holding information (three-scale ball holding information), predetermined effects (demonstration display (2), (3)) are based on the variable display pattern determination information (jewel holding information). While it may be executed, in the special gaming state, regardless of whether or not the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed, a predetermined effect (pseudo series, demo, only on the basis of the information for variable display pattern determination Since the display (4) can be executed, the player determines the display state of the identification information and the presence or absence of the suspension information and the information for determining the variable display pattern when the predetermined effect is executed. It can be easily recognized whether or not it is a special gaming state.

(Appendix I1)
A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area (for example, game area 1p) on which game media (for example, game balls) can roll;
A first passage area through which game media can pass in the game area (for example, the first start opening 211, the second start opening 241);
Specific gaming state transition determining means (for example, main) determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) on condition that gaming media has passed through the first passing area CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information (for example, special symbol) based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means Part 54),
Game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that performs control to shift to the specific game state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode (for example, a big hit symbol) in the identification information display means;
In the case where the identification information is fluctuatingly displayed in the identification information display means, and the fluctuation display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the first passage area, the identification information is specified for the identification information. A first hold information storage unit (for example, the main RAM 63) capable of storing first hold information (for example, three-length ball hold information) including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed in a mode; Work RAM 73),
A second passage area (for example, a missing port 242) through which game media can pass in the game area;
And second hold information storage means (for example, work RAM 73) capable of storing second hold information (for example, gem hold information) with a predetermined number as the upper limit based on the game medium having passed through the second passing area. ,
A game value giving unit (for example, a payout device 83) which can give a game value when a game medium passes through the first passage area, but does not give a game value even if a game medium passes through the second passage area. )When,
An effect executing unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) capable of executing a predetermined effect;
The identification information display means can start variable display of the identification information based on the first hold information, on condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed,
In the effect executing means, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, and the first hold information is not stored in the first hold information storage means, and the second hold information storage means When the second hold information is stored in the second hold information, predetermined effects (for example, demonstration display (2) to (4)) can be performed based on the second hold information.

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect (demonstration display (2) to (4)) is not made according to the presence or absence of the second hold information (jewel hold information) that does not contribute to the provision of the game value (game ball). Since it can be executed at a definite timing, it is possible to realize a novel and surprising effect, and to enhance the interest of the game as well as the effect.

(Appendix I2)
The preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The gaming state control means includes a special gaming state (for example, a certain variation time short gaming state) and a non-special gaming state (for example, a non-probable variation non-short playing state) which is a relatively disadvantageous gaming state than the special gaming state. , Can be controlled to any of the gaming state among the plurality of gaming state,
The effect executing means is
During the non-special game state, the identification information is displayed on the identification information display means in a stop state, and the first hold information is not stored in the first hold information storage means, and the second hold information When the second hold information is stored in the storage means, a predetermined effect (for example, demonstration display (2), (3)) based on the second hold information can be executed,
When the second hold information is stored in the second hold information storage unit, regardless of whether or not the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit during the special gaming state, the second It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, pseudo link, demo display (4)) based on the hold information.

  According to such a configuration, in the non-special game state (non-probable variation non-short play state), if there is no first hold information (three-length ball hold information), it is determined based on the second hold information (jewel hold information). While effects (demo displays (2) and (3)) may be executed, it is related to whether or not the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed in the special gaming state (probable short time gaming state) Instead, since the predetermined effect (pseudo chain, demo display (4)) can be executed based only on the second hold information, the player can display the identification information in the case where the predetermined effect is performed. It is possible to easily recognize whether or not it is a special gaming state by determining whether the first holding information and the second holding information are present.

(Appendix I3)
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is
The gaming state control means
A plurality of gaming states including a special gaming state (e.g., a certain short time gaming state) and a non-special gaming state (e.g., a non-probable variation non-short playing state) that is relatively disadvantageous gaming state than the special gaming state Can be controlled to any of the game state,
In the non-special game state, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode (small hit symbol) on the identification information display means, it is possible to shift to a specific game state (for example, a small hit game state) After the end of the specific gaming state, it is possible to control the non-special gaming state,
The effect executing means is
While the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means during a predetermined period (for example, a special mode) in the non-special game state, the first hold information is stored in the first hold information storage means. And, when the second hold information is stored in the second hold information storage means, it is possible to execute a first predetermined effect (for example, demonstration display (3)) based on the second hold information Yes,
After the predetermined period has passed and during the non-special game state (for example, during the normal mode in the non-probability non-change time non-short game state), identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display means, and the first When the first hold information is not stored in the hold information storage means and the second hold information is stored in the second hold information storage means, the first hold information is stored based on the second hold information. A second predetermined effect (for example, demonstration display (2)) different from the predetermined effect can be performed.

  According to such a configuration, the end of the specific gaming state (small hit gaming state) in which the stop mode of the identification information is shifted in the special aspect (small hit symbol) during the non-special gaming state (non-probable variation non-short game state) After that, it is a non-special game state, but a predetermined effect (demonstration display (3)) executed based on the second hold information (jewel hold information) during a predetermined period (special mode) after the end of the specific game state. Since the effect mode of the predetermined effect (demonstration display (2)) executed based on the second hold information after the end of the predetermined period is different, it seems as if the predetermined period has shifted to an advantageous gaming state It can give an impression, which in turn can enhance the interest of the game.

1 game board 1p game area 4 liquid crystal display device 5 LED unit 26 launch device 32 first starting opening 33 second starting opening 34 wing member 35 passing gate 36 first large winning opening 37 large winning opening, second large winning opening 42A movable Effect member 42B light emitting lens 53 first special symbol display portion 54 second special symbol display portion 61 main CPU
63 Main RAM
71 Sub CPU
73 work RAM
83 Dispensing Device 110 Direction Changing Device 111 Cruin 111A Main Body 111B Outlet 111C Top Opening 112 Seesaw Mechanism 112A Arm 112B Balance Weight 113 Support Shaft 211 First Starting Port 221 Conductor 230 Distribution Crank 240 Clune 241 Second Starting Port 242 Ending Port 500 Decorative Pattern 610 First Three-Quarter Ball Hold Display Area 620 Second Three-Quarter Ball Hold Display Area 600 Second Three-Quarter Ball Hold Display Area 620 Second Three-Quarter Ball Hold Display Area 700 Such Gemstone Display Area 710 Gem hold display area 800 Character image (Fireworks teacher)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passage area through which game media can pass in the game area;
Specific gaming state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a relatively advantageous specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has passed through the passage area;
Identification information display means capable of fluctuating display and stop display of identification information based on the determination result by the specific gaming state transition determination means;
Gaming state control means for performing control to shift to the specific gaming state when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the identification information display means;
When the variable display of the identification information is suspended based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area while the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means, the specific aspect of the identification information Hold information storage means capable of storing hold information including information indicating whether or not to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined number as an upper limit;
Specific effect determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a specific effect based on passage of gaming media through the passage area;
And an effect executing unit capable of executing the specific effect when the specific effect determining unit determines execution of the specific effect.
The specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect,
The first specific effect is to display a predetermined initial number of specific images,
The effect executing means is
Later the specific image of the predetermined number of initial is displayed, in the first period to the identification information based on the specific effect pending information execution is determined in starts displaying variation, the first specific effect as the predetermined number of initial decreases being capable of performing display of the specific image as the predetermined remaining number,
In the second period following the first period until the identification information based on the hold information for which the execution of the specific effect is determined stops the variable display after the specific image of the predetermined remaining number is displayed , as the second specific effect, in accordance with the predetermined remaining number, to change the presentation mode of the second specific effect,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the second specific effect is not performed when the first specific effect is performed such that the predetermined remaining number related to the specific image is zero .